CLASSICAL WORKS, 
 
 Harkness's Introductory Latin Book, intended as an Elementarr 
 Drill-Book on the Inflectiona and Principles of the Language. 
 
 LATIN TEXT-BOOKS. 
 
 ntrodnotory Latin Book, intended as ai 
 : on the Inflectiona and Principles of the 
 
 Latin Grammar, for Schools and Colleges. Eeyised 
 
 Edition. 
 
 Elements of Latin Oranunar, for Schools. 
 
 Latin Beader, with Beferences, Snggestions, Notes, 
 
 and Vocabulary* 
 
 Practical Introduction to Latin Composition, for 
 
 Schools and Colleges. Fart 1. Elementary Exercises, intended 
 as a Companion to the Header. Fart n. Latin Syntax. Fart 
 m. Elements of Latin Style, with special Beference to Idioms 
 and Synonymes. (Just published.) 
 
 CtBsar'B Commentaries on the Gallic War, with 
 
 Kotes, Dictionary, Life of Cffisar, Map of Gaul, Flans of Bat- 
 tles, etc. 
 
 Cicero's Select Orations, ^th Notes, etc. 
 
 Arnold's First and Second Latin Book and Practical Gram- 
 mar.* Berlsed and corrected. By J. A. Sfenobb, D. D. 12n)0. 
 359 pages. 
 
 Practical Introduction to Latin Prose Composi- 
 tion.* Bevised and corrected. By J. A. Spencbr, D. D. 13mo. 
 356 pages. 
 
 Cornelius Hepos,* with Qnestions and Answers, and an Imitatire 
 Bxercise on each Chapter. With Notes by B. A. Johnsoh, Pro- 
 fessor of Latin in University of New York. New edition, en- 
 larged, with a Lexicon, Historical and Geographical Index, etc. 
 12mo. 360 pages. 
 
 Beza's Latin Version of the New Testament. ISmo. %91 pages. 
 
 Caesar's Commentaries on the Gallic War, With English 
 Notes, Critical and Explanatory ; a Lexicon, Geographical and 
 Historical Indexes, and a Map of Ganl. By J. A. Spbnozb, D. D. 
 l%mo. 408 pages. 
 
 Cicero's Select Orations. With Notes for the use of Schools and 
 
 Colleges. By E. A. Johnson, Professor of Latin in the Unlrer- 
 
 sity of New York. ISmo. 469 pages. 
 Cicero do Officiis. with English Notes, mostly translated from 
 
 Zmnp and Bonnell. By Thohas A. Thaohbb, of Yale College. 
 
 12mo. 194 pages. 
 
 ^ 
 
Cornell University Library 
 
 3 !324 031 270 121 
 
Cornell University 
 Library 
 
 The original of tliis book is in 
 tine Cornell University Library. 
 
 There are no known copyright restrictions in 
 the United States on the use of the text. 
 
 http://www.archive.org/details/cu31 924031 2701 21 
 
PRACTICAL INTEODUCTION 
 
 TO 
 
 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION 
 
 BY 
 
 THOMAS KERCHEVER ARNOLD, M. A., 
 
 EEOTOE OP LTHDON, 
 AND LATE FELLOW OF TKIWTr COLLEGE, CAMBEIDGli. 
 
 CAREFULLY REVISED AND CORRECTED 
 
 BY 
 
 REV. J.4rf PENCER, A. M. 
 
 FEOM THE FIFTH LONDON EDITION. 
 
 NEW YOEK : 
 
 D. APPLETON AND COMPANY, 
 
 649 & B61 BBOADWAT. 
 
 isri. 
 
Bkiesed, according to Act of Congress, In tho year ISiS, by 
 D. APPLETON <fc CO., 
 In the Clerk's Office of tho District Court of tho United States for tho Bouthcm 
 District of New Torlc 
 
 cornell\ 
 
 university 
 
 LiSRAR 
 
 Y/ 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 The plan and object of the present volume are so fully 
 and so satisfactorily stated by Mr. Arnold in his Preface, 
 that it is quite superfluous for the American Editor to add 
 any thing to what he has there said. It is simply incum- 
 bent on him to state, that he has bestowed much care and 
 attention upon the volume in order to perfect its arrange- 
 ment and render it uniform with the other works of the 
 series, and also to ensure, as far as possible, correctness, 
 'neatness, and even "elegance of typography. While he can 
 hardly dare to, promise himself that there- is an entire 
 absence of errors of this kind, he ventures to express the 
 hope that nothing of consequence has escaped attention, and 
 that the Practical Introduction to Greek Prose Composition 
 will be found equally acceptable and equally valuable with 
 any of its predecessors in the Arnold Series of Classical 
 Books for Schools and Colleges. 
 
 J. A. S. 
 
 New Yokk, Nov. 20th, 1846. 
 
PREFACE 
 
 ENGLISH EDITION. 
 
 The plan of this Introduction requires some ex- 
 planation. Its object is to enable the student, as soon 
 as he can decline and conjugate with tolerable facility, 
 to translate simple sentences after given examples and 
 with given words ; the principles trusted to being those 
 of imitation and very frequent repetition. It is at 
 once a Syntax, a Vocabulary, and an Exercise-book; 
 the Syntax being in substance that of Buttmann's ex- 
 cellent School Grammar. 
 
 One object I have steadily kept in view, that of 
 making the general construction of sentences of more 
 importance than the mere governm,ent of cases, which 
 is nearly all that most Exercise-books pretend to teach. . 
 The Exercises are adapted for viva voce practice ; but 
 if the book is so used, they should by all means be 
 written down afterwards. The Vocabularies, if possi- 
 ble, but at all events the Examples, should be com- 
 mitted to memory and carefully kept up. 
 
 It is due to Mr. Ollendorff, whose Introduction to 
 German has appeared in English, to state that the pub- 
 lication of a work like the present was suggested to me 
 
vm FBEFACE. 
 
 by the advantage I myself derived from the use of his 
 book. I had originally drawn it up exactly on his 
 plan ; but the probable expense of publication deterred 
 me, for some time, from publishing it in that shape.* 
 The present work differs therefore from his, in requir- 
 ing from the pupil a general acquaintance with the 
 Accidence. 
 
 For the convenience of those who may wish to use 
 the Syntax as such, I have added a complete set of 
 Questions to the work. 
 
 T. K. A. 
 
 L/yndon, 1841. 
 
 • The very great success of this work, and the similar one on 
 " Latin Frose Composition" — ^which are now used at all, or nearly all, 
 our public schools, — ^has encouraged the author to send to press the 
 more elementary Exercises here alluded to, under the title of a " Frac> 
 tical Introduction to Greek Accidence." [This volume forms tho 
 « First Greek Leasona," carefully revised and improved by the Ameri- 
 can Editor.] 
 
CONTENTS 
 
 KEOTIOi; I 1 SB 
 
 1. On the Tenses— The Article . U 
 
 2. The Article continued . ...... 13 
 
 3. The Article continued .16 
 
 4. The Article continued 19 
 
 5. The Article continued 20 
 
 6. The Article continued 22 
 
 7. The Article as demonstrative Pronoun — Pronouns . . .24 
 
 8. Pronouns continued 27 
 
 9. Pronouns continued . , .29 
 
 10. Of the Neuter Adjective 31 
 
 11. Subject and. Predicate [Words with which the copula is often 
 
 omitted], ..r.33 
 
 12. Onthe Moods 35 
 
 13. The Moods continued [d, ^v, &c.'\ ...... 38 
 
 14. The Moods continued 40 
 
 15. The Moods continued 43 
 
 16. The Moods continued 46 
 
 17. The Moods continued .47 
 
 18. The Moods continued 49 
 
 19. oi and /lij 50 
 
 20. Verbals in teoj B3 
 
 21. Double Accusative 55 
 
 22. The Accusative after Passive and Neuter Verbs ... 57 
 
 23. The Accusative continued . . 60 
 
 24. The Genitive • . 63 
 
 25. The Genitive continued 65 
 
 26. The Genitive continued [Voc. of Verbs governing the gai.] . 69 
 
 27. The Genitive continued [Voc. of Verbs governing the g«7j.] . 71 
 
 28. The Genitive continued 73 
 
 29. Comparison 75 
 
 30. ^Comparison continued .... ... 78 
 
 31. The Dative [Voc. of Verbs governing the doi.] ... 80 
 
 32. The Middle Voice [Voc. of m«Wfe Verbs] .... 84 
 
 33. Middle Voice continued [Voc. of mida^e Verbs] . . .87 
 
 34. On the Perfect 2. [Voc. of second /'er/ecfej . . .89 
 
 35. Additional Remarks on some of the Moods and Tenses . . 91 
 
 36. On the Infinitive • Si 
 
 37. The Infinitive continued [Voc. of 'Ek] •97 
 
 Sa The Infinitive continued lOl 
 
 39. The Participle [Voc. on the use of some Participles] . . . lOi 
 
 40. The Participle continued [Voc. of Verbs that take the PartKiple] 195 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 dl. The Participle continued : rvyx""") XovSavUi ^6ava [Voc, on 'Ant 
 
 and Tlpdl ■]^^ 
 
 42 Tlie Genitive Absolute, Ac. [Voc. of Words used in Norn. Absol.] lit 
 
 43. The Relative [Voc. on 'Ei-, 'Ava, Eis] 
 
 44. The Relative continued [Voc. on Am.] 
 
 45. b oios ai dvfip [Voc. On Kurd] . , • • 
 
 46. oiS^ls OITTtS ov . • • , • 
 i7. olos, dial, iit>\a [Voc. On'Alifi,TIcf(] . 
 
 48. oiroiSj ov fxfi [Voc. on *Eirt] . • . ■ - 
 
 49. uvt fin owlVoc. on MeroJ .... 
 
 50. ;'i with Relatives, Infin., <lc. [Voc. on Ilafii ] 
 
 51. Some Adverbs of Time, &c 
 
 52. On Interrogative Sentences [Voc. on Ilpis] 
 53 Indirect Single Questions [Voc. ou 'Yjrii] 
 
 54. Double Questions 
 
 55. Observations on tt, iav 
 
 56. Condensed Questions 
 
 57. Various Constructions 
 
 58. Various constructions continued 
 
 59. List of Particles, &c 
 
 [Tables of Prepositions in Composition] 
 Table of Differences of Idiom 
 Questions on the Syntax .... 
 
 Index I. (English) 
 
 Index II. (Greek Phrases explained) 
 Index III. (Irregular Nouns and Verbs) 
 
 113 
 117 
 120 
 123 
 125 
 128 
 130 
 133 
 136 
 139 
 143 
 145 
 146 
 148 
 150 
 152 
 154 
 163 
 169 
 181 
 197 
 231 
 235 
 
 EXPLANATION OF ABBREVIATIONS, &c. 
 
 B., E., M., R., T., denote respectively the Greek Grammars of Butt- 
 mann, Kmner, Matthid, Host, and Tliiersch. Kr. stands for Kruger. 
 
 E. refers to the Eton Greek Grammar. 
 
 R., after a declinable word, stands for root. Thus, y6vv, R. y6vaT, 
 means, that the regular terminations are to be added to yti/ar. 
 
 V. refers to Vomel's Synonymisches vVorterbuch. 
 
 A Greek letter added after a verb, shows that the simpler root (as it 
 Bpjtears, for Instance, in aar. 2 ) ends in that letter. 
 
PRACTICAL INTRODUCTION 
 
 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION. 
 
 ^ 1. On the Tenses. — The Article. 
 
 1. It is taken for granted that the student knows : — 
 
 (1) That the verb agrees with its nominative case in numbeT 
 and person.* 
 
 (2) That every adjective word — ^whether adjective, participle, pro- 
 noun, or article — must agree with its substantive in gender, num- 
 ber, and case. 
 
 (3) That the transitive verb is followed by the accusative. 
 
 (4) That one substantive depending upon another is put in the 
 genitive case. 
 
 (5) That any verb may have the same case after it as before it, 
 when both words refer to the same person or thing. 
 
 2. The Imperfect, besides the usual meaning of 
 that tensCjt is used to express continued or repeated 
 actions, taking place in past time. 
 
 3. The Aorists express actions completed in past 
 lime.t 
 
 * But a dual nominative is often joined with a plural verb ; and a 
 ntuter plural generally takes a singular verb. 
 
 t The Imperfect expresses 1) an action continuing during another 
 antion which is past ; 2) an action continued by being frequently re- 
 peated ; and (occasionally) 3) an action begun or intended, but not 
 completed. (See Jelfs Greek Gram. Vol. II. p. 53.) — Am. Ed. 
 
 t The Aorists mark actions simply past, without reference to other 
 actions, at the same or a different tilne ; as eyparpa rijv IniaTo^ijv, " 1 
 wrote the letter (without specifying time or circumstance). Hence, the 
 aorists referring to time past indefinitely, are used to denote momentary 
 acts, and also actions repeatedly done in pasl time. In this latter case 
 it may be rendered by the present or by the phrase "to be wont, or ac- 
 customed," &c. (See Jelfs Greek Gram. Vol. II. p. 57.) — ^Am. Ed. 
 
lli THE ARTICLE. 
 
 Hence the Aorist ie used of momentary and singli actions ; thi 
 
 Imperfect, o{ continued and repeated ones. 
 The dog hit him (aor.) : the dog hmeled all night {imperf.) 
 Obs. The Imperfect (of Iwbitual actions) is often rendered by 
 
 ' used to,' &c, 
 
 4. The Perfect expresses actions continued or re- 
 maining in their effects up to the present time. 
 
 o) Hence the aor. is nearly our perfect indefinite 
 (the perf. formed by inflection) : the per/, our perfect 
 definite (or perfect with 'have'). 
 
 b) But when the connection of the past with the 
 present is obvious from the context, the aorist may be 
 used for the perfect ; or, in a narrative, for the pluper- 
 fect. 
 
 c) It is only when a particular stress is to be laid on 
 the time of the occurrence, that the perfect or pluperf. 
 must be used. All this is, however, greatly influenced 
 by euphony. 
 
 5. A governed genitive is often placed between an 
 article and its noun. 
 
 6. TO T^S oiQSTtje xdXlog, the beauty of virtue. 
 
 6 Tu iris noXecos Tigdyixaza nQdzttov, he who trans- 
 acts {or manages) the affairs of the state. 
 In this way two and even three articles stand together. 
 
 7. o nQdrrmv, {the person doing =) he who does. 
 
 Hence the artic, with a participle is equivalent to a personal oi 
 demonstrative pronoun with a relative sentence. 
 Thus, 
 
 & TipaTTuiv, equivalent to UtTvos Ss Troarrti^ he who does. 
 
 TOV TTpOLTTOVTOSf Of hilTl WhO dOCS. 
 
 &c. 
 PI. ol Trp&TrovT€Sj equivalent to iKsTvoi ot nparrovtrtj those who do. 
 Ttjiv TrpaTTdvTtaVf of those who do 
 &c. 
 
 8. Vocabulary 1 
 
 Virtue, dgeri^, ije, ij. 
 
 Beauty, xdRo?, see, to'. 
 
 City, jtohg, sme, rj. 
 
 Thing or affair, ngayiia,'- atog, to. 
 
 • Nouns in pa from verbs, generally denote the thing produced by tlu 
 let. They may be compared with the pass, participle (tJ irtTrpoyulioi.') 
 
THE ARTICLE. 13 
 
 To do, transact, manage, nQdiToa. 
 
 Wonder, or am surprised ) ^avftdlm (with fut. mid^ 
 
 at, admire, C but aoj: 1 act.). 
 Well, . e?. 
 
 HI) xaxmg. 
 
 Often, frequently, noXXdxie. 
 
 Citizen, nolirijg,^ ov, 6. 
 
 Judge, xQii^js, ov, 6. 
 
 TrpaTTD, do, has also the inlransit. meaning of our to be doing wed 
 or ill : i. e. to be prosperous or unfortuTiate. In this sense it has 
 the perf. 2. irEirpnya. The a is long throxtghout. 
 
 Exercise 1. 
 
 9. I admire the beauty of the city. The citizens are 
 doing well. I have often admired the beauty of the 
 cities. The judge often admired the beauty of virtue. 
 I admire those who transact (7) the affairs of the state. 
 He transacts the affairs of the state ill. The citizens 
 are doing ill. I have often admired the virtue of the 
 citizen. The citizens admire the virtue of the judge. 
 
 ^ 2. The Article continued. 
 
 10. (a) Proper names often take the article, if they 
 are the names of persons well known. 
 
 Hence the names of Deities, Heroes, &c., generally take the arti- 
 cle ; and the names of persons recently mentioned. 
 
 11. {h) But if the proper name is followed by a de- 
 scription which has the article, the proper name is 
 without the article, unless it is to be expressed em- 
 
 ' Nouns in ttji of the first decl. from verhs, denote the male doer oj 
 the action : those from substantives denote a person standing in anv 
 near relation to what is denoted by the substantive : as m\iTtis from 
 •eXij. Those in irm from sulst., have the i long. Kptrrjs is from aptvoi 
 
14 THE ARTICLE. 
 
 •phalically, as being well-known, or as having been 
 vreviously mentioned.' 
 
 12. (c) The Greek has no indefinite article (our 'a ). 
 (d) Our 'a' should be translated by tIs, when a 
 
 ■particular person or thing is meant, though not 
 named : in other words, wherever we might substitute 
 ' a certain ' for ' a '. 
 
 13. (e) The subject'^ generally has the article, the 
 predicate not. 
 
 14. (a) 6 HontQcirrig, Socrates ; at 'A&rivai, Athens. 
 (6) ^axQUTjjg 6 cpii.6soq)og, Socrates the Philoso- 
 pher. 
 
 (c) innog stehs Xayoiv, a mare brought forth a 
 
 hare. 
 
 (d) yvvq Tig ognv sJxsv, a woman (or, a certain 
 
 woman) had a hen. 
 
 (e) ^ xoQr) iyevsTo aSKog,' the girl became (or, was 
 
 turned into) a leather bottle. 
 
 15. YOCABULARY 2. 
 
 Socrates, 2<oxQUT]]g,' ovg, 6. 
 
 Athens, 'A&rjvai, car, at. 
 Philosopher, qiiXoaocpog, ov, 6. 
 
 Horse, mare, innog, ov, 6 et ij. 
 
 TT ^ kayag, oi, 6 [acc. Xayav or 
 
 '^^^^> ) laya). 
 Woman, yvvri, ywaixog, ^ (voc. yvvui). 
 
 Hen, oQvig,^ oQvTOog, 6 et »). 
 
 Water, vdooQ, vdarog, i6. 
 
 * Kr. who quotes Bacch. 1314: vvv Ik Sdiiitiv &Tiiios cKPe0^n<rojtei | b 
 Itdiitos b fiiyas. 
 
 ^ That is, the nominatjue before the veri. The predicate is what is 
 affirmed or said of the subject. (See note »). 
 
 * Or, djKds iyivLTo h k6^i\. So, Gcds T\v o^Arfyof, the Word was God 
 This arises from the nature of a proposition. We usually assert of a 
 particular thing that it is included, as an individual, in a particular 
 class ; not that it is the whole of that class. 
 
 ' ^ofKpaTTii, G. ovs, D. et, &.C. A. Sw/rpart) (Plato), TiOiKpdrriv (Xe^o- 
 phon), V. ^uiKpares. 
 
 t ' Bird,' but in Alt. generally eocJc, hen ; just ae we use fowl. G. 
 fpvlBas, Sec. A. a and v. Plur. reg., hut also Soms, G. ifviaiv, D. i(wl 
 «(>') o.ily. Ace. ipwis {ifvls). 
 
THK AKTICLE. ] 5 
 
 Wine, oZvos,"' ov, 6. 
 
 Boy, soil, nais, naiSos, 6. 
 
 To have, i^oo.i 
 
 To bring forth, or (of birds) ; , ^, , 
 
 to lay, \ ^'"^w (^«'')- 
 Damsel, maiden, «o'e^, »??, i}. 
 
 Leather-bottle, «(txos, ov, 6. 
 
 Become, yiyvofiai'^ (/s*)- 
 
 An egg, (Boj)j oU, ro. 
 
 Three, iqeXg, rqsig, rqlu. 
 
 Exercise 2. 
 
 16. I admire the beauty of the hen. A (14. {d) boy 
 nad a hare. The water was turned into (= became) wine 
 (14. (e). The hen laid three eggs. A certain damsel 
 nad three hens. I admire the virtue of the maiden. 
 The hare was turned into (= became) a horse. The 
 boy admires the beauty of Athens. The citizens ad- 
 mire the beauty of the woman. I admire those who 
 transact* the affairs of Athens. I have often admired 
 the virtue of Socrates. I admire Socrates the philoso- 
 pher. The woman shall have a hen. The water has 
 been turned into ( = become) wine. A certain judge 
 has three hens. 
 
 '' olvos, with the digamma Foii'os, vtnum. So i!i6v, wFo'k, ovum. 
 
 * ^y^^oiy^oi and ff^TJcTO}, Eff^ijKa. Imperf. £t;^of r aor. Ea'j^ovy ia^(iOTi». 
 [e(r;^oj/, ox^s (FX^ ^^ compounds), a^oiriVj irx^t '^X^^"* '^X^*'!' 
 
 ^ riKTd), (rcftj) Te^o/iatf rtrOKa, stekov, eTSKdjiJjv, 
 
 1 yiyvonat, yEvfiiToiiaij yeyivrijxm and yiyova, iyEv6ftnv. All inirans. iiM 
 am horn ; become. iyEndjiriv and yiyova also serve for preterites of the 
 verb " to he." When yiyova may be construed ' I am,' it means, ' / am 
 iy hirth,' ' have lecome.' (B.)—ryEtvojiai, am horn, poet. : aor. iyEivijiriv 
 iegot, bore (in prose as well as poetry). 
 
 * Numerals like this at the top of the line refer to the Table cf Dif 
 erences of Idiom at the close of the volume. 
 
•16 THE ARTICLE. 
 
 ^ 3. Article continued. 
 
 17. (a) When the my, thy, his, their, <kc. are em 
 phatic they are to be translated by possessive pronouns; 
 with the article. 
 
 18. (6) My, yonr, his, &c. are to be translated by 
 the article, when it is quite obvious whose the thing in 
 question is. 
 
 Whenever there is any opposition (as, when •Mne is opposed to 
 yours or any other person's) the pronouns must be used. 
 
 19. (c) When an adj. without the article stands he- 
 fore the article of the substantive, the thing spoken of 
 IS not distinguished from any thing else, but from 
 itself under other circumstances." 
 
 {d) When a noun which has just preceded, is to be 
 
 repeated again, the article belonging to it stands alone. 
 
 19*. (a) 6 aog SovXos, thy or your slave (emphatic 
 
 and precise) ; but aog doiXog, a slave of 
 
 yours (indefinite). 
 
 (6) alyto t^i> xE(j)csi)/j' (I am pained as to the 
 
 head= ) I have a pain in my head. 
 
 (c) ijdsTo Bnl nXovaiots roig noklToug, he rejoiced 
 
 (or was glad), when the citizens were 
 wealthy, (or, on account of the citizens 
 who xoere wealthy). 
 
 [d) 6 i/ibg naiijQ xai 6 rov <fllov, my father and 
 
 my friend^s, (literally, my father and 
 the of my friend). 
 • 20. Vocabulary 3. 
 
 Slave, hoiXog, ov, 6. 
 
 To feel or suffer pain ; to ^ ,. , 
 
 be pained at, ^ alyeat. 
 
 Head, xsgpal?/, rig, ^. 
 
 " TnuB in the example following it is not, 'rich citizens,' as op 
 posed to other citizens ; but 'he rejoice 1 in their ieing rich ; or in the 
 wealth of . . .' &o. 
 
THE AETICLE. 
 
 17 
 
 To rejoice, be glad, or to 
 take pleasure in, 
 
 ^8ofiai (with dative). 
 
 Wealthy, rich, 
 
 Tilovaiog," a, ov. 
 
 Father, 
 
 nar^Q,' eQog (qos), 6. 
 
 Friend, 
 
 (pilos, ov, 6. 
 
 Thine, thy 
 
 aog, ari, aov. 
 
 Mine, my, 
 
 iltog, 'n, ov. 
 
 Jaw, 
 
 ym&og, ov, ^. 
 
 Tooth, 
 
 odovs, ovtog, 0. 
 
 Ear, 
 
 ovg, atog, to. 
 
 Foot, 
 
 novg, nodog, 6. 
 
 Hand, 
 
 XsiQ, x«eo?, ^ (root xeg for 
 
 
 G. D. dual and D. plur.) 
 
 Knee, 
 
 yovv, yovazog, to (R. yovaz). 
 
 Brother, 
 
 ddslcpog, ov, 6. 
 
 Daughter, 
 
 &vydrriQ,' egog (gog), ^. 
 
 Mother, 
 
 fi^Ttip,' SQog (qog), ri. 
 
 "Wise, clever. 
 
 aotpog, jj, ov. 
 
 Happy, 
 
 evSai'ftmv, lav, ov. 
 
 To love. 
 
 (film. 
 
 To be vexed at, 
 
 dx&ofiai, s'aopMi, fix&£a9^p 
 
 
 {dative). 
 
 Beautiful, 
 
 xaiog, ri, ov. 
 
 Bad, 
 
 ''v.av.og, ii, ov. 
 
 Obs. 1. W^fSai and 2;(;flw9oi are more commonly followed hy Hit, 
 dat.t (without a prepos.) except in the construction explained in 19. c. 
 
 Obb. 2. 'TVtat,' when it stands for a subst. before expressed, is to 
 be translated by the article. (See 19*. d.) 
 
 Exercise 3. 
 
 21. The mother of the beautiful daughter has a pain 
 in her jaws. I am glad that my brothers are happy.' 
 
 » Adjectives in loj denote what belongs to, concerns, or comes from 
 what the root expresses. They are formed from suhsiantives, and some- 
 times from other adjectives in os. When the root ends in r it is some- 
 times changed into a : r^ovros, wealth, TrXomios. 
 
 • Jlartip, iifiTrip, fluyomp, yaarfip, throw away e in G. and D. sing, and 
 D. pi. They have V. ep, and insert d before m in D. pi. 
 
 f 'Ax^oiicu, and in liie poets tjSofiai, are also followed by the ace. 
 especially of neut. pronouns. 
 
18 THE ARTICLE. 
 
 The father rejoiced in his son's being wise (c). Mj 
 friend and my brother's (d). I often have a pain in my 
 foot. My mother was suffering from a pain in hei 
 hands (b). I am vexed that the bad are wealthy (c). 
 The daughter loves her mother. My slave loves my 
 brother's. I admire your virtue and thai of your 
 friend. The beautiful damsel shall be turned into a 
 horse, I am pleased with those who transact^ the 
 affairs of the state. He was vexed that the citizens 
 were rich. I take pleasure in my daughter's being 
 beautiful (c). 
 
 § 4. Article continued. 
 
 22. a) The Greeks often place the genitives between 
 the noun governing and the article ; or they 
 repeat the article after the noun. 
 h) A noun or participle is often understood, so 
 that the article stands alone. 
 
 2.3. a) ij row noi'qtov aocplci,'^ or r] aocpla ^ tov hoiijtov, 
 the wisdom (cleverness Sec.) of the poet. ^ 
 «ai,ii xegpcel)/, or tj xsqiaXi] rj xukif Tijg xoQijg, 
 the beautiful head of the maiden, 
 b) '^Xe^avdqog 6 i>iXinnov, Alexander the son of 
 Philip {v'log, sow, understood). 6 Zcocpgoviaxov, 
 the son of Sophroniscus. elg z^v ^hXinnov, 
 into Philip's country {j^dqav, country un- 
 derstood). ia TTig nSlscog, the affairs q/" the 
 state {nQa.jna.ta understood), za ifxcc, my 
 affairs, my property, ot iv aatsi, the people 
 in the city, those in the city, ot avv rijl 
 ^aaiku, those with the king. 
 
 ' Substantives in ii are derived from adj., and express the ahstracl 
 notion of the adj. — The other positions of the gen. are frequently met 
 with : "M-tiieirit TTiv ipTtayfiv. (Herod, i. 3.) ^ dvaj(iiipnais tcHv 'AOijvaiuv, 
 (Thuc. i. 12.) For a partitive gen. these are the only correct positions. 
 
 ' The l&tter position gives emphasis to the adjective or dependen 
 genitive. 
 
THE AETICLK. 
 
 19 
 
 24. Vocabulary 4. 
 
 Poet, 
 
 Wisdom, cleverness, 
 
 Alexander, 
 
 Philip, 
 
 Sophroniscus, 
 
 Son, 
 
 Country, 
 
 Our, 
 
 Your, 
 
 March an army (when 
 spoken of its general), 
 
 March (of the army, and 
 oi 'a. ^exwin. undertaking 
 an expedition) also jour- 
 ney, set out, &c., 
 
 Persian, 
 
 Scythian, 
 
 Cyrus, 
 
 King, 
 
 Madness, 
 
 People, 
 
 Army, 
 
 Geometer, 
 
 With, 
 
 City, town, 
 
 noirjTtjg, ov, o. 
 aoqiia, as, ^. 
 'Ali^KuSQog, ov, 6. 
 fpikmnog, ov, o. 
 2aifQoviaxog, ov, 6. 
 viog, ov, 6. 
 X^QU, ag, ri. 
 Tj/iETtQog, a, ov. 
 viihsQog, a, ov. 
 
 iXavvco.' 
 
 ^oQSvofttti (with aor.i pass,, 
 ini Tiva, against a per 
 son). 
 
 nsgarig, ov, 6. 
 ^Kv&ijg, ov, 6. 
 KvQog, ov, 6. 
 ^aatXsvg, scog, 6. 
 (lavia,^ ag, ri. 
 dljfiog, ov, 6. 
 OTQUTSviia,'' arog, ro. 
 yBOitfiszQ'^g, ov, 6. 
 avv (dative), 
 aaxv,'' sog, i6. 
 
 Exercise 4. 
 25. I admire the wisdom of the geometer. The peo- 
 
 • i\avvttt, i\&tra) (a), eXfiXajca, eXijXa/iai, v^a^jjv, Att. fut. eXu, 5f, 3, &c., 
 infill. iXSv. It is trans, {drive, urge on), but used as intrans. {march, 
 ride), by omission of ace. 
 
 ' This word was formed from an adj. /larft, mad, which is quoted 
 by Suidas. 
 
 ■ oTparCs, (TTpartd, army ; arpaTEia, expedition. uTpaTevjia has both 
 meanings ; the latter oiien in Herodotus. 
 
 . * aarv never means the state, as rfXij does. It is often used of an 
 old or sacred part of a irAii, sa Londoners speak rf ' the City,' as a part 
 if London. 
 
20 THE ARTICLE. 
 
 pie in the city admire the beautiful mother of the dam- 
 sel. The people in the city admire the very beautiful 
 daughter of the very beautiful mother. The king 
 marches into the country of the Scythians. The army 
 of the Persians marches into the country of the Scythi- 
 ans. Cyrus marches against the king of the Persians. 
 The son of Sophroniscus is astonished at the madness 
 of the people. The poet admires those who manage^ 
 the afiairs of the state. I rejoice in the king's being 
 wealthy.* I am vexed when the bad are wealthy. The 
 people in ;the city (d) admire the son of Philip. The 
 king has the toothache {i. e. suffers pain in his teeth*). 
 The clever geometer has a pain in his knees. A certain 
 poet had a very beautiful horse. Those with the king 
 will march against the son of Philip. 
 
 § 5. Article continued. 
 
 26. An adverb with the Article is equivalent to an 
 adjective. 
 
 27. oi ndlai," the long ago men = the men of old. 
 
 6 nEza^v XQovoe, the between time = the intermediate 
 time. 
 
 ri avQiov, adv. (riitiqa, day, understood), the morrow, 
 the next day. 
 
 28. Vocabulary 5. 
 
 
 Long ago. 
 
 ndXai. 
 
 Man, 
 
 av&Qoonoe ov, 6 {—ho?no). 
 
 Between, 
 
 flBTO^V. 
 
 To-morrow, 
 
 avQiov {adv.) 
 
 Time, 
 
 Xqovog, ov, 6. 
 
 Near, 
 
 nilag: itXijaiov. 
 
 One's neighbour, 
 
 6 nX^aiov. 
 
 Then, 
 
 ■tote. 
 
 So in English, ' the then Mayor.' 
 

 THE ARTICLE. 21 
 
 Now, 
 
 vvv. 
 
 Here, 
 
 ip9d8s. 
 
 There, 
 
 ixsT. 
 
 Up, upwards. 
 
 avio.^ 
 
 Down, downwards, 
 
 xdteo. 
 
 Move, 
 
 xmm. 
 
 Crocodile, 
 
 xQoxodedoe, ov, 6. 
 
 Both, 
 
 Sftcpm: ttjugjowpoff: (the lal. 
 
 - 
 
 ter often in the plur.: 
 
 
 ttftqioTSQa ta onTa, both his 
 
 
 ears. Xen.) 
 
 Life, 
 
 ^los, ov, 6. 
 
 This, 
 
 ovtos, avrti, tovro, &c. 
 
 Exercise 5. 
 
 53° In doing the exercise, consider wliiclx of the adverbs cornea 
 nearest to the meaning of the adjective or equivalent phrase. 
 
 29. The men of old did this. They did this the next 
 day (dat.) The crocodile moves its upper jaw. The 
 son of Sophroniscus has a pain* in both his ears. I am 
 surprised at the madness of the Persians of old times. 
 I wonder at the men of the present day.^ I admire the 
 wise men of old. They love the present life. We won- 
 der at the madness of our neighbours. Thepeople there' 
 are astonished at the madness of those with the king. 
 I am astonished at the cleverness of those who manage 
 my affairs. 
 
 Exercise 6. 
 
 30. He had a pain {imperf.) in both his knees. The 
 people here admire the son of Sophroniscus. The cro- 
 codile was turned into a hare (14. c). The people here 
 
 * Of coiuitriea, oi/M is used of marching into the interior; Kd™, of 
 marching down to the coast. 
 
 7 The now men. 
 
 " People z=persons must not be translated by l!inK The people 
 there, ol IkX. 
 
THE 4RTICLE. 
 
 admire my daughter and my brother's. The people 
 there are domg well. I have often wondered at the wis- 
 dom of our present geometers. The crocodile lays eggs. 
 The king of the Scythians has a pain in* his /ower jaw. 
 
 § 6. Article continued. 
 
 31. a) To express that a person 'has o very beau- 
 
 tiful head,' the Greeks said : 'has the head 
 very beautiful.'' 
 
 32. b) 10 xaloV, is: 'the beautiful,^^ 'the honorable,^ 
 
 in the abstract; beauty, ra xakd, are: 
 
 beautiful (or honorable) things ; whatever 
 
 things are beautiful; what is beautiful, 
 
 or simply, beautiful things. 
 
 Obs. We learn from (34*. 6), that the firal person plur. of the 
 pres. nibj. is used in exhortations ; and from (34*. c), that itfi is 
 used with it for ' not ' (See 107*. I.) 
 
 33. d) The infinitive with the article becomes a 
 
 substantive declinable throughout, and an- 
 swering* to the English 'participial sub- 
 stantive in — ing. 
 
 34. e) .^(f^rac^ nouns, and the names of materials, 
 
 generally take the article. When a whole 
 class, or any individual of that class, is 
 meant, the noun, whether singular or plural, 
 takes the article. 
 34*. a) 6 QivoxsQmg rtjv Sogav la'jgvQordrriv i^Ei, the rhi- 
 noceros has a very strong hide, 
 b) tfivymiisvia, alay^qoi ' didxm/isv r« }ca).ci, let us fly 
 
 " The article must not be used, unless it is assumed that the thing 
 in question has the property, the object being only to describe of what 
 kind it is. If the writer wished to inform us that the rhinoceros had a 
 hide, which was moreover a strong one, he would not use the article. 
 Thus of the crocodile: cj($i il m! Ivvx"! Kaprefois, it also has strong 
 claws. 
 
 ■> Thus in EInglish, " Burke on the Sullime and Beautiful." 
 
THK AKTICT.E. 
 
 23 
 
 /rom what is base; let us pursue what ia 
 honorable. 
 
 c) jK^ 8im«(Ofiev tm alaxQci, let us not pursue what 
 
 is base. 
 
 d) jotaxv laXsTtijtalkingfast; lov rap) lalsiv,of 
 
 ts&mg fast, &c.; zo navrag xaxws liysiv, 
 the speaking ill of every body. 
 c) ^ K^erif, virtue; b xqiiaog, gold ; ol aya&oi, the 
 
 good ; ol aeioi, eagles, 
 f) Tozs}.EvzaTov,atlast; zo ano tovSs,' henceforth, 
 
 35. Vocabulary 6. 
 
 Rhinoceros, 
 Nose, 
 
 Horn, ■ 
 
 Hide, 
 
 Strong, 
 
 To fly from, 
 
 Base, disgraceful, 
 
 To pursue, 
 Fast, quick, 
 
 Talk, 
 
 Speak, say, 
 
 Speak ill of. 
 
 Speak well of. 
 
 Treat ill, behave ill to. 
 
 Treat well, do kind offices 
 
 to, confer benefits on. 
 Elephant, 
 Stag, 
 Gold, 
 
 QivoxiQ(og, (OTog, o. 
 
 Qig, (jivog, ^ {plur. "nos- 
 trils"). 
 
 xsQccg, atog («off, (og), to. 
 
 Saqd,^ ag, ij. 
 
 la^vQog, «, oV. 
 
 cpsvyco. 
 
 alayi^Qog, a, 6v : alailtov, a'a- 
 yiazog. 
 
 Siianca.' 
 
 zafvg, sia, v (neut. adj. a 
 adv.) 
 
 Xtym. 
 
 xaxmg Xsystv {acc.) 
 ev i^siv {ace.) 
 xanmg noisiv {acc.) 
 
 sv noisTv {ace.) 
 
 Hiqiag, avzog, o. 
 eXaqiog, ov, 6. 
 XQvaog, ov, 6. 
 
 ' TAterally,' the from this' (time). 
 
 "■ Nouns in a and 17, from verbal roots, are generally oxytone, TIm 
 abstract notion predominates in them (B.) ; the vowel of the rof.t is 
 often changed into o, as in perf. 2. (mid.) Slpio, flay ; Sopa. 
 
 " The fut. mid. is the more common in Attic Greek. 
 
24 PBONOUNS. 
 
 Good, uya96s, ?;, iv : ttneivtov, SqiO' 
 
 Tog, 
 Eagle, isTos, ov, 6. 
 
 lidKuv is also, to prvsecute ; ipevyuv, to be prosecuted : liaKUv rui 
 ^Siiov, to proaeeute a man on a charge of murder; fsiyctv ^6vov (un- 
 derstand SiKTiVy causCj trial)j to be tried for murder _ 
 
 Exercise 7. 
 
 36. The elephant has a strong hide. The maiden 
 has very beautiful hands. The stag has very beautiful 
 horns. '^ The Persian's boys pursue what is honorable. 
 Let us fly from those who pursue' what is disgrace- 
 ful. Do not let us fly from what is honorable. Let us 
 avoid ( /?y from) talking fast. Let us fly from the mad- 
 ness of speaking" ill of every body. Let us do kind 
 offices to our friends. The citizens prosecute Philip 
 on a charge of murder." Sophroniscus was tried for 
 murder.^'' Let us henceforth pursue the honorable. 
 Let us not treat our (18) slaves ill. He took pleasure 
 in doing kind offices to the good {Obs. 1. p. 17). The 
 Scythians admire the beauty of gold. The boy won- 
 ders at the horn of the rhinoceros. 
 
 ^ 7. Article as a demonstrative pronoun. Pronoun 
 
 37. a) 6 [iBv — 6 8b,' this — that; the one — the other, 
 
 «fcc. 01 ixiv — 01 de, these — those ; som,e — 
 others. (More than one 6 8s may follow.) 
 
 38. 6) In a narrative o 8s stands (once) in reference 
 
 ' liiv, indeed ; — Si, hut. Often, however, there is no considerable 
 opiiosition between words so connected, the use of (if » being principally 
 to prepare us for a coming il. It need not be translated, except when 
 the context plainly requires an indeed. — In translating from English 
 into Greek, whenever the second of two connected clauses has a hut 
 the first should have a /ifv. 
 
PEONOUNS. 25 
 
 to an objeci already named. So xa\ og, when the refer- 
 ence is to a person. 
 
 39. d. 1) uvTos is ^self,' when it stands in the nom, 
 
 without a substantive, or, in any case 
 with one. 
 
 2) aiiiig is him, her, it, &c. in an obliqne 
 
 case without a substantive. 
 
 3) 6 uvtig is * the same} 
 
 4) avTos standing alone in an oblique case, 
 
 is never '■selfj except when it is the 
 first word of the sentence. 
 
 40. a) 7« avza tovg filv 'kvntl, tovg 8e ts'qtisi, the 
 
 same things pain some persons, but de- 
 light others. 
 
 b) Xvxog afiiiov iSioDXSv • 6 Ss els vuov >iaTe'qivys,s a 
 
 wolf was pursuing a lamb ; and (or but^) 
 it fled for refuge into a temple. 
 
 c) xoii, OS i^anKTij&sie Suoxei ara xqutos, and he, 
 
 being deceived, pursues at full speed (lit- 
 erally, ' at or with force or strength^). 
 
 d) avTos sqit], he himself sairf {it). avTog 6 dovlos, 
 
 or, 6 dovXog aviog, the slave himself: 6 avrhg 
 dovXog,.the same slave. iiaXkov tovro q)o^ov- 
 •liai ^ 10V ■ddvaiov avz 6v, I fear this more 
 than death itself, 'idaxcv avroTg to nvg, 
 he gave them the fire, avzov yag sidov, 
 for I saw the man himself: tliov laq av- 
 T 6 V, for I saw him. 
 
 41. Vocabulary 7. 
 
 Same, o avzog, »f, o. 
 
 Some — others, ot fiiv — ol Si. 
 
 To pain, annoy, Xvnm. 
 
 Delight, Tiqno). 
 
 B Karivpevyoi. (2. aor.) 
 
 ^ il is not only hut, but also and, and in Homer for. It is used 
 where no other particle is required, to avoid having a proposition in the 
 middle of a discourse unconnected vrith what goes before. It is often 
 therefore, omitted in translating into English. 
 o 
 
20 
 
 PKONOUNj!. 
 
 Wol^ 
 
 XvKoe, OV, 0. 
 
 Lamb, 
 
 Aftrog, OV, o. 
 
 Ply for refuge, 
 
 ■AaTCKpevYto. 
 
 Temple, 
 
 yaoff,' OV, 0. 
 
 More — than, 
 
 lixXXof — ?. 
 
 To fear, 
 
 cpo^eofiai''. 
 
 Death, 
 
 &6,yatos, OV, o. 
 
 Fire, 
 
 nvq, nvQog, to 
 
 Say, 
 
 cpiquL 
 
 Give, 
 
 dldtoiti. 
 
 Sheep, 
 
 oig, ojg.i 
 
 Dogj 
 
 xvmr, xvvog, 6 et fj [m. ii 
 
 
 the sex is not to be spec- 
 
 
 ified. R. xvv, V. itvov). 
 
 House, 
 
 olxog, ov, 6. 
 
 Deceive, 
 
 anaiouo, i^auardm (the lat- 
 
 
 ter being stronger, to de- 
 
 
 ceive thoroughly). 
 
 At full speed. 
 
 ara xgdrog {at force). 
 
 Force, strength, 
 
 xgdiog, sag {ovg), x6. 
 
 Ride, 
 
 ikavvtiv {to. drive on, Innov 
 
 
 understood). 
 
 For, 
 
 7«e- 
 
 r|r Can yop begin 
 
 the sentence? {JNo) Can HI (No.) Can/ifcl 
 
 (No.) 
 
 
 
 Exercise 8. 
 
 42. A dog was pursuing a sheep, and it fled-for-re- 
 fuge into a house. iSome admire the mother ; others the 
 daughter. Cyrus rides at full speed. I" wiyscZ/" say it 
 I admire the mother more than the daughter herself. 
 They will give him the gold. I will give the gold to 
 (the man) himself (39. 4). I deceived the slave himself. 
 
 * In act. frighten. It has /. mid. and pass. ; aor. pass. 
 The forms in Attic Greek are ; S. oij, oMt, o'd, Sin, — D. o7c, oMf. 
 P. old, oldu, oi'rri, oias and oif. (It is m. and /. 
 •» The noni. of the personal pron. is not to be expressed. 
 
PRONOUNS. 21 
 
 And they (40. c), being deceived, fly-for-refuge into a 
 temple. And he, riding at full- speed, flies from those 
 who' are pursuing him." The wolves fly at full speed 
 Let us pursue the wolves at full speed. The same dogs 
 are pursuing the hares. Let us pursue them° ourselves. 
 Let us not deceive our neighbour. The Persians of 
 those dai/s'^ pursued honorable things."' Speak weL 
 of those who* have done you kind offices^." 
 
 '5 8. Pronouns continued. 
 
 43. The nouii with ovtne, ods (this), hsivos {that), 
 takes the article ; the pronoun standing before the arti- 
 cle, or after the noun. 
 
 44. nag in the sing.' without the article (= gxaaios), 
 each,' 'every ;' with the article, ^ whole,'' 'all.' 
 
 45. a) ovTog 6 anjQ, or 6 dr^Q ovzog \not 6 ovtog «»')?'?]. 
 
 this man. ixetroe 6 dvi^Q,, or 6 dvi]Q ixeirog 
 
 that man. avtog 6 ^aatXsvg, or 6 ^aaiXEvg av- 
 
 log, the king himself, 
 b) naaa. nolig, every city; nma ri nohg, the whole 
 
 city, all the city, 
 t) alXot, others ; ol aXloi, the others ; at eregot, the 
 
 others (with a stronger opposition), the other 
 
 party. 
 
 d) ri aXXri xtoQa, the rest of the country. 
 
 e) noXloi, many ; at no XX oi, the many, the mul- 
 
 titude, most people. 
 
 46. Vocabulary 8. 
 
 Others, aXXoi. 
 
 The others, at aXXoi. 
 
 * The ace of the pronoun is seldom expressed when the pereoi; 
 meant is quite obvious. 
 
 " In the plur. murss must have the article, when there is reference « 
 particular objects : when not, the usage is variable. 
 
28 TEONOUNS. 
 
 The other party, oi ettgoi. 
 
 The rest of, 6 aUoe (agreeing with its 
 
 subst.) 
 
 Many, much, noXvg,^ noXl^, noXi. 
 
 Great, fteyas, jJisydX^, lit'ya. 
 
 The many, the multitude, / . „ , 
 
 Most people, \ 
 
 Every, 
 
 each, . 
 
 nag (in the si7ig. without 
 the art.) 
 
 The whole, all. 
 
 nag 6, or 6 nag (in the sing. 
 
 
 
 P].7idvTsg: see note on 44.) 
 
 This, 
 
 
 ovTog: ode. 
 
 That, 
 
 
 ixcTvog, ri, o. 
 
 Man, 
 
 
 av^q, Sqog : av&Qconog, ov, 6. 
 
 To cut, 
 
 
 Tsiivto,i (of a country to rav- 
 age or lay waste by cut- 
 ting down its trees, crops, 
 _&c.)^ 
 
 The enemy, 
 
 ol noXt'iuoi (.adj.) 
 
 Obs. dvfip ' {vir), man as opposed to woman, and used in a good 
 sense. auOpams {homo), man as a human being, opposed to other 
 animals; and often used, lilie homo, wlien contempt is to be ex- 
 pressed. 
 
 Exercise 9. 
 
 Jj-Obs. With 'ikh,' 'that,' the order is, 
 
 Pron. An. Noun, 
 
 (or,) Art. Noun, Pron. 
 
 47. The enemy laid waste the whole country. Tii«s 
 other party are laying waste the rest of the country. 
 My brother is pursuing the same Persians. I admire this 
 city. I often admired that city. The many do not (ov) 
 admire the beauty of wisdom. The king himself is lay- 
 ing waste the rest of the country. A certain man was 
 pursuing his slave ; but he fled for refuge into the upper ' ' 
 
 9 tSXvs, ToWfij iroXv, 
 
 roXXoC, noXXijs, TToWoVt &,C. 
 ■S TlftvttJj TCiiw, TETfitiica, srefioVf £Tnijdt]V. (Roots : TCjtj TJAt.) 
 
 ' See Self's Greek Gram., Vol. I. p. 8], 97. 
 
PRONOUNS. 28 
 
 city. The others were turned into eagles. I will give 
 the whole egg to my brother. He gave all the water to 
 his (18) horses. I feel pain* in every part of my head 
 {in my whole head). Most people rejoice when' their 
 frierids are wealthy. The other party manage ihe 
 affairs of the city. 
 
 % 9. Pronouns continued. 
 
 48. a) In the reflexive pronouns {luaviov, &c.)' the 
 aviog is not emphatic. To express 'self emphatically, 
 avTos must precede the pronoun, avzov ai, (fee. 
 
 49. 6) ' Oiow' is translated by the gen. of the reflex- 
 ive pronoun {iavzov). ' His'' by the gen. of avrSe. (So 
 ' their' by gen. plur.) 
 
 50. c) iavTov is often used (like sui) in a dependent 
 sentence, or in a clause having ace. and infin., for the 
 subject of the principal sentence.' 
 
 But the simple airSn Is often used, or l (oS, ol, &c. aipcTs, <r*«i 
 &c.) 
 
 oS is never simply reflexive in Attic prose, but is confined to 
 this kind of reflexive meaning. (B.)" The forms o'J, I, occur in 
 Plato, but not in the other great Attic prose-writers. (Kir.) 
 
 51. a) i&i^e aavzov, accustom yourself. 
 
 h) ecptj ndvrag zovg av&qtonove t« iavtav ayan^v, 
 he said that all men loved' their own things. 
 
 • G. c^auroff, EnavTtjs, 
 
 A. lfiavT6vf ifinvrfiv, 
 
 ' Of course only when it cannot be mistaken for the subject of the 
 infin. or dependent verb. 
 
 " This passage is misconstrued, and so made incorrect, by the Eng. 
 Translator of Buttmann, p. 325. 
 
 ' It is an idiom of our language to use a past tense in a sentence 
 beginning with 'tl>.at' (and other dependent sentences), when the vert 
 on which they depend is in a past tense. The pres. infin. must be used 
 in Greek, whenever the action to be expressed by it did not precede the 
 time spoken of. 
 
80 
 
 PRoi[0";ns. 
 
 c) foii'Xsi rovg nolkag v/h]qsjeTv iavrc^, he thinks 
 
 that the citizens serve him. 
 a) etQatfiyoe' rjv SsvoxksiSrig, ns/^firog avtog, 
 
 Xenoclides was their general {himself the 
 
 fifth = ) with four others. 
 
 52. Vocabulary 9. 
 
 eidia/iai or Bico&a (a perf. 2. 
 from s&(o : »ara rb etm&og, 
 neut. part. accg. to my, 
 his, (fee. custom ; as my, 
 his, &c. custom was.) 
 
 dyanda: also, with ace. or 
 dat. "I am contented 
 with." 
 
 VOjU^CO. 
 
 aiqajriyog, ov, 6. 
 
 aTQaTtjysco. 
 
 rghog, rj, ov. 
 
 lizctQiog, ri, ov. 
 
 nag tig. 
 
 naq-Eiiu. {za aagorta pres- 
 
 Accustom, 
 
 I am accustomed. 
 
 Love, like, am fond of, 
 
 Think, am of opinion, 
 
 Serve, perform service, 
 
 General, 
 
 To command (an army). 
 
 Third, 
 
 Fourth, 
 
 Every body, 
 
 I am present, here, &c.. 
 
 ent things, circwm- 
 stances, or condition.) 
 
 n? perform this BervicCf vrniperctv roOro. 
 " i/ieee services^ iiriipsTeiv Tavra ■ 
 
 Exercise 10. 
 
 53. Accustom yourself to confer benefits upon" the 
 good. Every body loves his own things. I accustom 
 myself to serve the state. Cyrus, as his custom was, 
 was riding at full speed. I will give the gold to you 
 
 " From nTfcadt army, oyu lead. 
 ' Augment, i, t'lBi^ov, cWiirpai. It is used in pass. 
 y im6, ifirris, rower, properly, to row for a person, or at M$ ram 
 maud. 
 
NETTTEE ADJECTIVE, SI 
 
 yourself (48). Philip was their general with two others. 
 He thinks that the citizens have conferred benefits upon 
 him. Accustom yourself to be contented with your (18) 
 present condition. Let us not treat those ill who' have 
 done good to us. He accustomed himself {imperf.) to 
 perform these services for the good. I will perform this 
 service for you. He has a" large head. I am accus- 
 tomed to perform you these services. 
 
 ^ 10. Of the Neuter Adjective. 
 
 54. a) In Greek, as in Latin, the neut. plur. of an 
 adjective is used without a substantive, where we 
 should rather use the singular. 
 
 55. b) The neut. article with a gen. case, is used 
 in an indefinite way for any thing that relates to, or 
 proceeds from, what the gen. expresses. 
 
 56. c) Neuter adjectives are used adverbially; and 
 generally, 
 
 The neut. sing, of the comp. ) serve also for camp. 
 The neut. plural of the sujr. \ and sup. of the adv. 
 
 57. d) When an adjective is the predicate, itis often 
 in the neut. singular, when that is not the gender, or 
 even number, of the subject. 
 
 This can only be, when the assertion is made of a class or gener- 
 al notion; not of a particular thing. It may be supposed to agree 
 with iking understood. 
 
 58. e) 7io).vg [akimv or ntkEicov, nkstazog), superlatives, 
 and the adj. ^fuavg' stand in the gender of the gen. that 
 follows them, when we might have rather expected the 
 neut. adj. (Not to noi.v rijg yijg, but ^ noXXi].) 
 
 . aaj. 
 J. a) 
 
 59. a) elite t alii a, he said this, 
 
 ■ Ace. plur. eic and ea;. G. ovs in later writers. 
 
32 NEUTER ADJECTIVES. 
 
 h) tu teav ■9emv (psgsiv dst, lee should bear what 
 comes from the gods. 
 
 c) ao(f(oTeQov noiEig, you act more wisely, 
 
 ataxiatoL diEzeleacv, he lived in a most 
 disgiaceful way. 
 
 d) {] tt^Tij iariv inaivsTor, virtue is praise- 
 
 worthy. 
 c) ^ noXli] rqg x'»?'*ff> the greater part of the 
 country. 6 ^fiiave rov xQOfov, half the 
 time. 
 
 60. Vocabulary 
 
 10. 
 
 
 We ought, should or 
 To bear, 
 
 must. 
 
 dei" (oportet). 
 
 Said, 
 
 
 ehov.' 
 
 To live, 
 Praiseworthy, 
 
 
 Sia-TElsat, iaia (properly _/?n- 
 ish, go through ; §ior or 
 XQOvov understood). 
 
 inaivsTog, if, 6v. 
 
 To praise, 
 
 
 inaivm.'^ 
 
 To act, 
 Forwardness, zeal, 
 
 Peloponnesus, 
 
 
 nois'm. 
 
 70 nQoOvfiov {adj. for ij nqo- 
 
 &viiia). 
 IIsXoTiovvijaos, ov, ^. 
 
 
 Exercise 11. 
 
 61. The others laid waste half the country. The 
 other party" act more wisely. The rest" of the 
 Scythians act more wisely. He spent half his life in a 
 most disgraceful way. The others are doing better.' 
 The rest of the citizens are doing very well.' The 
 king of the Persians has ravaged the greater part of the 
 
 * Jci ( — Ssoif Sirj^ Stiv, iiov), Ssfiaei. Imperf. tSsi, 
 
 * 0£(i(ii, o"™, ivfivo'jfa : aor. 1. fivcyxa. JPass. hcxfifiiToiiai and otnBfiao' 
 bQf, Evflvcy/ioi, iivt^xBrpi. 
 
 * tl-nov (etVe, &c.) an oor. 2. Also iiva aor. 1., of which e?7raT«, et 
 raru, and alao etTay, are used by Attic writers. 
 
 ^ — cffM (Xen. but generally iaoftai^ yveaa^ ^vena, ^viQrii . but ^vjjuatt 
 
 * By 56 the compar. and superl. of good must here be used. 
 
SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. 33 
 
 Peloponnesus. Wisdom is praiseworthy (57. d). The 
 son of Sophroniscus* said this (54. a). Let us bear 
 what comes from the gods. The son of Philip will 
 command (the army) with three others.^' Accustom 
 yourself to bear what comes from the gods. One ought 
 to like one's own things. A certain ma^n had a hen 
 Eagles'^ have a'* very beautiful head. 
 
 ■^ 11. Subject and Predicate. 
 
 62. a) The nam. neut. plur. generally has the verb 
 in the singular ; but often not h) when jiersons or liv- 
 ing creatures are spoken of. 
 
 63. c) The verb 'to be' is often omitted. 
 
 64. a) ta fwa tge^^ h ^'^^ animals run. twv ovzmii 
 ta niv iaziv iqp' ^(tiv, z« d' ovx iip tj/uv, of existing 
 things some are in our power, and others are not in 
 our power. 
 
 b) loadSs i&vri saTqarsvov, so many nations went 
 on the expedition. 
 
 c) Tcc zmv qiilmv xoivd, the property of friends is 
 common. 
 
 '65. VOCABULAKY 11, 
 
 Animal, ■ ^mov, ov, to. 
 
 Run, ZQEj^m' {dgajj). 
 
 In a person's power, tW with the dat. of the per- 
 
 son {in ifioi, in m/y pow- 
 er ; en ijiov, in my time , 
 im Tov nanQog, in my fa- 
 ther's time). 
 
 So many, roaog, loaoaSs, loaovros. 
 
 Nation, i&vog, sog, z6. 
 
 Go on an expedition, arqatiiw. 
 
 2* 
 
34 
 
 SUBJECT AND PREDICATK. 
 
 Existing things, things, 
 that are, or (54, o) ivhat is, 
 
 To go away. 
 
 Now (= already, at once, 
 without waiting any 
 longer), 
 
 rd ovra (part, from el(u. 7(p 
 oj-n, in reality, really.) 
 
 (Words after which the omission of the copula (' is' 'ore' &c.^ ie 
 very common.) 
 
 Ready, 
 
 Disappeared, vanished, 
 
 (It is) time. 
 
 Easy, 
 
 Hard, difficult, 
 
 Worthy, 
 
 Possible, 
 
 Impossible, 
 
 Necessity, 
 
 fjawful, 
 
 &c., «fcc. 
 
 hoiixog,'^ 1], or. 
 
 (pQOvdos,' 1], or. 
 
 aga. 
 
 QaBiov (neut. of gaSiog). 
 
 Xa^snov (neut. oi 'j^aXefioi;). 
 
 a^iog, a, ov. 
 
 Svvarog, 'q, 6v, 
 
 adivuTOSj OS ov. 
 
 umjxt] (= it is necessary). 
 
 ^sfiig, Gi/Mdos, 7j [=fas) 
 
 Exercise 12. 
 
 66. These things were not in my power. These 
 things took place in our fathers' times. This (plur.) is 
 good. It is now time to go away. They are ready to 
 do this. The judge is worthy of death {gen.) The 
 boys have disappeared;' the father has disappeared. 
 Many nations will go on the expedition. It is easy to 
 the wise, to bear what comes from the gods.^^ It is ne- 
 cessary to bear what comes from the gods. Let us go 
 away at once. Socrates, the son* of Sophroniscus, was 
 really wise. For it is not lawful to speak ill of the gods. 
 It is hard to deceive the wise. 
 
 e iljit has a fut. meaning, and is more common in tliis sense than 
 ■Jitiiiro/ioi, fut. of Ipx'l"" ^ the moods it is used as pres. or fut, (B.I 
 ■" Afterwards Zroi/iot. 
 
 ' From irpo, b66s : only found in nom. of all numbers. 
 ^ Begui with adj. Have, has, are not to be translated. 
 
on THE HOODS. 35 
 
 § 12. On the Moods. 
 
 07. a. 1) The moods of the aorist do not refer to 
 past time, And are therefore rendered by 
 the present in English. 
 
 2) The moods of the aorist express moment- 
 
 ary^ actions ; those of the present, con 
 tinned ones. 
 
 3) But the participle of the aorist does refer 
 
 to past time, nsaav, having fallen. 
 
 68. a) ftif when it forbids, takes the imperative of 
 the present, Ihe subjunctive of the aorist.™ 
 
 [In doing the exercises, consider (1) whether a single 
 definite action is spoken of; or a continued action, or 
 habit. Having thus determined whether the aorist 
 should be used, or the present, (2) if you use the present 
 you must also use the imperative ; if the aorist, the sub 
 junctive.] 
 
 Of course the siibj. of the preseni'must be used for the first person 
 (when the present is to be used), as the imperat. has no first person. 
 
 69. ICj^ 2'he optative is theregular attendant of the 
 historical tenses. Hence, 
 
 70. 6) The relatives and particles (except the com- 
 pounds of &; see 77,89), which take the subjunctive, 
 after the present and /m^m?-^, take the optative after the 
 historical" tenses. 
 
 The optatiee is thus, in fact, the subjunctive of the historical tenses, 
 answciing to the imperjict and pluperfect of the Latin subjunctive. 
 
 71. c) So the particles and pronouns, which go with 
 the indicative in direct,' take the optative in oblique' 
 narration. 
 
 ' Momentary is here used in a somewhat loose way, to express sin- 
 gle definite actions, not contemplated as continuing. 
 
 ■" 111 with imperative present tells a man to leave off what he has 
 already begun : pfl with aor. subj., tells him not to begin the action. (H.) 
 This is a consequence of the distinction pointed out, not a new dL'j- 
 tinction. 
 
 ° i. e. Imperf.,aorists, and pluperf. 
 
 " Oblique narration (sermo obliquas) is when the opinions asser- 
 
UO ON THE MOODS. 
 
 72. a) ft^ xXsTirs, do not steal (forbids stealing geiier- 
 
 ally). 
 nil xld^yg, do not steal (forbids stealing in a 
 particular instance). 
 5) { auQBii^i, ivoi i8m, /am here to see. 
 nag^v, iva 'ddoifii, I \va.s there to see. 
 ' ovx sj^io (or ovx olda), onof tQunconai, I don^t 
 
 know which way to turn myself, 
 ovx riyipv (or ovx gfisM"), onoi^ TQttnoi(ir;v, I did 
 not know which way to turn myself. 
 c) tjQSTo, st ovTmg sxoi, he asked if it were so. 
 
 ti.£^g fioi, oTi ri odog qiSQOi elg 7>jv mhv, livniQ 
 oQ^riVjhe told m,e that the road led to the 
 city which I saw. 
 
 73. Vocabulary 12. 
 
 Steal, xUntfo. 
 
 Theft, xXonti, rig, t]. 
 
 Know, olda.t 
 
 Whither, noT; (in dependent ques- 
 
 tions onoi.) 
 
 iiona, &c., of another are related in the third person. " He said that he 
 thought, &c."-^— " He said, ' I think; Sec." would be in direct narration 
 (fermo rectus). 
 
 f In dependent (or indirect) questions, the regular rule is to use, 
 Tiot TtSaas ; TtoXos ; TrijX/ffoy ; 
 
 {quantus ?) {qualis ?) how old or hig ? 
 
 but hv6iroSf 5iro7of, oni]\iKOs. 
 
 So not TTorS ] TTof ; irovj ttw j 5 it6$ev j tij f 
 
 when 7 whither ? where ? how ? whence f how 7 whither 1 
 but oniTEf oTTotf onoVf oirust hTT60tv, onTj. 
 
 So, also, not ris, but Sans. Bat the direct interrogatives are very 
 sften used in indirect questions, as : ipdra us tIs c'riv, he asked mc wha 
 I was. 
 
 fl Properly a perf. from etia, see. I have perceived^! know, 
 
 Plup. y&tiv. Fut. cXooiiai (ctJ^ira)). 
 
 Perf. otJa, oiadaf 0t6e 1 Xtrrov^ Xarov | {'(r/iei', XarSt Iff Icrl. 
 
 Plup. 8. glcw, Att. ^Sti (from jJea). 
 
 ihis, commonly ^SctaBa, Att. ^SriuBa. 
 
 iSa, Att. iiav, and jii}. 
 
 F. ^Sctjjisv and ^tr/iev. 
 
 jistTEf ^arc. 
 
 gleaay, #"<"'. 
 
ON THE MOODS. SI 
 
 Turn, TQsnco (Mid. turn viyself) 
 
 To ask, VQot"!") '^oi: 2 : (igmidm used 
 
 for the other tenses.) 
 Road, odoe, ov, ^. 
 
 Lead (of a road) (p/Qm. 
 
 See, hgdco.' 
 
 To be so, ovrmg sxsiv (to have themr 
 
 selves so.) 
 
 To be found or brought m ,, - , , „.., „„^ x 
 guilty aXavai' (with gen.) 
 
 Battle, i^^xVt VSt V- 
 
 Fight, (idypfiM, saoftai, ovfiat, ij/iai. 
 
 That, in order that, tva (= ut.) 
 
 That, after verbs of telling- on, (with indie, unless the 
 
 ifcc, for Latin accjts. with optative is required by 
 
 infinitive, 7L The ace. with infin. 
 
 also occurs. See 91. 6.) 
 
 For what is e^u sometimes used % (to know : so ' rum habeo quo 
 me vertam.') What are strengthening particles, and with what 
 words are they often used ■? (yl, at least ; irip^ very ; Jij, jiow. They 
 are frequently used with relatives.) 
 
 Exercise 13. 
 
 74. I am here to see the battle. I was here to set thr 
 battle. Do not Tpuvsue what is disgraceful.'^ The 
 road leads to Athens. The boy says that the road leads 
 to Athens. The boy told me that the road led' to Athens 
 Do not deceive your father (of a particular instance of 
 deceit). The Persian was found guilty of murder. I 
 asked him what he was doing. He asked me who 1 
 was. Who are you (plur.) 1 I asked them who they 
 were. He told me that Xenoclides commanded theni 
 
 ' The tenses supplied from the roots irr, etS : Spsiu, Sxpoiia:, kiipsga, £(> 
 pafiat (u/i/iaO) utpdnv. Imp. idjpav. For aor. etSov, Uif &c. and liM^ttv 
 Hot, &c. 
 
 ' &\iaitBiiat (am taken or caught), hXtatroftai, laXuK^. Aor. idAct)* 
 
 The a \i long in the augmented, short in the unaugmenlcd forms. 
 See note on 51. 6. 
 
38 OK THE MOODS. 
 
 with two others.*^ Do not steal these things. Do noi 
 accustom yourself to deceive your mother. I was there 
 to fight. He asked me whether (ei'l these things were 
 so. 
 
 § 13. The Moods continued. 
 On d and av. Conditiotial Propositions. 
 Introductory remarks on av. 
 
 75. This particle (of which Hermann considers the 
 real meaning to be by chance, perhaps ; but Hartung, 
 else, otherwise) gives an expression oi contingency a.nA 
 mere possibility to the assertion. 
 
 76. Its principal use is in the conclusion of a hypo- 
 thetical sentence ; and when it stands in other sentences, 
 It often refers to an implied condition. 
 
 77. It coalesces with several particles, so as to form 
 one word with them. 
 
 Thus with ei, ore, iasiS^ 
 
 it forms idv, ^v, av, orav, snuSdv. 
 
 78. The av = idv, ei av, regularly begins the sen- 
 tence, and is thus distinguished from the simple av, 
 which must have some words before it. 
 
 79. « (like our Hf) has the two meanings of i/* and 
 whether : it goes with the indie, or optative ; but not, in 
 good writers, with the subjunctive. — (See example in 
 72. c.) 
 
 80, a) Possibility without any expression of uncer 
 
 tainty ; el with indie, in both clauses. 
 
 • See 334. 
 
ON THE MOODS. 39 
 
 &) Uncertainty with. the /)ros/?ec/ of decision, 
 idv with subjunctive in the conditional, and 
 the indie, (generally the future) in the con- 
 sequent clause. 
 
 c) Uncertainty without any such accessary no- 
 tion : £1 with the optative in the conditional 
 clause, and av with the optative in the con- 
 sequent clause. 
 d) Impossibility, or belief that the thing is not 
 so: Bi -with imperfect 01 aorist indie. in the 
 conditional clause ; av with imperf. or aor- 
 ist indie, in the consequent clause. 
 
 1) The imperfect Is used for present time, or when the time is 
 quite iTidefinite. 
 
 2) If both condition and consequence refer to past time, the aor- 
 ist must be used, at least in the consequent clause j unless the con- 
 sequence is to be represented as continuing. 
 
 3) The condition may refer to past, and the consequence to pres- 
 ent time. 
 
 e! ImlaBnv, oix av frpfmrTovv,if Ihod (then) beenpersuaded, I should 
 not (now) be out of health,. 
 
 81. a) ( si i^Qorttias xa] ijazQaipsv, if it has thunder- 
 
 < ed it has also lightened. 
 ( £iTi sxsie,S6g,ifyou have any thing, give 
 it. 
 
 b) idv 71 i'/^mfiEv, Smaoiisv, if we have any 
 
 thing, we will give it. 
 
 c) u tig tavia Tigdzroi, [isya fi av c5 qp s J, j^ ff e t s, 
 
 if any one should do this, he would do me a 
 great service. 
 
 d) sitislisv, idi8ov dv,if he had any thing," he 
 
 would give it. 
 e« rt sff/w, sdoaxsv av, if he had had any 
 thing, he would have given it, 
 
 82. TOCABULARY 13. 
 
 To benefit, to do a service, aqisUw. 
 Hurt, injure, ^hmtat. 
 
 Kill, put to death, dno-tttsivai, 
 
 ° It is implied that he has not any thing. 
 
40 ON THE MOODS. 
 
 Speak the truth, ttly9evm. 
 
 Mina^ ^ya, fivag, tj. 
 
 Talent, tdlavTov, ov, to. 
 
 Not only — but also o^x oxC — itHa xai. 
 
 Even, xa,'. 
 
 Not even, ov8s. 
 
 Jj- Obs. u«jicXctiif0\mTciv, &c. take besides ace. olperton, sn idj 
 in tile ace. neut.plw., wliere tee should use adverbs ; very, more; &c 
 
 Exercise 14. 
 
 83. If I have any thing,'" I will give it. If you 
 were to do this, you would confer the greatest benefit 
 upon me (c). If any one should do this, he would 
 greatly injure me. If I had a mina, I would give it to 
 the slave. If he had had even three talents, he would 
 have given them to his brother. If any one were to do 
 (c) this, he would do the greatest*' injury to the state. 
 If you speak the truth (i. e. if what you say should 
 prove true), I will give you three talents. If the wise 
 were to manage the affairs of the state, they would con- 
 fer a great benefit"' upon all the citizens. If this be 
 so,'' I will go away at once. If you were really wise, 
 you would admire the beauty of virtue. I am here to 
 see not only the city, hut also the whole°° country. If 
 the citizens were wise, they would have killed not only 
 Xenoclides, but also Philip. If you should be found 
 guilty''' of murder, the citizens will put you to death 
 
 •i 14. The Moods continued. 
 
 84. a) The optative with oiv is equivalent to oui 
 may, might, would, should, &c. 
 
 ' Such a verb as 'I do not say' is understood : I saw, not that my 
 son, hut also &c.=I saw (/ do not say) that (7 »ato) my sou, bu 
 also, &,<;. 
 
ON THE MOODS. 41 
 
 85. b) The optative with av is often translated by 
 lie future. 
 
 The Attics were peculiarly fond of expressing themselves in 9 
 doubtful way ; of avoiding all posUivenesa in their assertions ; ana 
 hence the optative with in is used of the most positive assertious. 
 
 86. c. d. e.) av gives to the infinitive and the parti- 
 siple the same force that it gives to the optative. 
 
 Thus (as in 86*. d) the infin. gets the force of an infin. future.' 
 This is the common way of expressing the future after verbs of 
 hoping thinking, trusting, jyraying, knowing, confessing, &c., when 
 it is dependent on a condition expressed or implied. 
 
 Of a positive unconditional expectation, &c. the infinitive without 
 an is to be used j the future, if future time is to be strongly mark- 
 ed ; if not, the aor. or present, according as the action is momentary 
 or continued. {K.) 
 
 86*. a) {jdsmg av 'O'taaaiii^r ravta, I would gladlp 
 see this, or, / should like to see this, av- 
 ■&Q(07iov avaiSiaTSQOv ovx av iig svgoi, a 
 man, or, one could not find a more shame' 
 less fellow. 
 
 b) ovx av (fsvyois, you will not escape. 
 
 c) noaov av oiei evQsZv ra ffa XTtj/tara nmXov- 
 
 (iBva ; how much do you think your pos- 
 sessions would fetch (literally, find) if 
 they were sold ? 
 
 d) ovx lativ Eva avdQU av dvvi]&^vai nors anavta 
 
 tavTanqa^cu, it is not possible thai one man 
 should ever be able to do all this, 
 c) zaXXa^ aimnm, noXX av sytwv einsTv, I hold m,y 
 tongue about the rest, though /should have 
 much to say. aizei [ua&ov, ag-HEQ lysvoite- 
 
 " ypafciv av=scripturum esse, 
 
 ysyfaipivai &v=scripturum fuisse. 
 ypiij/at ttp={a) scripiurum fuisse, or 
 
 as pres. (h) scripturum esse, 
 ypiij/ew &p^scripturum fore. (K.) 
 ypj^nii cfv is proved, I think, to be correct by Hartung, against Fot- 
 ami, Hermann, Slo. Kilhner and East both agree with Hirtung. 
 For ra aXXa. * 
 
42 
 
 ON THE MOOES. 
 
 tog uv\ 7WV noXifilmv, he asks for pay on 
 the plea that he could then conquer Am 
 enemies. 
 
 87. Vocabulary 14 
 
 'Would (or should) like 
 to ' (how trans- 
 lated -i) 
 
 See, beholdj 
 
 Shameless, 
 
 Shamelessness,impudence, 
 
 Find; (ofthings sold) fetch. 
 
 Possession, 
 
 Acquire, get, 
 
 Sell, 
 
 Can, am able, 
 
 How is 'if is possible^ 
 
 sometimes expressed ? 
 One, 
 
 Hold my tongue about, 
 Ask for: in mid. ask for 
 
 myself. 
 Pay, 
 Conquer, get the better of, 
 
 ijdmg,'' gladly, (^fiiai' a* 
 ,' should like ex- 
 tremely ; ]j8Tov civ 
 
 j], I would rather than.) 
 
 &edofiai: 
 
 avaiSqg, ■qg, eg. 
 
 uvaiSsitt,' ag, ij. 
 
 EVQiax(a.°- 
 
 XT^fia,*' arog, to. 
 
 XTcioftai; (perf. xixziniui == 1 
 possess.) 
 
 nrnkiat. 
 
 Svvafuu.' 
 
 by soTiv. 
 
 eig, (tia, ev. G. Ivog, [tiag, &C. 
 aicondm, (with fut. raid.) 
 
 fua&og, ov, 6. 
 
 nsQiyiyrofiai, (with gen. See 
 15, note 1.) 
 
 t Literally ' as thus heing-liiely-to-conquer.' 
 
 y From hiii, sweet. Adverbs in u; are formed by adding as to the 
 root ; KoK-Sit KoKias ' rax-vst rax^^oSf raxi-tos. 
 
 ' The termination m becomes cia when derived from adjectives in 
 I,;, by contraction with the c of the root ; dpaiSrjs, maiit-os, dmiScia. The 
 a is then shortened, and the accent thrown back to the last syllable but 
 two. n is an inseparable particle, meaning ' not ' in compound words. It 
 generally takes v before a vowel : u, not, ail, the root of words denoting . 
 reverence, respect, shame, &c. 
 
 " e^piiTKOi, sipiitTU, evpjiKat e^prjitai. tvpov, eUpSittjVy eipiOiiv. Verb ad] 
 
 *> See 8. note a. * 
 
 " ivvaftat, Svi^aoftaij isdvifJipat, iiSvv66v^ (2 Bm^. Sivaaau) 
 
ON THE MOODS. 43 
 
 Escape from, q)svym, (ace. fut. miil.) 
 
 Black, fts'Xae, aira, av. 
 
 Flatterer, «6la^, axog, 6. 
 
 Flatter, xoXaxevm. 
 
 Ever, at any time, non',^ 
 
 Just, Sixaiog, a, ov. 
 
 Faithful, matoe, ^, or. 
 
 How much, noGov, (neut,) 
 
 Think, oio(ia.i.' 
 
 Hope, iXiti^m. 
 
 Exercise 15. 
 
 S8. One cannot find a more shameless flatterer. One 
 cannot find a blacker dog. You will not escape from 
 those who are pursuing you. If I possessed a talent, I 
 would not ask you' for pay. It is not possible that you, 
 being a man, should be able to deceive the gods. You 
 will not deceive God, the judge of all. I should like to 
 find these things. I should like to see the old geometers. 
 Let us fly from the shamelessness of wicked men. You 
 will not find a juster judge. Do not steal the poet's gold. 
 Do not flatter. If you do this, you will conquer your 
 enemies. How much do you think the eagle will fetch, 
 if oflered for sale? I asked him how much (72, note) 
 his possessions would fetch, if sold? Ifwill ask for 
 three talents, on the plea that I shall then^ conquer 
 (86*. e) all my enemies. I hope that you will be able to 
 do all this (86*. d). 
 
 ^ 15. The Moods continued. 
 
 89. a) The compounds of av (saV, otav, insibdv, «fcc. 
 
 ' Ttirs ; interrog. when 7 
 
 * otoixat and •' at (2 sing, oiei), oiijaoiiai, ii0riii. Imperf. ui/ti't ^^n* 
 See 123, and 124. a. 
 
44 ON THE MOODS. 
 
 77) regularly take the subjunctive. The 
 same rule applies to relatives with av. 
 
 90. b) When they come into connection with past 
 time or the oblique narration, they either remain 
 unchanged, or the simple words [ii, hs, imiSq — og, oaug, 
 oaog, &c.) take their place with the optative (69). 
 
 90*. c. d. e) When these compounds cf av, and rela- 
 tives with av, go with the subjunctive of the aorist, they 
 answer to the Latin future perfect (futurum exactum). 
 
 91. o) naQiaoiiai idv xi. dqjs (60,'), I will come to you 
 
 (or, be with yoiC), if lam, wanted. 
 
 b) sffq itagsaea&ai, si rid sot or dsi^aoi, he said 
 
 that he would come, if he were wanted. 
 
 c) TOTS dtj,'' ozav a ;fg^ ' noiys, svzvxsie, then only 
 
 are you prosperous, when you do what you 
 ought. TOTS d)i, ozav a }[Qt] ?roM/agff, svtvj^j^csis, 
 then only will you be prosperous, when you 
 have done ' what you ought (turn demum, 
 quum officia tua expleveris, felix eris). 
 
 d) insiSav anavTa axovatirs, xgivaTs, when (oi 
 
 after) you have heard all, decide. 
 
 e) diaq)9eQsT o,Ti av Xd^, he will destroy whatever 
 
 he takes or lays hold of (ceperit). 
 
 92. Vocabulary 15. 
 
 At all, Ti, (neut. of r/s). 
 
 Also, xai. 
 
 One ought, y^qri. 
 
 If there is any need, or oc- ., ,, « ,, 
 
 „„„;„„ tav Ti otri, or ti Ti otoi. 
 
 casion. ■" 
 
 Am prosperous, or fortun- , , 
 ate; prosper, svtv^sio. 
 
 * Ti^at all. lav ti Icri, if it should be at all necessary. 
 
 ■> Then truly (and not before)=Men only. 
 
 ' ;i;pS (oportet) — XP"'! XPh Xt"!"") l"«''t. neut. {rd) xf^""- Imperf 
 IXP^ii or xpif ("0*, expi) '• jfut. xP^'"- 
 
 ■■ Properly, 'when you shall have done:" bnt in English a future 
 action, that is to precede another future action, is generally put in tho 
 present or perfect tense. We do not, that is, mark that it is nouj fu- 
 ture, but consider ourselves as removed by the ' when,' &c. to the time 
 of its happening. 
 

 ON THE MOODS. i 
 
 Foriune, 
 
 Hear, 
 
 Judge, decide. 
 
 When, 
 
 
 XQivm. 
 ore."" 
 
 Then, 
 
 
 rots. 
 
 When? 
 
 
 WOTS ; 
 
 Destroy, 
 
 Take, 
 
 Whosoever, whatsoever, 
 
 When, after. 
 
 8lttCpOBt'(t03.'' 
 
 Xafi&dvca.' 
 
 oarig.f 
 
 inEid/j, or with av, inuSdp. 
 
 45 
 
 (iriipciKni, io be present (here or there), is often used of beingpreaeni 
 to tusistj where we should use ' came to you,' or ' be with you.') 
 
 Exercise 16. 
 
 g;!" When the consequent verb is in ttiefut., how is 'if' transla- 
 ted t witli what mood 7—81. 6. 
 
 93. He says that he will come, if he is wanted (91. 6), 
 If we do what we ought, we shall be happy. If the 
 citizens were to do^' what they ought, they would be 
 prosperous. If the citizens had done what they ought 
 {imperf.), they would be prosperous {now). When I 
 have any thing, I will give it. When they see this, 
 they will fear. When you have managed the affairs of 
 the state well, you shall manage mine also. He hopes 
 that he shall (thus) be able to deceive the gods also. I 
 am glad that the enemy are destroyed.^ If the enemy 
 had done this, they would have been destroyed. The 
 judge said, that he would come, if he were wanted. 
 
 ' Fut. dKoviroiiai (but aor. 1. I/Koma), dK^JKoa, fisavtrjiau 
 ™ oral/ when the subj. should be used with Hv. 
 '^ iiatpOdpiji, StaipdepiS, Sicfdapxa. 
 
 P The neut. of Sans has sometimes a mark like a comma i oalleJ 
 diastnle or hypodiastole) after the o, to distuiguish it from Sn, that. («,«.) 
 
46 
 
 ON THE MOODS. 
 
 <5 16. The Moods continued. 
 
 94 a) The optative is used of what happened {/(mi, 
 when the thne spoken of is past. , 
 
 1) For pre*, or future time, the relatives with ai> and compounds 
 of in could be used. 
 
 2) To relatives au gives in this way the force of our ever, jj {, 
 (= quicumque, siquis) whoexer, any man who; in plur. all who. 
 
 95. a) vnEQ^ov'' elx^^ on St iv aaiEi' StazqlBoi,' lie 
 
 had an upper chamber whenever he stayed 
 in town. 
 
 b) inqatrsv a So^sisv avr^, he did what (in each 
 case) seemed good to him. 
 
 e) ovg {(lev) idoi tvzdxtmg xai aioan'Q iovzag, bti'qvsi,^ 
 he used to praise those whom (at any time) 
 he saw inarching in good order and in si- 
 lence. 
 
 96. VOCABULAET 16. 
 
 Upper chamber, vneq^ov, ov, to. 
 
 Whenever, on6Tt. 
 
 Stay (in a town), diazgi^m. 
 
 It seems good, doxEi' (■= videtur,videntur, 
 
 a 8oxeT [loi, what seems 
 good to me,what Iplea.te 
 or choose to do). 
 
 In good order, tvzdstzetg. 
 
 Rank, zd^ig, tmg,^ ri- 
 
 4 iircpZoVf adj. understand oiKij/Jia, iTzspctiiosj oios from iirepj as ira 
 rpitjioSj uos from irarijp. (P.) 
 
 ' SdTv is used of Athens as we use ' town ' of London. 
 
 • imrpWciv, to rub (or wear) away, xP'^""', P'"" {conterere tempos 
 ierere vitam). Without ace. to linger, stay, &c. 
 
 ' The imperfect of an habitual action ; translated by 'used toi &c 
 See 2. Obs. 
 
 " ionla (seem and also think), Wfu, itJoy/ini {visus sum), aor. 1. 
 fio^a. (The 3 sing. ioKcT, imperf. cSIkci, Wfti, iSo(c(v), ilioirrai). 
 
 V rairtro), real root ray. Hence Tay-tTls^^ra^li. Nouns in ffiy, oia, 
 
on TIIE MOODS. 41 
 
 Order, arrange, tdaam, |». 
 
 Dining-rocm, avdyseor," m, to. 
 
 March (of a single soldier), diii." 
 
 Silence, aimn^, ijt, ^. 
 
 Horse-soldier, lands, mg, 6 {plur. caval 
 
 ry). 
 
 To charge an enemy, skaivsw us (with ace, some- 
 
 times, iffi). 
 
 Exercise 17. 
 
 SS" What is tae ful. of tmiplat — 60, note d. 
 
 97. He had a dining-room whenever he stayed in 
 town. The judge had an upper chamber whenever he 
 stayed in town. I praise all whom I see (94. 1) acting 
 well. The judge praised all whom he saw acting well. 
 1 will do whatever (94. 1) I please.^^ Whenever he 
 took any city, he used to kill all the citizens. When I 
 have taken^' the city, I will kill all the citizens. When 
 you have taken the city, do not kill the citizens. I praise 
 those who march in silence. If you march in good or- 
 der, I will praise you. Who would not admire cavalry 
 marching (riding) in oidex 7 The cavalry of the Per- 
 sians charge the ranks of the enemy. / should like to 
 see" cavalry charging the enemy. 
 
 § 17. On the Moods. 
 
 98. The subjunctive is used in doubting questions 
 either alone, or after ^ovXst, ■&iXiis (do you wish 7). 
 
 So also after oix tx<^ (or ii?Ja: 72. 4), and o'iropi3 (tu) lamataloas, 
 
 trom vei1<s, denote regularly the abstract notion of the verb. Hence 
 iil|i::Bthe putting in order; but also, order, a place assigned, Slc. 
 
 ■* E=:dvaiyii.«»' from Sua, yf", earth, ground. 
 
 * c7^:, Urn, (not to be confounded with ci>i, suni). 
 
43 ON THE MOODS. 
 
 ipmS (ia) cuk itiTd (£u) auk. (Optat. after Ihe historical tenses 
 72. 6.) 
 
 99. a) ^ovXst^ ovvaxonmitsv ; do you, wish then, that 
 
 we should consider (the question)? 
 
 b) ao&ev ^ovXst ttQ^tofiai; what do you wish mc 
 
 to begin with ? 
 
 c) ti noia ; what shall I do? what am I to do? 
 
 not jqantonai ; whither shall I turn myself? 
 
 d) SI Tito ovv aoi TO airiov; shall I then tell you 
 
 the cause"} 
 
 e) rvv axovato' av&tg — ; shall I now hear 
 
 again — ? 
 
 100. Vocabulary 17. 
 
 Wish, §ovXoitttt, i)Aoj or iOeloa. 
 
 Consider, examine, axoaem. 
 
 Whence. ao&sv. 
 
 Begin, aoiojiai, 
 
 Cause, wjijoj",' ov, to. 
 
 Again, av&ig. 
 
 Then (^of inference), olv. 
 
 Am at a loss, unoge'co.' 
 
 Seek, ^ijTsm. 
 
 (i'p' i/itui-, dird cov, &0. dp^a/icvos^ (having begun with you =) and 
 •yim among live first ; and you as mum as any body.) 
 
 1 2. sing, of /}iijiXo/«ii, 'which with hrojiat and oio^ai always make ti 
 ill 2. sing. pres. C'lpo, ohi). 
 
 • The subjunctive used in this way (subjunctivus dvbitalivus or de 
 liberaiivus) must not be mistaken for the future. 
 
 • cBlXa (the most general expression for wishing) denotes parliou- 
 (arly that kind of wish in which there lies a purpose or design ; conse- 
 quently the desire of something, the execution of which is, or appears 
 to be, in one^a own power. PoiXofiat, on the other hand, is confined to 
 that kind of willingness or wishing, in which the wish and inclination 
 towards a thing are either the only thing contained in the expression, 
 or are at least intended to be marked particularly. Hence it expresses 
 a readiness and willingness to submit to what does not exactly depend 
 upon oneself — {Butt. Lexilogus, Eng. Trans. 194.) 
 
 ■> Properly adj. 
 
 " From a, not, wipos, passage, outlet. 
 
 ' The dp^ajunos must be in the case of whatever it refers to. 
 
♦ 
 
 ON THE MOODS 4g 
 
 Exercise 18. , , ■, 
 
 5^ After what tenses must the opt. be tiaed ja dependent aen- 
 tencesl 
 
 101. What shall I say? Do you wish, then, (that) 
 we should go away? What shall we do? Do you 
 wish, then, that we should tell you the cause ? Do you 
 wifh that I should hold-my-tongue-about this ? Do you 
 wish, then, that I should begin ? All men, and you as 
 much as any body, praise this man. This eagle has, a 
 black head. They praise not only^^ the mother, tw^ alsc 
 the daughter. Not only you, but also your friends, will 
 prosper, if you do this. We must bear what fortune 
 sends {what comes from fortune^ ). You yourself shall 
 hear. , I am at a loss what (72, note p) to do. They are 
 at a loss which way to turn themselves. They did not 
 know which way to turn themselves. 
 
 13 
 
 § IS. The Moods continued. 
 
 102. a) .tT^ip, {or k^i), "a<fn8<iauv.' 1 Ooj^p^.e;: ^^, 
 b)uT,axot,^mSov_^^^'^^- I amplesinSl. 
 
 103. a) When conditional propositions become de- 
 
 pendent on another verb, the consequent 
 clause is in the infinitive. 
 
 h) Instead, therefore, of the optative with av (in 
 81. c) we shall have the infin. with uv. 
 
 c) Instead of the imperfect or aorist with S.v (81. 
 d) we shall have the present or aorist itifin. 
 with av. 
 104'. a; Instesid of the indie, future (81. 6) we shall 
 have the infin. future; and «t with opta- 
 tive instead of idv with subj., if in connec- 
 tion with /jasf ^iwie.; ' 
 
 ** Also e? n ^Yst (or ^x°Oj ^f^ SuaEiv ^v. See 86. note w. 
 
50 OV AND (f^. 
 
 105. Thus where we should have had in the conse 
 quent clause, 
 
 , ^ noioifi OLv, ^ noi^aatfi av, ^ nsnovqxoifi av, 
 
 novqaa, ^ i^olovv uv, \ inoiiiaa. av, \ insnov^xeiv av, 
 we shall have, 
 
 noi^oBiv, noiEiv av, noiqaai av, nenoi^xivai av 
 
 Exercise 19. 
 
 106. He said that, if you were to do this, you would 
 do him the greatest service.*' I said that, if any one 
 should do this, he would greatly injure me. He said 
 that, if he had a mina, he would give it to the slave. 
 He said that, if any one were to do this, he would do the 
 greatest injury"' to the state. He said that he was there 
 to see the battle. How much do you thirdc that your 
 horses would fetch, if they were sold (86*. c) ? Who 
 would not wonder at the shamelessness of this basest 
 flatterer ? He told me, that his daughter had very beau- 
 tiful hands." I should extremely like to see'' the wise 
 men ofold.^' If the Persians of the present day'^ were 
 wise, they would be doing better. I should wish to be 
 nontented with what comes from the gods.'= 
 
 § 19. OV and [iij. 
 
 107. 1) oil denies independently and directly. 
 
 2) n^ does not deny independently and directly, 
 but in reference to something else ; to some 
 supposed case, condition or purpose ; or in 
 the expression of some fear, solicitude, or 
 care. 
 lOT* 1) nn is used in sXl prohibitions (see 32. 06*0 
 2) With all conditional particles, el, idv (Ijv, ap). 
 
OV AND [iri. SI 
 
 oTttv, iasiSdv, (fcc, and with ore, oaoze, 
 'when,' if a condition is implied (111. d). 
 3) With all particles expressing intention or 
 purpose ; Iva, oneag, cog, &c. 
 Note.— In the same cases the compounds of fjif will 
 oe used when required. 
 
 108. But OV is used with on, <og {that) ; and also with 
 insl, ifieidi] [when, after, and as causal conjunctions, a«, 
 since), because they relate to actual facts. 
 
 109. a. b.) OV is also (generally) used when the 
 
 opinions, <fcc. of another person are stated in oblique 
 
 narration. 
 
 For though these seem to be dependent, they are only distinguish- 
 ed from direct assertion inform. 
 
 110. c) In negative propositions, positive pronouns 
 and adverbs should be translated into Greek by the cor 
 responding negative forms. 
 
 Hence the particles for neither — nor are to be used for either— or 
 after a negative; and no, nobody, nowhere, for any, anybody, any- 
 where, &c. (See note t " Q,uesti"ons on the Syntax, § 19.) 
 
 II] . a) ovx i&ilsiv' cptjalv, he says that he does not 
 choose. 
 
 b) vofti^u ov «a).bv ehai, he thinks that it is not 
 
 honorable. 
 
 c) ov Sivazai a v i sv Xsyetr, ovz ev noisTv rovg cfi 
 
 Xovg, he cannot either speak well of his 
 friends, or treat them well. 
 
 d) oi'x i^rjv EiaaX&siv naQo. zov aTQazriyov, bnote firi 
 
 axoXd^oi, persons were not allowed to go in 
 to the general, when he was not at leisure. 
 (Here a condition is implied: if he was not 
 at leisure at that time.) 
 
 112. Vocabulary 18. 
 
 Nobody, oidug, [itiSsig, -/Aia, -iv. 
 
 Not a single person, ov8s slg, fitjdg slg. 
 
 * Of iBsXa, flt'Xw (see 100, note a), the former is the common prose 
 raitn: ifliXw, — (jiru, — jik». 
 
52 
 
 OV AND lltl. 
 
 No longer, 
 
 Not even, 
 
 Neither, nor, 
 
 Neither, nor yet, 
 
 Both, and, 
 
 Unless, 
 
 Go into, 
 
 Go away, 
 
 Conapany (= intercourse 
 
 with). 
 Bid, order. 
 
 One is allowed [licet). 
 To be at leisure, 
 Leisure, 
 
 olxKtt, [iijitiri.* 
 oiSs, [tijde. 
 
 ovzs — ovTs: ftifw l*^S' 
 
 ovTS — ovde: fi^xE — (t^. 
 xai — xai, or is- — xaL 
 
 o/uXltt, ue, rj. 
 x£>Iev(». 
 
 a verb = am slow to do a 
 thing, «fcc.) 
 
 Obs. r£ — Kai is very often used, where we should only use 'and,' 
 — The notions are thus brought Into closer connection, and the rl 
 prepares us for the coming xal. 
 
 Exercise 20. 
 
 IS" When should (li) /cXtirre be used 1 when /ij kXc^js 1 72. 
 
 113. I will go away (65, note g), that I may not see 
 the battle. Let us no longer pursue what is disgrace- 
 ful.'^ He told me, that the road did not lead to Athens 
 vl08). Do not think, that the citizens serve you. If you 
 ^0 not do what you ought (91. c), you will not prosper. 
 No longer accustom yourself to deceive your father. I 
 will not take it, unless you bid (me). Let no one steal 
 this. Let not a single person go away. He says that 
 the boys do not wish to go away. Let us not fly-from 
 the company of the good. He said that, imless the citi- 
 zens performed him this service''', he would lay waste 
 the rest" of the country. I shall be slow to do that." 
 
 yet, still; with negatives, any longer, 
 at, iXnmiiat, i\fi\v8a, (IjXvOop) ^XOov. See 65. note | 
 
 
VERBALS IN TSOff. 63 
 
 ^ 20. Verbals in liog. 
 
 114. These verbals are formed both from trans, and 
 intrans. verbs: and also from mid. {deponent) verbs, 
 since they are sometimes used in a passive ijieaning. 
 
 115. a) They a.xQ passive, and take the agent in the 
 dative ; but they also govern the object in the same case 
 as the verbs from which they come. 
 
 116. a) When used in the neuter (with the agent in 
 the dat, omitted), they are equivalent to the participle in 
 dus used in the same way, and express : ' one must, 
 ought ^ «fcc. ; 'we, you, «fcc. m,ust,ought,^ &c. ; ox,Hsto 
 be,' &c. 
 
 117. 6) When formed from transitive verbs, they may 
 also be used in agreement with the object, the agent 
 being still in the dative. Here, too, they exactly agree 
 with the participle in dus. 
 
 118. Two peculiarities in Attic Greek deserve notice: 
 
 1. The neut. plur. is used as well as the neut. 
 
 sing. 
 
 2. The agent is sometimes put in the accus. 
 
 as well as the object. 
 
 119. c) When a verb has two constructions with 
 different meanings, the verbal adjective sometimes has 
 both : thus nEioriov with accus. has the meaning of per- 
 suade {nsi&siv tim); with the dat. that of to obey 
 [stelO-aa&ai ' riv). 
 
 120. a) G. itTi&v(ti]zsov ecttI tije uQSTJJg, we, you, 
 
 &c. should desire virtue. 
 D. i!Ti][BiQ}jrsov iarl r^ £gy(i^,we,you,&,c, 
 
 should set about the work. 
 A. xoXaaziov »(t?' top naida, toe, you, «fec. 
 
 should punish the boy. 
 . \ . , , , ,3 , ) you should 
 
 aaxritsa, eaii aoi i) aqstri, i . 
 ' Peif. 2. (or mid.) tifoiSi, I trust, or feel sure : I am persuaded. 
 
64 VERBALS IN ziog. 
 
 c) nsiariov iarlv avrov, we must persuade him 
 nsiaikov iaih avr^, we must obey him. 
 N. B. These examples may all te translated passive- 
 ly. Virtue should he cultivated, (fee. 
 
 121. Vocabulary 19. 
 To practise, exercise, culti- , , 
 
 vate. 
 Desire im-&vitm {gen. from e?rt, 
 
 on,&vii6s, mind, passion). 
 Set about, take in hand, im-xsiQeoa, {dat. from inl, 
 
 "Work, task, production, 'iqyov, ov, io.^ 
 
 Parent, i/ovEvg,ems,6. 
 
 Attempt, endeavour, try, 7Kiqao(iai, (verb. adj. nvqa- 
 
 TSOff). 
 
 Permit, suffer, «««»'' (verb. adj. skm'os). 
 
 Restrain by punishment, «„;i„'^^, (fut. -«'ao^«0- 
 
 punish, chastise, ' ^ 
 
 Run or fly to the assistance ^ .^^ ,^^^. 
 
 of, assist in the defence or, '^ ' ^ ' 
 
 Obs. These verbals should be formed from aor. 1 pass.™ by reject 
 ing the comment, turning inv into rlos, and thcTefart the preceding 
 aapiratt (if there is one) into its mute (t. e. jrr, kt, for #9, x9). 
 
 ij" Form verbals from ituKa pursue, f rfyu Jly from, uf' 
 benefit. 
 
 Exercise 21. 
 
 122. The great work must be set about. We must 
 not shun the labour. All the citizens should confer 
 benefits on the state. He said that all the citizens 
 ought to confer benefits on their country (state), when 
 there is any occasion. We must fly-to-the-assistance of 
 
 '^ Augment t. 
 • From Pod cry, Bla run. 
 
 ■» For if the aor. 1. has a different vowel, &c. from perf. pass., the 
 verbal adj. follows it, and not the perf. 
 
DOITBLE ACCUSATIVE. 55 
 
 our country. We must set about the task of chastising" 
 the boy. If the slave had done this, it would^« be ne- 
 cessary to punish him. If the boy should do this, it 
 would be necessary to punish him. He told us, that if 
 this were so,"'' we ought to set about the task. We must 
 punish not only'^^ my boy, but also my brother's.^ Pa- 
 rents" and poets" love their own productions. He said 
 that virtue should be cultivated by all. Whoever {oartg 
 av, 94. 2) is^' caught, shall be punished. We must not 
 be slow^^ to obey our parents. 
 
 ^ 21. Double Accusative. 
 
 123. Verbs of taking away from, teaching, conceal- 
 ing, asking, -putting on or off, take two accusatives. 
 
 124. a) Qti^alovg ;fp?/ft«r«° ^rj/tray,'" they asked 
 
 the Thebansfor money, 
 h) ov OS anoKQvxpm zavra, I will not hide this 
 from you. 
 
 c) lovg aoXs[iiovg- zijv vavv utreaTSQi^xttfisv, 
 
 we have deprived the enemy of their ship. 
 
 d) dtddaitovai zovg naidag acaqiQoavvtjv, they teach 
 
 the boys modesty {moderation or self-re- 
 straint.) 
 c) rov nouScc i^idvas tov yvtmva, he stript the boy 
 of his tunic. 
 
 125. Vocabulary 20, 
 Thebans, Qti^aioi, at. 
 
 Money, XQVI-"*'"*) ^^ (P^- ^flQW^'-)- 
 
 » The art. must be repeated before 'poets' or the meaning would 
 be • those who are parents and poets :' in other words, bsth attributes 
 would be spoken of the same subject. 
 
 ' From XP^'I"'^ (see 8, note a). It is only in the plur. that it 
 means money, etc. Properly, a thing used. 
 
 r oiViirfai in the mid. {siii aliquid expetere) does not take two ac- 
 nusatives, but one ace. aud Trapi, or one noun and an jjySn. (Foppo.) 
 
56 
 
 DOUBLE ACCUSATIVE. 
 
 Hide, 
 
 Ship,! 
 
 Deprive of; 
 
 Take away from, 
 
 Teach, 
 
 Modesty, moderation, self- 
 restraint, 
 
 Tote wise, (i. e. prudent), 
 or in one's right mind, 
 
 To be mad, 
 
 Die, 
 
 Mortal, 
 
 Immortal, 
 
 Strip, or take off, 
 
 Put on. 
 
 Tunic, 
 
 Misfortune, 
 
 xQvntco,'' ouio-nQvntm 
 ravg,' vecig, ij. 
 ttnoaiegeto. 
 aop-aiQsco.' 
 d/dacncoo.' 
 
 aaxpQoavrrj," T^g, t/. 
 
 ataqiQOvsio. 
 
 HaivopiKi.'' 
 
 ■tyy^axco,^ ttnoOvijaxca. 
 
 ■&rr]T6g, i], or. 
 
 a&civciTog, og or. 
 
 ixdvco,' ) in mid. " on or off 
 
 evdvm,'^ \ myself." 
 
 Xii(6v, y avog, 6. 
 
 dvoTiQayia, ag, r). 
 
 But for, 
 AUbnt,' 
 
 Phrases. 
 
 d liri did (ace.) 
 Saov ov (i. e. just as much 
 as not). 
 
 ' In ttor. 2. 
 
 I has for charact. 
 
 •vijesi vcuVj vavaij vaSf. 
 
 These are the fonna 
 
 Mid. I have (them 
 
 . tlus verb has 
 , ■ vavif veciiSf v^t vavvj — v 
 as used in Attic Greek. 
 
 • oipcoj (^ffu, &.C.), elXov, ppediii/. 
 
 * itSaiTKoif di^^m, ~oitatf &tli&ay(a. Act. I teach 
 taught. 
 
 " Hailipoirirtiv .... quam Boleo equidem quum temperantiam turn 
 moderatiojiem appellare, nonnunquam etiam modestiam. (Cic.) — rim, 
 abstract nouns from adj. in uv (especially) and others, iniippuv (from 
 trcas salvua, fp^v mens), moderate, temperate^ — prudent. 
 
 ^ liaUiojiai, /lavovfiai, iitjinva (with meaning of pres.), aor. Ipivnv. 
 
 " ^i/fjarKoi, floKoS/ioi, TcOpiiKa, iBavov. The perf. and aor. ^= lam dead. 
 
 « liu, go into, and also make to go into, — sink, enclose. Act. fut. 
 and aor. ynSh the trana. meaning. Mid. Seoptai, {Mmfiai, ilumpm) en- 
 close myself =put on (a garment). ISw {SvSi — isvai, te) has also this 
 meaning. Hence ivHa, put on : Ulia, put off, strip (with fut. and 
 aor.) ; both of another : mid. of myself. 
 
 y And under-garment with sleeves, over which a mantle was worn 
 out of doors. 
 
THE ACCTTSATIVE AFTER PASSIVE, &C. VERBS. 51 
 
 Outside, without, s^(o{ge7i.) zaa^m,extexna\, 
 
 outward things. 
 
 External, 6 «|(» (27). 
 
 Within, • ei>8ov (also, in doors, at 
 
 home ; svSov i(aTai,a^sTp, 
 to find a man in, or at 
 home). 
 
 Exercise 22. 
 
 O" What is the literal English of e! jiii iia 1 
 
 126. I will put on my tunic. Do not hide your mis- 
 fortunes from me. We will teach our daughters mod- 
 esty, O mother, do not teach youi daughter impudence 
 We will take away this from the woman. Let us not 
 teach these most disgraceful things to our hoys. The 
 rest of the Thebans were there to see the battle. He 
 would have died" but for the dog. Let us not fly from 
 the all but present war. I will put his tunic on the 
 boy. If the enemy do this,'' we will deprive them of 
 their ship. I should have died" but for my faithful 
 slave. This man has stript me of my tunic. If you do 
 not perform me this service,*' I will deprive you of your 
 pay. If we find him at home, we will kill him. He 
 killed all who were within. Let us love the company 
 of the temperate. Let us not fear external evils. 
 
 ^ 22. T/ic Accusative after Passive and Neuter Verbs 
 
 127. The accus. of the active becomes the nom. of 
 the pass. 
 
 128. a) Ifthe verb governs two accusatives, that of 
 the person hecomes the nominative ; that of the thing 
 continues to be the object of the passive verb, as in Latin. 
 But also, 
 
 129. b) The dat. of the active sometimes becomes 
 
 3* 
 
68 THE ACCUSATIVE AFTER PASSIVE, &C. VERBS. 
 
 the nom. of the passive ; the object of the active con 
 tiiiuing to be the object of the passive in the accusative 
 {imzginsiv, manvsiv zivi ti). 
 
 130. d) Intransitive verbs take an ace. of a noun of 
 kindred 7neani?ig ; and (as in qsTv ydla) of one that 
 restricts the general notion of the verb to a particular 
 instance. 
 
 e) Here the ordinary .occus. of the object is found together with 
 this limiting accusaiive. 
 
 131. a) aqiatgs&sls' tijv dgx^v, having had his 
 
 government taken from him. 
 
 b) Smxqdztis imiggnsTai rTjvdiairav. Socra- 
 
 tes is entrusted with the arbitration; 
 Tiematsvi^ai " lovio, this is entrusted to me, 
 or lam entrusted with this. 
 
 c) ixxonBlg zovg oqi&aXixovg, having had his 
 
 eyes knocked out. 
 
 d) Qiiv ydXa, to flow with milk ; ^^v " ^iov, to live 
 
 a life ; xivSvrsvBtv nivdHvov, to brave a dan- 
 ger; nolsfxov fiolc/isTv, to wage a war, 
 vnvov xoifida&tti, to sleep a sleep. 
 
 e) iriK^as t ovg^aQ§ uqovg rijv iv Maqa&ion 
 
 litt,%rii>,he conquered the barbarians in 
 the battle of Marathon. 
 
 132. Vocabulary 21. 
 
 To commit, confide, or en- ■, , . 
 
 trust to, *«.re«;r«,.t 
 
 Fjntrustto, marsvmt (also with dat. 
 
 only, to trust a person). 
 
 Arbitration, diaiza, tjg, ^.^ 
 
 Faith, mang, stag, ^. 
 
 Disbelieve, disobey (a pei- , ' c j * n 
 
 son or law), ^^ ^ «m<r««,(to) 
 
 • 195, note s. 
 
 • lyii TricTtiojtai {ImS tivos), I am trusted, confided in, or belieeed. 
 
 ^ ^ia, xpi'l'^'t Ttii/oM, ii^aa (live, use, hunger, thirst), contract a* 
 into i; (not o). {i3, fyf, &c 
 
 t For the distinction between these words, see Index under ' em 
 trust to. 
 
THE ACCUSATIVE AFTER PASSIVE, &C. VERBS. 
 
 59 
 
 Law, 
 
 Cut out, knock out, 
 Cut to pieces, 
 Government, magistracy, 
 
 Danger, 
 
 Brave, incur, expose one- 
 self to a danger, 
 
 Eye, 
 
 To sleep, 
 
 Sleep, 
 
 Fountain, 
 
 Plow, 
 
 Flows with a full or strong 
 stream. 
 
 Honey, 
 
 Conquer, 
 
 Victory, 
 
 Barbarian, (i. e. one who is 
 
 not a Greek), 
 To hold a magistracy, or 
 . office. 
 Milk, 
 
 River, 
 
 VOflOS, OV, 0. 
 
 ix-xcnrto. 
 
 xaTCi-xonzea. 
 
 «QXVf VS, V (also, begin- 
 ning: ace. oQx^v, or i^ 
 ttQX^v, used adverbially 
 for at all, or ever, after 
 negatives, when an ac- 
 tion is spoken of). 
 
 KlvSvVOS, OV, 6. 
 
 xivdvrsvsiv xivdvpor. 
 
 oqi&akiiog, ov, b. 
 xoi/tdoi^ai (aor, -&riv). 
 vnvoe,ov, 6. 
 
 QSCO.° 
 
 noXvg QBi, (the adj. being in 
 the case. and gender of 
 its noun). 
 
 fisXt, ITOg, 70. 
 
 viscdco. 
 vixij, tjg, Ti. 
 
 ^d^aqog, ov, 6. 
 
 ydXa, ydlav.xog, to (R. ya- 
 
 Xaxz). 
 notafwe, ov, 6. 
 
 Exercise 23. 
 
 133. I have had the arbitration entrusted to me. He 
 said, that he had had the arbitration entrusted to him (72, 
 c). The eagle has had its eyes knocked out. The foun- 
 
 " jilm, fvfjiTonttl, IffvJiila ', dor. Ip^riv (flowed) ; {ipfeina and ^cicofai, 
 
 not Attic). 
 
tiO THE ACCUSATIVE. 
 
 tains flow with milk and honey. If the fountains flow 
 both with milk and honey, we shall become rich.^' If the 
 rivers had flowed with wine, the citizens would have bs' 
 come rich. If the citizens are wise, they will put him to 
 death. If the citizens are mad {aor.), they will put you 
 to death* You will not be able (86*. b) to disbelieve, 
 your mother. The rivers are flowing with a strong 
 stream,. The thing has aZZ 6m<" been done. I should 
 have lulled yovi, but for^^ your father. Sophroniscus 
 had his goveriimen t taken away from him. He has had 
 his government taken away from him. Hares have 
 large eyes.*" Let us try to bear what comes from tin 
 gods."^ We, must try^' to bear what fortune sends.'^ 
 He conquered the Persians in the battle that took place 
 there (m the there battle). I will not expose myself to 
 this danger. The people outside were cut to pieces. 1 
 asked the boy himself, whether (72. c) the river was 
 flowing with a strong stream. I asked Sophroniscus 
 what magistracy he held. 
 
 ^ 23. The Accusative continued. 
 
 134. a) TKfe accus. is used after nouns and adjectives 
 where x«t«, as to, might be supposed understood. 
 
 It thus limite the preceding word to a particular part, cirmmi- 
 stance^ &o, 
 
 135. b) The accus. of a neut. pronoun or any gener- 
 al expression, is often used in this way after verbs that 
 would govern a substantive in another case. 
 
 136. c) The accusative is used to express duration 
 of time, and the distance of one place from another. 
 
 137. a} KaVog ro (Tc3/<a, beautiful in person. 2mxQa- 
 ,r ':, 'ziie jovvofca,'^ Socrates by name. nXijvtoiiai 
 
 iri* xB(pakijt', I am struck on the head, nav- 
 ies eidaifiovsT, he is happy in all respects. 
 
THE ACCUSATIVE. 
 
 61 
 
 b) iiiqSi(iai uvtqi ; what use shall I?nake of it'} 
 
 lohat am I' to do with it ? oix olSa o,ti go 
 ^Qaftat, I donH know what use to make of 
 you; I don't know what to do with you. 
 
 c) nolxv ^Qovov, a long time, igstg oXovg pijvae 
 
 three whole months, za noXXd, mostly, (for) 
 mfOst of his time, ansj^st Sexa aiaSiovg, it ia 
 ten stadia off. 
 d. lovvavriov,' on the contrary, to l.Ey6(iEvov, as 
 the saying is. 
 
 138. VoCABtlLAEY 22. 
 
 Whole, 
 
 olog, rj, OP. 
 
 Body, person, 
 
 amixa, azog, to. 
 
 Month, 
 
 (xnv, (iijvog, 6. ^ 
 
 Name, 
 
 ovofia, atog, to. 
 
 To strike, 
 
 nikfiaam {Att. nXriztm : used 
 
 
 by the Attics only in 
 
 
 ■perf. act. and in the 
 
 
 pass. For other tenses 
 
 
 natuaam, ^<o, is used.) 
 
 Unjust, 
 
 aSiKog, og ov. 
 
 Do injustice to, injure, 
 
 aBixsoo {ace. of person and 
 
 
 also ol thing.) 
 
 Injustice, 
 
 ttSiitia, ag, sj {adixsTv ddixiav. 
 
 
 to commit an injury). 
 
 Staff, 
 
 Qtt^dog, ov, 17. 
 
 Insult, 
 
 i^Qi^ta {ace. : v^qi^siv sig rt- 
 
 
 m, to act insolently to- 
 
 
 wards). 
 
 Insult, insolence, 
 
 v^Qig, stag, ri- 
 
 Reverence, 
 
 amo(tai, eaofiai, et aor. I 
 
 
 pass.: {ace.) 
 
 Run away from, 
 
 anodidQuaxm^ {ace.) 
 
 ' Thejsuhj. used as in 99. c. expresses more doubt as to what is te 
 ie done than the fut. 
 
 ' ^rd ivavriov. 
 
 3 iiipiaKla, ipdrnjiat, iiSpaKO, ISpav (jpaOl, fpaiiv, SpcS (f s, &C.} Ipdh 
 ifat, { 
 
62 THE ACCUSATIVE. 
 
 To have no fear of, to be » j" i„^,> \ 
 without fear of, ^a^e*'" (ace.) 
 
 Mild, gentle, nqaos^ nqa-Ha, ngaop. 
 
 Disposition, ^&og, soe,t6. 
 
 To be distant from, aatxm (mid. abstain from: 
 
 gen.) 
 Use, do with, j^gdoiiai (daf.) 
 
 Stadium, atddioe or atddiov. 
 
 Exercise 24. 
 O" Why is ScTTis used io 137. 6 ? 72, note p. 
 
 139. The boy is of a mild disposition. He told me 
 that his daughter was of a mild disposition. If any one 
 of your slaves should run away from you, and you 
 should take him, what would you do with him?'' A 
 certain philosopher, Socrates by name, was there, to see 
 the man. Accustom yourself to have-no-fear-of death. 
 r am not without fear of the king of the Persians. I 
 have been struck on my head.* ' He struck the boy with 
 a staff. Accustom yourself to reverence your parents. 
 Insult nobody. The injury (worn.) which they commit- 
 ted against you. We ought to do'' what is juSt," and 
 abstain^ from what is unjust. The city is three stadia 
 off. Let us avoid insolence, we must pursue what is 
 just. Let us insult nobody. Let us no longer act mso- 
 ently towards those who' manage the affairs of the 
 state. 
 
 i; 
 
 * TTfiSos B. (irpoof p. R. K.) takes all fern, and neut. plur. as if 
 irom irpais, vpaeia, U. pi. rpasa. Plur. mas. Trpmi, irpacts '. G. Trpaeuv : D. 
 vpAots^ wpa§iTi(v) '. A. Ttp^ovSj TpaeTs. 
 
 ' The verbal adj. from dm^eaOai is dfenTlos, a word not found in 
 Possow's Lexicon, bul used by Xenophon. It, of couree, governs the 
 gen. 
 
THE GENITIVE. 6!} 
 
 § 24. The Genitive. 
 
 Qbs, The fundamental notion of the genitive is separationfrom, 
 proceeding from ; i. e. the notion of the prepositions from, out of 
 
 140. a) Partitives, numerals, superlatives, «fcc. gov- 
 ern the genitive. 
 
 141. 6) The genitive is used with adverbs of time 
 and -place. 
 
 142. d) The genitive also expresses the material 
 out of which any thing is made ; and generally such 
 properties, circutnstances, &c. as we should express by 
 
 'of: 
 
 Obs. 1. V) Our indef. art. tnust be translated by the Greek (def.) 
 art. in expressions like ' once a day,' &c., where ' a' is equivalent to 
 ' each.' 
 
 Obs. 2. e) The gen. stands after •possessive pronouns in a kind of 
 apposition to the personal pronoun implied. It may often be trans- 
 lated as an exclamation. The gen. is also used alone, or after inter- 
 jections, as an excUaruUvm. 
 
 143. a) oi^fQoi/inoi rar av&Qmnoiir, sensible per- 
 
 sons. oiBslg 'EXT^i^vMv, none of the Greeks, 
 fi [isyiaz'q tmv voacav, the greatest of dis- 
 eases, 
 h) tQig rijsvt^BQag, three times a day. nov YVSi 
 in what part of the world ? noQQta t^g tji-i- 
 XI a g,far advanced in years. 
 
 c) sdmxd aot z aviQinidzmv, I gave you (some) 
 
 of m,y m,oney. mvsip vdazog, to drink 
 some water, ia&ieiv xQsav, to eat some 
 meat (of a particular time : with the accus- 
 ative the meaning would be to do it habitu- 
 ally). 
 
 d) arecpicvog iaxiv&mv, a crown of hyacinths. 
 
 Ssvdqov aolXcav itmr, a tree many years 
 old. rifyoQ K'^KofiaTog (isjaXov, for he 
 was of great consideration. 
 
 e) SiaqnaCovai ra if^a row xamdal/tovog, they are 
 
64 
 
 THE GENlnVE. 
 
 plundering my property, wretched man 
 that I am ! r^g avaidsiag, what impudcnm I 
 
 144. Vocabulary 23. 
 
 Sensible, prudent, 
 
 Greek, 
 
 Greece, 
 
 To what place? whither ? 
 
 Where? 
 
 Far, far on, 
 
 A person's age, 
 
 To drink. 
 
 To eat. 
 
 Flesh, meat. 
 
 Crown, 
 
 Tree, 
 
 Year, 
 
 Consideration, reputation, 
 
 Violet, 
 
 Lily, 
 
 Golden, 
 
 Place on. 
 
 Worthless, despicable, 
 
 Arrive, 
 
 To be given, 
 
 Plunder, 
 
 Wretched, unfortunate, 
 
 Alas, 
 
 qiQovifiog, OS ov. 
 "ElXriv, i]vog, 6. 
 'ElXcig, ddoe, ^. 
 
 7101 J 
 
 nov ; 
 rjhxia, ag, tj. 
 
 XQsag'^ to. 
 
 azsqiavog, ov, 6. 
 
 SsvdQov,' ov, to. 
 
 hog, sag {ovg), to. 
 
 a^mjia, atog, to. 
 
 lov (Ft'oc) ov, to. 
 
 KQivov, ov, to. 
 
 XQvasog, y^qvaovg.^ 
 
 im-ti&ijiu {dat.) 
 
 (favkog, ri, ov. 
 
 aif-invsofuu.'^ 
 
 doTsog (from ido&^v, SlStoiu) 
 
 8i(tQndloo (fut. mid.) 
 
 xaxodal/imv, mv, ov. 
 
 giEti: oiiioi. 
 
 ' iriva, (irreg. fut.') jrio/iat, iTEiTOiKa, TTs-ro^at. ticiov, Irridriv. 
 
 ' iirBica (from edoj), (Irreg, fut.) ISoftat, iHiioKa, cSfilcajiai. l^ayn 
 (from root <pay), ^dsadriv. 
 
 " G. aas, as, &C. 
 
 ■ llvlpov, D. plur. tivSpstri (also plur. Icvlpia, Scvlplais from another 
 Ionic form). 
 
 » tcfhov has in plur. a collateral form xpivla, D. (tpiwci, as if ftoni 
 ccfvns, n. 
 
 V ^pijim;, ovs, ^pvuiri, 5, ^piacov, ovu. 
 
 Xpmlov, oS, xP'"'^1S> ?fi ;cp»irlo», oS. 
 
 Xpvala, a, XP^'hi S' XP^'^ft V> ^'^• 
 ^ Uvtopiai, ?fo/ia£ Xyiiai, \K6priv, 
 
THE GENITIVB. C5 
 
 Phrases. 
 
 Till late m the day, ftij^gi m^Qia zTJg fmiqas. 
 
 Willingly at least, ixmshai' ,' 
 
 So to say, to speak gener- mg mog smsiv ' (showing 
 ally, that a general assertion is 
 
 not absolutely true.) 
 
 Exercise 25. 
 
 145. 1 will place a crown of violets on the boy's head. 
 The mother placed a crown of lilies on her daughter's 
 head. Let us imitate sensible persons. Let us not imi- 
 tate worthless persons." I will be with you three time? 
 every year. If he were not [aperson) of great considei- 
 ation,'" the citizens world have put him to death. At 
 what part of the earth am I arrived? I will give each 
 of them a golden crown. He told me that we ought to 
 give to each of them a golden crown (71). If he had 
 not been advanced in years, he would not have died. 
 They slept {used to sleep) till late in the day. Let us 
 hear whatever the gods please" (90*). All men, so to 
 say, admire rich men. No Grecian will do this, at least 
 willingly. I will not drink any of the wine, at least 
 willingly. I will give sovie of the flesh to this eagle. 
 My property was plundered, wretched man that I am ! 
 Alas, what injustice ! Alas for my possessions ! Let us 
 fly froni the greatest of diseases, shamelessness. 
 
 "J 25. The Genitive continued. 
 146. a) Verbal adjectives with a transitive meamng 
 
 ' Such short phrases with the irffin. are inserted in t?ie sentence: 
 Idiv Sij kKovaa eiva oiK dTroAccTTsrat fi-ipv^jji See 151. a. 
 
66 THE GKNITIVE. 
 
 govern the genitive. That is, the object of the verb 
 stands in the gen. after the verbal adjective. 
 
 146*. h) Words relating to plenty, want, value, &c., 
 govern the genitive. 
 
 147. c) Verbs relating to the senses, except sight, 
 govern the genitive. 
 
 Obb. dKovcw, hear, generally takes a gai. of the sound, and an oca 
 of the person producing it : hfit in neither case witliout exception. 
 
 148. e. f) The genitive is often used where we may 
 supply ' in respect to ' in English. 
 
 In this way, the gen. restricts a general expression to a particu- 
 lar meaning ; to some particular circumstance, object, &c. 
 
 The genitive so used may often be supposed governed by {pwa.. 
 on. account of. It is very frequently used in this way after words 
 corapoundea with a privative. 
 
 .49. a) ngaxTiHog tmvxaXmv, apt to perform (or, in 
 ike habit of performing) honorable ac- 
 tions. 
 
 b) [leatop can to ^yv qigovziSmv, life is full of 
 
 cares, a^iog rii^rjg, worthy of honour. SeIg- 
 ■&ai j^Qtifidicov, to want money ; also Seia&at 
 ■tivog {gen. oi person), to beseech a person, 
 
 c) o^uv {ivqav, to smell of perfumes, anrea&ai 
 
 vsxQOv, to touch a corpse, axoisiv aaiSiov 
 
 xXaiovTog, to hear a child crying. 
 Tovg Sovlovg eysvas i^g iXev&SQiag, he allowed 
 
 his slaves to taste of liberty, 
 aysvazog tlqg iXsv&sqlag, one who has never 
 
 tasted of liberty. 
 
 d) sj^s<r&al ripog, to cling to, or be next to. am- 
 
 rtiQiag iyt^Ea&ai, to provide (carefully and 
 anxiously) /or one's safety. 
 
 e) anaig a^qivmv naidiav, without male offspring. 
 
 iyyizKia. avr^ si/xi yivovg, I am, very near 
 ly related to him (literally, very near to 
 him with respect to birth), daavg derdgm, 
 thick with trees; thickly planted with 
 trees. 
 
 f) eiBaifiopl^m aszovzQonov, Ithinkyou hap 
 
THE GENITIVE. 
 
 67 
 
 ipy in your disposition, oiiereigm as rdv 
 nd&ovs, I pity you on account of your 
 
 n^axTixog, ' g, ov. 
 
 150. Vocabulary 24. 
 
 Apt to do or perform; in 
 the habit of doing or per- 
 forming, 
 
 Apt, or fit to govern. 
 
 To govern, 
 
 To smell of, (i. e. emit a 
 smell). 
 
 Ointment, perfume, 
 
 Touch, 
 
 Corpse, 
 
 Free, 
 
 Freedom, liberty. 
 
 Hear, 
 
 Child, 
 
 Cry, 
 
 Give to taste, allow, to 
 taste, 
 
 One who has not tasted. 
 
 Childless, 
 
 Male, 
 
 Near, 
 
 Race, family, birth. 
 
 Thick, crowded, 
 
 Think or pronounce hap- 
 
 py- 
 
 OCQXtXOe, tj, OV. 
 
 %<» {gen.) 
 
 oftt).' 
 
 (ivqov, OV, TO. 
 
 anzonai. 
 
 vsxQog, OV, 6 (adj. " dead"). 
 
 ilev&SQog, a, ov. 
 
 iXsv&SQia, ag, ^. 
 
 naidiov,'' ov, to. 
 vlaioa. "" 
 
 ysvm. 
 
 aysvatog, og ov. 
 aneug (one termin. 
 ^Sog). 
 
 iyyig {gen.) ^ 
 
 yivoe, sog, to, 
 dousvg, eta, v. 
 
 evdatiiovi^to. 
 
 G. 
 
 ' ikSs, appended to verbal roots, denotes fitness to do what the verlj 
 expresses. Appended to the root of substantives, it has the same lati- 
 Inde of meaning as loi (20, note n.) 
 
 ' H<^> iiifo, Mala (with meaning oipres.) 
 
 ** itKovby, aKovtrofjiat, aKfiKoa, fiKOWTftai,-¥iKOvaa. 
 
 " — 101/ the principal termination of diminutives: Trats, TraiSiot 
 Thoee that form a dactyl are paroxytone ; the rest proparoxytane. 
 
 " KKala {itXaiao^ai, KXavaoijiixi) ; but aor. f/i^awa. Att. kXbw (d). 
 In old Att. Spcriiii. 
 
68 THE GENITIVE. 
 
 Disposition, tgonog,' ov, 6. 
 
 Pity, olxrsigm. 
 
 Suffering, affliction, tid&og, eog (ov?) to (plur 
 
 " the passions"). 
 
 Worthy, a^io?, a, or. 
 
 Honour, rift^, ^s, v- 
 
 Want, beseech, dsojiat {-^aonai, -'^&ijv). 
 
 Full of, usatog, ij, oV. 
 
 Life, 70 ^jy. 
 
 Cares, cpQovtidsg, at (pi. c{ qigoviig), 
 
 Not at all, oidsv, firiSiv, often followed 
 
 by Tt : ovbiv ti, &c. 
 
 Who in the world? u'g mors ;' 
 
 What is the verbal adj. in reos from siSatjxovi^o} 1 siSaiftoviaTeos* 
 What 13 the meaning of Ix"^"' with gen. ? 149. d. 
 
 Exercise 26. 
 
 151. I asked whether (72. c) the children of the judge 
 were in the habit of performing just actions. If you are 
 in the habit of performing just actions, you will be hap- 
 py. I will make the boy fit to govern men. I am not 
 at all in want of money. I would not touch a corpse, at 
 least willingly. If the physician had been present, my 
 child would not have died. Let us ask the next (sub- 
 jects) to these. I think you happy on account of youi 
 virtue. They pitied the mother on account of her aflHic- 
 tion. The boy is nearly related to Socrates (149. e) 
 He told me that the boy was very nearly related to So- 
 crates. We ought to think the temperate happy. I would 
 not willingly touch a corpse.* I asked the boy whethei 
 he thought life full of cares. What in the world am 1 
 to do with him (137. 6)?' 
 
 y Tp6mi from Tfimo, to turn; aa wcsay, a maris turn of mind. 
 
 N. B. Nouns in os, from verbal roots, generally change e of the rod 
 'jito 0. 
 
 ' mrc (enclitic), at any time ; used with interrogatives, it expresse 
 surprise. 
 
 " ifwv eJvai is confined to negative sentences. 
 
I HE GENITIVE. 69 
 
 Exercise 27. 
 
 152. Who in the world admires these things ? Who 
 in the world is this ? If these things are so, let us care- 
 fully provide for our safety. Let us speak what' comes 
 next (149. d) to this. What in the world are you admir- 
 .ng? I asked the judge, what in the world the citizens 
 were admiring. The boy is nearly related to Sophrouis- 
 cus. Xenoclides will be general with three others.'' Let 
 us rule over our passions. We must set about^' the task 
 of ruling over our passions. He told me that he was 
 one-who-had-never-tasted-of libeirty. Let us cling to our 
 liberty. He told me thait the whole"" country was thickly 
 planted with trees. The judge is most worthy of honour. 
 What in the world shall we do with the boy ? 
 
 § 26. The Genitive continued. 
 
 153. a) Most verbs that express such notions as/ree- 
 
 ingfrom, keeping off from, ceasing from, 
 deviating or departing from, Sccgovevn 
 the gen. 
 b) Most verbs that express remembering or for- 
 getting ; caring for or despising ; spar- 
 ing; aiming at or desiring ; ruling over 
 or excelling ; accusing of or condemning, 
 Sec. govern the genitive ; but not without 
 many exceptions. 
 
 154. Vocabulary 25. 
 
 (Verbs governing the genitive : the transitive ones with accue 
 also, of course.) 
 
 To fiee from, andJildzTto (y) also, " to 
 
 come out of an affair," 
 "come ofF""getoir"w, 
 ano. Mid. " take oneself 
 off." Aor. 2. pass, with 
 mid. meaning. 
 
70 
 
 THE GENITIVE. 
 
 Exclude from, 
 Make to cease, 
 Leave off, desist from, 
 Miss, err, 
 
 Differ, 
 
 Way, 
 
 Chase, hunting, 
 
 Sea, 
 
 Disease, 
 
 Physician, 
 
 With impunity 
 
 Toil, labour, 
 Market-place, 
 Heavy-armed soldier. Hop- 
 lite, 
 
 nctvto {mid. " cease"). 
 
 Kfiaqruvm ' (also to sm, tlq 
 or hbqI with accus- 
 al ams^.) 
 
 Siaqiegoa (60, note b). 
 
 686g, ov, rj. 
 
 &tiQ«, as, fi- 
 
 ■&akaaaa, i]S, t], 
 
 voaog, ov, fj. 
 
 'uTQos, ov, 6. 
 
 Xai'giov (part, literally "re- 
 joicing"). 
 
 novog, ov, 6 (also " trouble"). 
 
 ayoqd, ag, ^. 
 
 onXirtjg, ov, 6. 
 
 Exercise 28. 
 
 155. Death will free us from all our toils. They 
 will exclude the Persians from the sea. He told nie, 
 that the Athenians were excluding the Persians from 
 the sea. They are here to exclude (72. b) the Grecian '■ 
 Hoplites from the market-place. Speaking" fast is a 
 different thing {differs) from speaking well. A good 
 king does not at allt differ from a good father. The 
 physician was there, that he might free the boy from 
 his disease. He told me, that the physician had 
 missed his way. If the judge had been there, you would 
 not have escaped with impunity. If the king is there, 
 they will not escape with impunity. They who have 
 sinned' against the state, will not escape with impunity. 
 
 ^ In Attic Greek, eipyu is ezcludo, eif>yu includo. (B.) 
 
 o ijiapriviii, ifiapTijiroiiat, ^/laprfiKa. fifjtdpTov. 
 
 i Of the Greeks. 
 
 ■f oWtK Ti, not dpxfi' : for ' at all ' docs not here refer to an action. 
 
THE GENITIVE. 
 
 71 
 
 The hoy is desisting from the chase. If I had known 
 tliis, I would not have tried at aW* to persuade him. 
 
 snikav&dvoftaiJ 
 
 § 27. The Genitive continued. 
 
 156. Vocabulary 26. 
 
 Verba governing the genitive. 
 Remember, 
 Forget, 
 Care for, have any regard 
 
 for, 
 Hold cheap, 
 Despise, 
 Spare, 
 Desire, 
 Desire, 
 Aim at, 
 Master, 
 Overcome, 
 
 Get the better of, surpass, 
 Accuse, charge. 
 
 Condemn, 
 Impiety, 
 
 ohytoQsm. 
 xaTacpQOvso}. 
 
 im9vniw. 
 
 aioxaCoiiai,. 
 KQazim. 
 
 nsQiyiyvofiai. 
 
 xazijYOQsco (jjass. " to be 
 laid to the charge of"). 
 
 xaTcijtyvcoaiuo.^ 
 
 aac'^sia, as, tj {impious, 
 aae^tje, 87, note z). 
 
 9 The third (paulo post) fut. is the fut. used for verbs Ihat have a 
 perf. of the pass, form with the meaning of a present : as ntjiunjiai, jitji- 
 vfjaoiiat. 
 
 ' \av6dviiiy )iria-cij, ^G^)}0a■ e^adot/. 31id. ^avBdvojiai, X^iTO/xat, .VXqcTjUat. 
 iXaOiffirjv. 
 
 S yiyvt^crfcii), yvtMTOfiai, iyvajKa^ eyvucjiat. Aor. iyvojv. ilyvtavj yvoidtf 
 yvoiijv, yvtoy yviSvqif yvois)' 
 
 Obs Karriyopta may have ace. oi the charge or crime, gen. of the per- 
 son: or, if no crime is mentioned, gren. of perso/i. /carayiyi'tSo-Kto has oc- 
 cua. of the charge, or punishment; gen. of person. In the pass, th? 
 ace. will of course become the nom., and the gen. of the person remain. 
 
73 THE GENITIVE. 
 
 Pietv, evaeBsia, ag, t/ (pious, doe- 
 
 Banishment, 9117^. ?ffi »/• 
 
 Former, 6 nqiv (26). 
 
 Folly, ftmqia, as, rj. 
 
 Laughter, yiktag, mtos, 6. 
 
 I at least, I for my part, iymjs. 
 
 Far (= much, greatly), noXv. 
 
 Forefather, ancestor, tiQoyovog, ov, 6. 
 
 Exercise 29. 
 
 1^ What ig the usual opt. of contracted verbs 1 oiiiv, liriu. 
 
 157. I remember my former'^ troubles. They 
 asked him whether he despised the Persians. Do not 
 despise your neighbour. Let us spare our money. 
 They accuse the judge himself of injustice. They con- 
 demned them all to death (156, note g). Do not aim at 
 producing'" laughter. The men of the present day' 
 have forgotten the virtue of their ancestors. Much in- 
 justice is laid to the charge of Xenoclides. The father 
 of Xenoclides was found guilty^' of impiety. Most 
 persons desire money. Let us master our desires. Do 
 not desire the property"" of your neighbour. Let us fly 
 from the company of the impious. Let us not only 
 speak well of the pious, but let us also confer benefits'" 
 upon them. 
 
 Exercise 30. 
 
 158. They have condemned Sophroniscus to banish- 
 ment (156, note g). He accuses the others of folly. I£ 
 you had done this,'' I for my part should have accused 
 you of folly. If you do this, I for my part shall accuse 
 you of folly. If any one should do this, the prudent 
 would accuse him of folly. He said that, if any man 
 did this, the prudent would accuse him of folly. I think 
 you happy on account of your piety (149. /). This boy 
 
THE GENITIVE. 
 
 far surpasses his brother in virtue {dat.) Alas what 
 folly !" These things happened in the time of «• our 
 forefathers. He said, that to be prosperous was not in 
 our (own) power." 
 
 ^ 28. The Genitive continued. 
 
 159. a. b) After verbs of price and value, the price 
 or value is put in the genitive. 
 
 160. After verbs that express or imply exchange, the 
 thing for which we exchange another is put in the 
 genitive. 
 
 161. d. e) A noun of time is put in the gen. in an- 
 swer to the questions when 7 and since, or within what 
 time 7 
 
 If the point of time is defined by a numeral adjective, the time 
 when is put in the dative: it stands however in the gen. with the 
 farmer^ ilia aame, each, &c. 
 
 162. /. g) The gen. expresses the part by which a 
 person leads, takes, or gets hold of any thing. 
 
 162*. a) dqaxuve uyoQu^siv rt, to bup something for, 
 a drachma. 
 
 b) ni-slat ov^ rovTO rifimfiai, lvalue this at a 
 
 very high price (very highly). 
 
 c) Tqtisfivagxati9Ti'xstovlii7iov, he 'laid down 
 
 three mince for the horse. 
 j^Qr/iiaia rovzmv nQdztszai, he exacts the 
 money (or payment) for this. 
 
 d) vvxTog, by night ; rifisQag, by day ; 'iquiov 
 
 avpovffor a considerable time, 
 c) noXXmv ^ixeqkiv ov [iSfis'i.etijy.a, I have noi 
 
 practised for many days. 
 /) Xa^Hv (generally la^eaQaC) noSog, to taki 
 
 4 
 
74 THE GENITIVE, 
 
 (a person) by the foot, aysiv x^iQoSt lo 
 lead by the hand. 
 
 hv Xvxov zSiv mtcov nqara , I get hold of 
 the wolf by the ears. 
 h) zovTO ovx sariv avdQog aocpov, this is 7101 
 
 the part of a wise man. 
 i) oi) navT he ilvai, not to he a thing that every 
 body can do. iavTov eIvm, to be one's 
 own master. 
 
 163. Vocabulary 27. 
 
 Purchase, buy, ayoqaZ<a ' ( properly " am in 
 
 the market-place," ayoqi). 
 
 Drachma, Sqaiiiri, ^s, 17. 
 
 To value, zindofiou. 
 
 Mina, iiva, as, ^■ 
 
 Lay down, xuTa-ti&tjiu. 
 
 To exact, to exact pay- , 
 
 ment, nQazrea&aL 
 
 Considerable,long(oftime.) avpio?, ■q, 6v {prop, "con- 
 tinuous"). 
 To practice, fiEkszoiai. 
 
 To take hold of, la^ia&ai (92, note"). 
 
 To get hold of, xQazsai (prop. " to master"). 
 
 Equestrian exercises. t« tnmxd. 
 
 Exercise 31. 
 
 164. The king will not fight (these) ten days. Ifc 
 one has arrived for a long time. I should like to pur- 
 chase" this for three minas. It is the part of a good man 
 
 ' (a) The being or having what the root denotes, ia expressed by 
 verbs ao), lu, etiw, maau^ (wrrtj), a^w, l^ia. (6) The making a thing 
 into, or furnishing it with what the root denotes, is expressed bj 
 verbs in tfcj, i^u, ivu, (v), alvu. 
 
 Obs. These meanings are not invariably ooaerved ; e. g. those In 
 (<w are set down as' belonging to both classes. The least subject to 
 change are those in tu, rfw, da. (R.) 
 
COMPARISON. ^5 
 
 to confer benefits upon his friends. He told me that he 
 vahied this very highly. He said that if he had a talent, 
 he would lay it down for this horse (102). It is not 
 every man that can mastei'^ his desires. He took hold 
 of the hoy hy his foot. The mother leads her daughtet 
 by the hands. I have not practised equestrian exercises 
 for a long time. Two dogs had got hold of the same 
 wolf hy the ears. Three dogs had got hold of the wolf 
 by the same ear. The boys are practising equestrian 
 exercises. They exact payment for the horse. If you 
 care for yourself, provide for your safety. If they cared 
 for the boy, they would not do this. I had got hold of 
 the wolf itself by the ears. It is not every man who can 
 get hold of a wolf by the ears.' It is not every man 
 that is-without-fear-of death. A slave is not his own 
 master. I will go away by night. The Scythians went 
 away by night. 
 
 § 29. Comparison.'' 
 
 165. a) The thing with which another is compared, 
 is put in the genitive. 
 
 The fuller construction is -vnth fi, than ; which liowever is used 
 only where the genitive cannot be employed. 
 
 b) The gen. is sometimes used, where it is not the immediate ob 
 ject of comparison : e. g. in the phrase, icdXX joi' ifiov ^fej, the things 
 compared are not ' /' and ' your singing ;' but ' my singing' and 
 ' yours,' 
 
 166. c) Greater, &c. than ever, than at any other 
 time, is expressed by using avtos, before the gen. ol 
 the reciprocal pronoun. 
 
 167. d. e) Too great, «kc. is expressed by the com- 
 parative with ^ xard ' before a substantive ; ^ coirrs be- 
 fore a verb in the infinitive. 
 
 ^ Ta get hold of, &c is not the part of, &o. 
 
 ' Or )) irpiSf. 
 
Vo COMPARISON. 
 
 168. a) jisi^mv sfiov, taller (greater) than I. 
 
 h) xakXZov ifiov adsig, you sing better (more 
 beautifully) than J (do). 
 
 c) SvvaiazEQOi avi o\ avrmv" iyiyvovto, they 
 
 became more powerful than ever (lite- 
 rally, Tnore powerful themselves than 
 themselves, i. e. than themselves were at 
 any other time). 
 
 d) iisi^m 5 X KT a ddy.gv a n£nov9ivai, to have 
 
 suffered afflictions too great for tears. 
 vsnQog fiEi^atv rj xai' av&Qmnov," a 
 
 corpse of superhuman size. 
 onXa «J.e'oo rj jeara tovg vskquvq, more 
 
 arms than could have been expected 
 
 from the number of the dead {quam pro 
 
 numero). 
 
 e) ve(oi SQO c slaiv tj ojote eldsvai ouov natiqm 
 
 iaiiQTjVTai, they are too young to know 
 what fathers they have lost. 
 
 168*. Vocabulary 28. 
 
 
 Sing, 
 
 aSa." 
 
 Sing better, 
 
 KolXXov aSsiv. 
 
 Powerful, 
 
 dvraiog, jf, oV. 
 
 Tear, 
 
 ddxQVOV, OV, TO. 
 
 Suffer, 
 
 nda^m.f 
 
 Arms, 
 
 ofiXa.'' 
 
 Young, 
 
 viog, a, 6v. 
 
 Deprive, 
 
 atsgsm:' dnoatEqm. 
 
 Dance, 
 
 20QSVCO. 
 
 Master, teacher. 
 
 diBdaxaXog, ov, 6. 
 
 ™ So in superl. ieivdraros cavToS ^o9a 
 
 ° Literally, greater than in proportion to (or accoriing to) man. 
 
 ** aSoi {deiid}) J fut. qno^ai, but aor. paa. 
 
 3* irac^^w, irciaofiatj ntirovOa. ijraOov. 
 
 q Properly, instruments or tools of any kind. 
 
 ' This verb is most common in the pass, form, with fut. mid., in the 
 aense, am deprived of: — trTepatiiai, vTcpfinojiai, inrlfriiiai. luTcffiBnv, &c, 
 — dtrocrtplo) (124, c) is more common than crspta. [crepiaKa is the 
 common form of the pres. act.: arcpoiiai of the pres. pass.] 
 
COMPARISON. 77 
 
 Pupil) na&Tjzijg, ov, o. 
 
 Words Ihat go with comparatives to mark the degree of excess or 
 defect. 
 
 Still, ?„. 
 
 Much, noXl^.' 
 
 Little, a little, 6liy(p. 
 
 The — the Sac^ — zoaoviq) (quanlo " 
 
 tanto). 
 
 Exercise 32. 
 
 169. The boy is taller than his father. The boy is 
 wiser than his master. The daughter sings better than 
 her mother. You have become more powerful than 
 ever (168. c). The Athenians have become more pow- 
 erful than ever. The good judge is suffering afflictions 
 too great for tears (167. d). More arms were taken than , 
 could have been expected from the number of the dead 
 (167. d). He told me, that the corpse was of a super- 
 human size. If I had practised, I should have sung t 
 better than my mother. If you do this, you will be- 
 come more powerful than ever. If they were to do'" 
 this, they would become more powerful than ever. If 
 they had done this, they would have become more pow- 
 erful than ever. He said that, if they did this, they 
 would become more powerful than ever (102). He said 
 that, if they had done this, they would have become 
 more powerful than ever. He is too wise (167. e) to be 
 deceived by his slave. The masters are too wise to be 
 deceived by their pupils. The pupils practise by night, 
 that they may become wiser than their masters. He 
 said that he should have died hutfor^^ the dog. The 
 boys dance better than their masters. Practise virtue, 
 that you may become really wise. They are too young 
 to know that virtue ought^' to be desired. The boy is 
 still taller than his father. The girl is a little taller than 
 
 • Sometimes the ace. is used ; fiya, toXi, &c. 
 
 ' Imperf. because the meaning is, ' T should now te a. better singer. 
 
78 COMPARISON. 
 
 her motner. The daughter sings much better than hei 
 mother. The more they have, the more they desire. 
 
 ■y 30. Comparison continued. 
 
 170. a) Two comparatives are to he translated by 
 tnore—^than, or rather — than, with the positive. 
 
 For adverbs it is often convenient, as in the example, to use a 
 substantive. 
 
 171. b) ms and on (like the lia.tin quam) are used to 
 strengthen superlatives. (So also Snaig, 5, &c.) 
 
 172. d. e) e" rig kou aXlog {si quis alius), and slg avriq 
 {units omnium maxime), have the force of superlatives. 
 
 (ei; ye huhp &v is also used.) 
 
 173./) nsQiTtog {exceeding, over and above), and 
 adjectives in -nXdaiog {-fold), govern the genitive from 
 their comparative meaning. 
 
 174. a) taxvrsga ij aoqicozsQa {Herod.), with 
 more haste than wisdom. 
 
 b) ag raxiaza, as quickly as possible, ciyr^ a g 
 
 avvatov nQoaysisav, they came up as 
 
 silently as possible, ozi fteyiarog, as great 
 
 as possible. 
 c)oaovg ^Svvato nXsiarovg" a-&QOiactg, 
 
 having collected as many men as he 
 
 possibly could. 
 d) nainsQ, t' rig xai ai.Xog, ej^Big nqog ra hri (le- 
 
 Xaivav rijv rgixa, though if any body has 
 
 black hair for his years, it is you {i. e. 
 
 you have remarkably black hair for your 
 
 years). . 
 
 c) tove aymvt^oftsvovg nXttata eig avyg dwdftgros 
 
 mq)elaTv, being able to be of more service 
 
 ■ Or, '5rt Tr\eii7Tovs dOpoiaiis. 
 
COMPARISON. 
 
 79 
 
 to the contending parties, than any othei 
 individual. 
 /) nsQitia zav agxovvroav more than enough (of 
 money, &c.) iio}.i.anXdaioi ^/imv avrmv, 
 many times as numerous as ourselves, 
 
 175. Vocabulary 29. 
 
 Silently, 
 
 To come on, come up, 
 
 As many as, 
 
 Most, 
 
 Feasible, 
 
 Although, 
 
 For your years, 
 
 Hair, 
 
 Collect, 
 
 To be enough or sufficient. 
 
 Many times as many or 
 
 much, 
 Twice as many, 
 Brave, 
 Slow, 
 Slowly, 
 Gift, 
 To give a share of, give 
 
 some, 
 
 aiyy. 
 
 nQog-eiiM. 
 
 oaoi. 
 
 avvcTog, og 6v (fr. avvTtiv, to 
 
 perform). 
 xalnsQ. 
 TiQog ra hij. 
 
 a,&Qoi^(a. 
 
 aquim (fut. iaai). 
 
 noXkanXdaioi. 
 
 SmXdaioi. 
 dvSQEiog, a, ov. 
 ^QaSvg, sicc, v. 
 ^gadswg. 
 dmqov, ov, to. 
 
 fisra-didoifu {gen. o thing ; 
 dat. of person). 
 
 Exercise 33. » 
 
 176. One could not find (86*) a blacker dog than this. 
 They are more wise than brave. If any man practises 
 temperance, it is he. He received more gifts than any 
 
 » 111 doing the exercises of the form : " if any one — it is" (174 d), 
 replace mentally ' it is' by the verb ; " if any man practises temperance, 
 it is he "=if any man practises temperance, he practises temperance, 
 I. e. he, if any other man (does), practises temperance. 
 
 In those of the form " more than any other single person" replace this 
 form by irJ^sTara els oiv^p^ or sU ys &viip ^v. 
 
60 THE DATIVE. 
 
 Other mail. If you had done this, you would have done 
 more bravely * than wisely. I shall collect as many 
 men as possible (174. c). The Persians came on as 
 slowly as possible. He has injured the state more than 
 any other single person. He has collected as many 
 ships as possible. When you have collected^' as many 
 men as possible, march against Cyrus. The just judge 
 has been of more service to the state than any other 
 single person. The army of the Persians comes on as 
 silently as possible (174. b). If you have more than 
 enough, give some to your friends. If they were bold, 
 they would conquer twice as many as themselves. More 
 hares were taken thaji could have been expected from 
 the (small) number ofthedogs?^ One could not find a 
 more beautiful woman than the mother of this Scythian. 
 If any man has been of great service to the state, it is he. 
 
 §31. The Dative. 
 
 177. The notion of the dative is opposed to that of 
 the genitive, as its fundamental notion is that of ap 
 preach to. 
 
 178. The dat. expresses the person to or for whom a 
 thing is done : it also follows words that express union 
 or coming together, and those that express likeness or 
 (a) identity. 
 
 179. b) The instrument (c) the manner, and (d) (he 
 cause, are put in the dative. 
 
 180. e) The definite time at which a thing is done, 
 is put in the dative. 
 
 181. /) The dative sometimes expresses the agent; 
 especially after the perfect pass, aud verbals in zsog, 
 rog. 
 
 182. a) ta air a niayrto a o i, I suffer the same as you. 
 
 " Comparative ting, by rule 56 ; not plur. as in ezaniplc. 
 
THE DATIVE 81 
 
 Qtjasve xara tbv avtcv xQovov 'HQaxi-Bi ysvofie- 
 
 vog, Theseus who lived about the same 
 
 time as Hercules. 
 V) nwiaaaeiv Qd^S<g, to beat with a stick. 
 c) iqojju^ nag^X&ev, he came running (literally,, 
 
 at a running pace). (isydXy aaovd^, in 
 
 great haste. 
 
 d) qpo'^Q), through/ear. xuftveiv voacj), to be suf- 
 
 fering from (or ill of) a disease. dXystv 
 Tin, to be pained at a thing. 
 
 e) t5 rqirri JUtsQce, on the third day. 
 
 f) ravra. XiXsKtai rifuv, these things have been said 
 by us. 
 
 183. Vocabulary 30. 
 
 To live about the same , v , , , , 
 
 time, to be contemporary '<«^" ^"^ «'^"'' Z?"'""' J'*^^'^' 
 ^with. ^^«'- 
 
 Fear, qi6§og, bv, 6. 
 
 Running, a running pace, dgo/iog, ov, 6. 
 
 To be suffering, or ill of a xdfivca (KUfiovnai, KixjAtimt, 
 disease, sxafiov. 
 
 On the next day, tJ vaisQai(f. 
 
 Heavy, severe, §aQvg, ila, v. 
 
 Thales, Qalrig.^ 
 
 Solon, 26Xmv, mvog, 6. 
 
 Why 1 ti; or dia. li; 
 
 Haste, anovSri, rig, sj. 
 
 Hercules, 'HgaxVqg, ' tog {ovg) 6. 
 
 Staff, stick, QK^Sog, ov, ^. 
 
 Verbs that govern the daiive. 
 
 Associate with, keep com- Xytiim 
 
 pany with, " 
 
 Follow, monau* 
 
 ^ GaXflff, G. GaAsw, D. GaXjf, A. GaXiJc. (jirast VT't ^t<^i later.) 
 y Voc 'SpdnXeis. The voc. S> 'HponXcs occurs only in this exclama 
 tion. 
 
 ^ SKOitat, itpniiai. Imperf. EtTrdjirjv, aor. ItTTT^jiiiV. 
 
 4* 
 
82 THE DATIVE, 
 
 Envy, grudge, qi&ore'at » ((p&orog, envy). 
 
 To meet, fall iti with, «Vrt;y;fa'»M. i" 
 
 Blame, fisnqjo/tcu. 
 
 Find fault with, rebuke, intTiftdm. 
 
 Scold, rail at, speak calum- Xoidoqiofiai {lotdoQeco takes 
 
 niously of, the accus.) 
 
 Accuse of, charge with, , 
 
 blame, *?'''«^*'"- 
 
 Plot against, snt^ovlsvai. 
 
 Fight with, ftdxofiai. 
 
 Contend or dispute with, egltco. 
 
 Contention, strife, egig, i8og, rj {ace. tpida el 
 
 IQtv). 
 
 Am angry with, ogyiCofitti. 
 
 Am in a passion o?' rage, xaXsizaivio. 
 Like, ojioiog, a, or. 
 
 Osa. Verbs of -eproaching, &c. take ace. of the thing (as well as 
 dat. of person), especially when it is a neut. pronoun. {iyKaXsTi; &c. 
 
 Exercise 34. 
 
 184. Do not associate with the bad (72. a). If you 
 associate (67. 2) with the bad,^' you will become bad 
 yourself. The boys are following the dog. Most men 
 follow their neighbours. I envy you your wisdom 
 (note a). Do not envy your neighbour. Do not envy 
 me. If you had struck" the judge with a stick, you 
 would not have got off with impunity. ^^ They set out 
 the next day. What do you charge me with (183. 
 Obs.) 1 I asked whether (72. c) they were suffering the 
 same as the geometer. If you had plotted against the 
 general, you would not have come off with impunity. 
 He will not fight with the king (these) ten days (161). 
 I knew that he had suffered the same as I (had). I 
 
 " ^9oi/lu takes gen. of the object that excites the envy, or of the thing 
 gradged. (See 149. /). 
 
 ^ Twy;^ai/&>, rrffo/tai, r£r<);^i;<f(i, ?ru;^ov. With a gen. tO obtam^j re* 
 cave (rrana from, VritU gen.) ; also, to hit (a mark — racuriis). 
 
THE DATIVE. 83 
 
 plotted against the king from envy. Do not contend 
 with your parents. I suffer similar" treatment' to you. 
 I should blame the citizens, if they had done this. He 
 scolds, not only^' the others, but also the judge himself. 
 I should have scolded the boy, if he had done this. 
 Why are you in a passion with your slave? I haVe 
 not met you (these) two days. I am angry with those 
 who transact the affairs of the state. O Hercules ! 
 what in the world'^ am I to do (99. c)? Through fear 
 he did not hit the mark. 
 
 Exercise 35. 
 
 185. Do you wish, then (99. a), that I should strike 
 him with this stick ? He told me that his father was 
 suffering from a severe disease. Thales was contempo- 
 rary with Solon. I admire the wisdom of Thales. 
 Hercules lived about the same time as Theseus. If any 
 one was brave, it was Hercules." O father, do not scold 
 your son. If you had kept company with the bad, you 
 would have become bad your yourself. I asked the boy 
 whether we ought to envy^' our neighbours. The dam- 
 sel has very beautiful eyes." Let us aim at speaking '< 
 well of all the good. Let us abstain from acting inso- 
 lently. All, and you among the first, ^* admire these 
 things. Let ug be contented with our present condition. 
 He said that, if Xenoclides had been wise, he would 
 not have plotted against the general. He told me that 
 he wished to give his slaves a taste of liberty (149. c). 
 Let us keep company with sensible persons. Let us obey 
 the laws of the state. I should like to hear'^ the boy sing 
 {part.) Do not associate with those who' pursue what 
 is disgraceful." Why do you charge me with injus- 
 tice ?'5 Through fear he missed the mark. I admire 
 both* your horses and those' of your friend. The rest 
 
 ° Lihe things. * H following the article. 
 
B4 MIDDLE VOICE. 
 
 of the country^' has been laid waste by the Greeks. He 
 told me that we ought to persuade the judge (120. c). 
 
 § 32. Middle Voice. 
 
 The middle voice denotes : 
 
 1) That the agent does the action upon him- 
 
 self; or 
 
 2) That the agent does the action for his own 
 
 advantage ; or 
 
 3) That the agent gets the action done for his 
 
 own advantage. 
 
 The strict reflexive meaning is found but in very few verbs ; prin- 
 cipally those that describe some simple action doru to our own per 
 sons; as as to clot/ie, crown, &c. The reflexive sense is often equiv- 
 alent to a new simple meaning ; which may be either transitive oi 
 intransilive. 
 
 187. The tenses that have the middle meaning, when 
 the verb has it at all, are 
 
 1) Pres. and imperf. } ^e^u • ^ 
 
 2) Perf and Pluperf. \ °^*^ passive form. 
 
 3) Futures and aorists mid. 
 And in some verbs 
 
 4) The aor. 1. pass. i. e. of the passive form. 
 
 188. Vocabulary 31. 
 
 To wash, Xovsiv. M. wash myself, bathe, » 
 
 Xovea&m. 
 Strangle, a.ndyy[Eiv, andyto-i- M. to strangle {^or hang) 
 
 myself, and'j/^sa&ai. 
 
 a) With new inlransitive meaning. 
 
 To send, areXXsir. M. (to send one's self) to 
 
 journey, azeXlsaOat.' 
 
 ^ It may have an accua. of a part of one's own person. 
 ' criWcirOat, to clothe oneself, and to send for, lius anr, artAwOai ' 
 rriXXeaBai^ to travel, trraXQvai. 
 
MIDDLE VOICE. 85 
 
 To make to cease, naveiv. M. (to maKe myself cease,) 
 
 to stop, cease, leave off, 
 jtavsa&tti. 
 
 i) With new iransUive meaning. 
 To put a man over (a river), M. to cross (a river, ace.) 
 
 nsQMOvp (rtvtt). nsqaiova9ai. 
 
 To pluck, TilXsiv. M. to mourn for (ace.) i. e, 
 
 by tearing one's hair, iik- 
 }.ea&at. 
 
 (2.) 
 
 To make a man one's ally 1 
 (to form an alliance with 1 
 
 a person), i. e. for one's | ai/xftaxop 7ZoisTa9ttl tivn. 
 own advantage, J 
 
 To place guards (over one's ) 
 own property; for one's > Karaorrjoaodai^ qivXuxag. 
 own protection,) ) 
 
 To lift or take a thing up, M."to take up for one's ad- 
 aigeir ti. vantage, i. e. to keep for 
 
 one's self, aiQta&ai, 
 To find, ivQiaxEiv. M. find for myself, procure, 
 
 get, EvqwMa&ai. 
 To provide, tiuQaaxevd^eiv, M. to provide (for one's own 
 
 use), jiaqaaxsvd^sa&at. 
 
 (3.) 
 
 I cause a table to be set be- / /„ , y 
 
 fore me ( '^«e'>'''"^«f"^« iqaneQav. 
 
 To let out for hire, ixia&om. M. cause to be let to myself, 
 
 i. e. to hire, /iia&ova&ai. 
 To teach, 8iddaxeiv. M. to get or have taught, 
 
 dtddaasa&at. 
 To weep for, xarctxlaUiv. M. to weep for (one's own 
 
 misfortunes, ace.) xator 
 
 xkaiio&ai. 
 
66 
 
 MIDDLE VOICE. 
 
 imSsdsi'^liSfoe ti]v novtiQMV 
 
 Having shown his own 
 wickedness. 
 
 To enact laws (of an abso- 
 lute prince who does not Gslnai vofiovg- 
 make them /or himself), 
 
 To enact laws (of the legis- 
 lator of a. free state, who 
 makes them for himself &eaOai fofiovt;. 
 as well as for his fellow- 
 citizens),'' 
 
 Obs. In general any remote reference of the action to sdf is en 
 pressed by the middle. 
 
 Wicked, 
 
 To weigh anchor, 
 
 To commence or engage in 
 
 a war against, 
 Sail-away, 
 
 novtjQog, a, op. 
 
 cuQEiv {aynvQuv, understood). 
 ttQua&ai noXeftov tiqo^, &C. 
 {ace.) 
 
 Exercise 36. 
 
 189. Solon enacted laws for the Athenians, Wash 
 yourselves, O boys. The son of Xenoclides hung him- 
 self Allof them washed their hands and their feet. Hire 
 your neighbour's eyes. I will let you my house. I will 
 take into my pay (hire) as many Hoplites as possible." 
 The mother wept for her sufferings. I provided i- myself 
 long ago with this stick. O daughters, mourn for your 
 mother. The citizens, fearing, placed guards. O ye 
 rich, cease to act insolently (partic. 238). The soldiers 
 crossed over the river. Let us form an alliance with 
 the Athenians. If we had been wise, we should have 
 formed an alliance with the Athenians. What kind-of 
 
 '' This difference is not, however, strictly observed. (B.) 
 
 ^ ttXecj, 7rXsu(ro/iaf and TrXEvcovjiaij — svKevua, Pass. TTETrXeviTjtatf tTrXe^trOnv 
 
 ^ Perfect, as I still keep it. 
 
MIDDLE VOICE. 87 
 
 'aws has the king of the Persians enacted ? The boy 
 has shown his wicked disposition. If you do this, you 
 will get something good. The Athenians engaged in a 
 war with the Persians. The Athenians having weigh- 
 ed anchor, sailed away. He told me that we dught to 
 obey the laws of the state (120. c). If the Athenians had 
 been wise, they would have enacted laws. The Athe- 
 nians crossed the river and attacked the Persians. 
 
 <5i 33. Middle Voice continuea. 
 
 190. Vocabulary 32. 
 
 1) To take,' a\()Hv. M. choose (followed by av 
 
 ii with gen,), aigeiaOai. 
 To take, receive, Xa^eiv. M. take hold of, Xd^sa&ai- 
 
 2) Verbs whose Mid. Voice seems to have a redprocal vieaning. 
 
 To consult, ^ovlsvEiv. M. to consult together, de- 
 
 liberate: but also (with 
 regular mid. significa- 
 tion) to counsel myself, 
 adopt a resolution. (In 
 the sense of deliberate it 
 is followed by tkqi with 
 gen.), §ovi.svea&at. 
 
 To reconcile (others), diet- M. to be reconciled to each 
 Xvsiv)."' other {fiQoe with ace), 
 
 diaXvsa&ai. 
 
 3) Middle forms of which there is no active and which must there- 
 fore be considered simply as deponents. 
 
 I receive, dsxonai. 
 
 I perceive, am informed of,° aia^dvojiai. 
 
 *" \iUf yUffaf &C. — "XfX^iiatr'eXvOtjv, 
 
88 MIDDLE VOIC£. 
 
 4) Aorists passive with mid. meaning. 
 
 Laid myself down : laid ,j„ , 
 
 down, ««T£XA*^,*.' 
 
 Took myself off, drnilldyi^v. 
 
 So, insgaim&tjv iqio^rj&tjv, ixotfi^&ijv, ^inrjO-^p, 
 (from nsQaiova&ai, (po§tia&M, KOi(i&a&ai, daxiiabaCj, 
 
 5) Some first futures of mid. form have a pass, meaning. 
 m^psXyaoiJiai, oixoXoy^aofxai, qivXd^oitai, &Qsipoiiat, 
 
 from (aq>sXt(o, oftoloydm, (pvXdzrm, rQs'cpm. 
 (aid, help,) (confess,) (guard,) (nourish.) 
 
 6) To be on one's guard, 
 
 to guard against, (with ^jvldttsaOM {mid.) 
 ace. of thing or person), 
 
 7) By (agent after pass, vno (with gen.) : also naga 
 verb), et nqog. 
 
 Exercise 37. 
 
 191. They will choose to obey rather than p to fight. 
 I would choose liberty before wealth. Xenoclides was 
 chosen general with three others. The multitude often 
 choose ill. He took hold of his hair (plur.) Let us 
 consult about the state. To deliberate quickly is a 
 different thing {differs) from deliberating" wisely. Let 
 us consult together what we ought to do." They con- 
 sulted together what they should do with (137. b) the 
 unjust judge. I exercised-myself-in (190. 4^ that art 
 Go to sleep. Having said this, he took himself off. 
 The boy, having shown (188. 3) much virtue and tem- 
 perance, died. O boys, receive this. I have received 
 this. The city will receive many times as much (174. 
 /) as this (plur.) O siaves, receive some<* of the wine. 
 The physician being informed of what had happened, 
 came in great haste. I crossed over the river in great 
 haste. If you do this, you will be greatly benefited 
 
 " ram-iXfiiu. r fidXXov ?. 
 
ON THE PERFECT 2. 89 
 
 I will guard against this danger. Having a pain in 
 both my ears, I lay down. This will be confessed by 
 all. This will be confessed, willingly at least," by 
 none. The army shall be maintained from the king's 
 country. I am glad that« the children are well brought 
 up. The city shall be well guarded by the citizens. I 
 feared the very men {those themselves) who' guarded 
 the city. 
 
 § 34. On the Perfect 2. 
 
 192. The Per/. 2. (improperly called the Per/, mid.) 
 prefers the intransitive signification, but never has 
 the pure reflexive meaning of the middle. 
 
 1) If the verb has both the trans, and intrana. meaning, the per/. 
 1. has the former; theperf. 2. the latter. 2) If the intrans. mean 
 ing has gone over to the mid., or to the pass, (as often happens^ 
 the perf. 2. belongs in meaning to that voice. 3) If the verb is in 
 trans., the perf. 2. has the same relation to it that any other perf 
 has to its verb. 
 
 .93. Vocabulary 33. 
 
 Perf. 1. Perf. 2. 
 
 Open, avoiytOf'^ avicpftt, stand open, micQfa.. 
 Arouse, iyslQca, iy^ysgxa, am awake, iyQ'^yoQu. 
 Persuade, nsiQto, nmeixa, am confident, trust, have 
 
 confidence, ninoi&a. 
 Break, ayvvfii,' am broken, ISya. 
 
 Destroy, oXXvfii,' dXmXsxa, am undone, (perii), oXmXa. 
 Fix. n^yvvfu,^ am fixed, am congealedj 
 
 &c. tisaijya. 
 Obs. dir6\\viu, KaTayvvfii, more common than the simple verbs. 
 
 <i This verb prefixes the temporal to the syllabic augment — ivkfyov 
 ivla^a, inf. dvot^ai. dvlaya belongs to later Greek writers: aviayfia 
 WJB used by the older authors. 
 
 ' Sym/ii, Sfa, oar. ?ofa, ciynti (o). 
 
 ' iXXv/ii, JXu, jXuXeica. uKcaa. SMjuii, SKiHuai, ^XuXu. CA6ii<\v, 
 
 * ifiyvvfLi, irijfu, &c. — nrtmjyn, Imyni (a). 
 
90 ON THE PERFECT 2. 
 
 Pot, pitcher, p^e«j «?> V- 
 
 One more, en sJs. 
 
 Gate, hvXtj, tig, ^. 
 
 Spear, 86qv, " dogaTos, to. 
 
 Breast, azegvov, ov, 16. 
 
 To watch over, iyQiJYOQsvcu nsgi (witli gen.) 
 
 To raise a war, i'^slgsiv nolenov (in pasa, 
 
 arise). 
 
 Safety, aaydlsia, ag, ^. 
 
 Roman, 'Pm/Jiaiog, ov, 6. 
 
 Jupiter, Zsvg, ^i6g, b (voc. Zsv). 
 
 Early in the morning, ngm. 
 
 Exercise 38. 
 
 194. The pitcher is broken. If we conquer the 
 Romans in one more battle," we are undone. The 
 spear was fixed in his breast. All the water'" is congeal- 
 ed. I broke the boy's head. The boy's head is broken. 
 I have watched over your safety for many years. Hav- 
 ing lost" all his property, he took himself off. The 
 gates are open. The servants opened the gates early, as 
 their custom was. Brave men have confidence in them- 
 selves. Then only (91. c), when they obey the laws, 
 will the citizens be prosperous. If we do not bear what 
 comes from the gods,^ we are undone. Who in the 
 worl(P^ has broken this pitcher? It is the part^^ of a 
 general to watch over the safety of his army. O Jupi- 
 ter, the folly of the man !"• If a war should arise {be 
 raised), we are undone. If you break one pitcher more, 
 O worst of slaves, you shall not come off with im- 
 punity. ^^ My property was plundered, wretched man 
 that I ami*' If any man is in the habit of performing 
 just (actions), it was he." I have not met either my 
 friend or my brother's.' 
 
 " idpv,S6pttTas,&c. — Voet. topit, lopi : of which ji>(>i is found in Attie 
 prose, in the phrase iopl i\slv. 
 
MOODS AND TENSES. 91 
 
 5 35. Additional Remarks on some of the Moods and 
 Tenses. 
 
 195. a) The fut. 3. (or future perfect) expresses a 
 future action continuing in its effects. 
 
 196. The fut. 3. differs, therefore, from the Latin 
 futurum exactum, in not being used to express merely 
 the future completion of a m,omentary action. 
 
 197. b) 'Vhefut. 3. is, however, sometimes used to 
 express 1) the speedy completion of an action, or 2) the 
 certainty of its completion in the most positive manner. 
 
 198. The fut. 3. is obviously the natural future of 
 those perfects, that, from their marking a continued 
 state, are equivalent to a present with a new meaning : 
 e. §•. niiivriiittt, xixTijfiai. 
 
 199. Some verbs have the fut. 3. as a simple future : ' 
 e. g: SsS^aonai,^ nsnavaoiiai, xBttoijiOfiai. 
 
 200. c) In the active voice a continued future state, 
 or s. future action continuing in its effects, is expressed 
 by «(;o/*a{ with perf. participle; a circumlocution which 
 is also used in the passive (as in the example 205. c.) 
 
 201. d. e) The perf. has also a subjunctive and op- 
 tative, and the future an optative, which are used when- 
 ever that kind of imcertainty or contingency peculiar to 
 those moods agrees with the time of these tenses. 
 
 Only, however, when particular distinctnesa is required ; and 
 even then, the perf. ■part, with tXtiv or S> is generally preferred to the 
 regular opt. and mbj. of that tense. 
 
 202. The imperat. perfect is principally used in 
 those verbs whose perfects have the meaning of a pres- 
 ent : niiivriao, (fee. 
 
 203. /) The third person of the imperat. perf. pass. 
 marks a decided resolution : it is a strong expression for 
 let it be done, &,c. 
 
 204. Obs. st&s with the optative— and also the opta- 
 
 " From lia to bind. 
 
9^ MOODS AND TENSES. 
 
 live alone » — expresses a wish. If the wish expressed 
 has not been (and now cannot be) realized, uOs is used 
 with indie, oiaorist or imperf., according as the time to 
 which the wish refers is past, or present. So atfikov 
 (sff, «) alone, or with u&s, el ya'^ or mg, and followed by 
 the infinitive. 
 
 205. a) Tj noXiteia Tskiiag xexoa/Ai^astai, iav 6 roiov- 
 Tog avTijv imaxon^ cpvla^, the constitution 
 will have been perfectly arranged, if sxich 
 a guardian superintends it. 
 
 b) qjQoi^s xal nenQcc^ezai, speak and it shall 
 
 {immediately) be done. 
 
 c) la deorza iao/is&a syvrnxoisg,^ xou 'koytDt 
 
 ftataiiav uTtijlXaynsvoi, we shall have voted 
 on the subject as we ought, and be freed 
 from empty speeches. 
 
 d) el'&s 6 vlbg rsvix'^xoi, would that my son 
 
 had conquered ! 
 
 e) eJmv on ^ | o /. ^/tegci TQiTfj, he said that he 
 
 should come on the third day. 
 f) iTstteiQcca&aj, let it be attempted. 
 
 206. Vocabulary 34. 
 
 Constitution, noXitda, ag, rj. 
 
 Arrange, adorn, xoff/tfiw. 
 
 Superintend, overlook, imaxonsm. 
 
 What we ought, t« Ssovra. 
 
 Empty, vain, useless ftdtaiog, a, or. 
 
 I am come, ^xoo • (with perf. meaning). 
 
 I am gone, am off, oi^ofiai * {perf. meaning.) 
 
 Endeavour, izsiQcio/iat. 
 
 * As in u rrai, ytvoio jrarpds ei/rv^itrrefios. See also 298. e. 
 
 y yiyvuuxciv interdum de plebiscitia vel populi juasia. (Bremi ad 
 Demosth. FhU. I. 54.) 
 
 » ii/(6), 5«ov, Sfo) ; no other tenses in use. ffiov r! fimw, to have ar- 
 rived at an advanced age (Herod.): a construction Rcldom found in 
 Attio Greels. 
 
MOODS AND TENSES. 93 
 
 Would that . . . . ! e'&s, ei&' mcpeXov " si yoiQ 
 
 acpslov, mg acpsXov, or tScpe- 
 Xov alone). 
 To make to disappear, aqiavi^m. 
 
 If it is agreeable to you, if j, „ , , > , 
 you art willing, h coi ^ovloi^evm sau. 
 
 And that too, x«( ravja. 
 
 For the present at least, f d ye vvv ehai. 
 
 As far as they are concern- , , » ' _ 7 
 J ^ to ini rovtoig sivai. 
 
 Exercise 39. 
 
 207. For thus we shall have done (205. c) wh^t we 
 ought. For thus what we ought (to do) will have been 
 done (205. 6). I will remember my former^^ folly. He 
 told me that they had forgotten their former virtue (205. 
 c). Let us place the wise and good as guardians of this 
 most beautiful constitution, jff' it is agreeable to you, 
 these things shall {instantly) be done. Let these things 
 be done (205./). Do not attempt to deceive the gods. 
 If you do this, I am off. The physician told me, that 
 he would come on the fourth day. If you obey God, 
 your soul will be adorned with all virtues. Would that 
 the wise superintended the state ! Would that the 
 prudent managed the affairs of the state ! Would that 
 the wise judge had superintended the whole constitu- 
 tion ! Would that Thales were alive ! Would thai 
 the man had escaped death ! If you obey the physician, 
 you will be freed from your disease. Would that the 
 Greeks had conquered ! They condemned him to death 
 (156, note g. obs.) and that too though he %oas (say : 
 ' being') your citizen. For the present at least, we will 
 use him. I don't know what in the world^' we are,^^ 
 for the present at least, to do" with him. As far as 
 
 '' i(pc!\a (debeo), owe, ought. iipeiXf/am. Am. &i^t\ov (un-Atttc Sft- 
 \ot) used only in wishes, as afeXe (jv Suxparij; (h<nB Socrates ought tt 
 te alive), would that Socrates were alive ! cWc kXIos c\a0cs. 
 
 ' Xi>r](rTlos is the verbal adj. from xP^"!""- 
 
94 ON THE INFINITIVE. 
 
 that (person) is concerned, I am undone. For the pres- 
 ent, at least, let us desist from the chase O boy, may 
 you become wuser ! 
 
 § 36. On the Infinitive. 
 
 208. The use of the Greek infinitive is much nearei 
 to that of the English than that of the Latin is ; thus : — 
 
 209. b. c) It expresses the purpose, and (6. d) is often 
 used in the active, after both verbs and adjectives, where 
 the passive would be admissible, but less common. 
 
 Hence it must often be translated into Latin by the parliciple ii: 
 dus, or by the supine in u. 
 
 210. The particle aars ^ expresses a consequence, and 
 is used with the infinitive ; or, if the consequence be a 
 definite consequence that has actually occurred, the in- 
 dicative. 
 
 211. k So — as to = uats with infinitive always. 
 
 ( So — that = cocTM with infinitive or indicative. 
 
 With the infinitive the consequence is more closely connected 
 with the principal clause, as contemplated or resulting immediately 
 and naturally from what is there stated. The consequence may 
 be equally real. 
 
 212. ' So that' should not be translated by the indic- 
 ative, except where the sense would allow us to substi- 
 tute therefore or consequently/ {itaque) for so that. 
 Thus : " the road was so bad that I did not reach my 
 inn till midnight" = " the road was very bad ; conse- 
 quently I did not reach my itm till midnight :" here the 
 indicative would be properly used, wars properly an 
 swers to ovttog, or some other demonstrative, in the pre- 
 ceding clause. 
 
 214. a) 6 av&Q<onog aeqjvxs qiiXstr, it is the nature of 
 man to love. 
 
 "> More rarely wt. 
 
ON THE INFINITIVE- 95 
 
 i) wage^w ijxaviov tQiotav, I offer myself to be 
 questioned. 
 
 c) ^l&ov IBs IV as, I came (or am come) to see 
 
 you. 
 
 d) ^Svs outovsm, sweet to hear, deivog Xiysiv, 
 
 clever at speaking. laXsnos Xa^sTv, hard to 
 
 take (or catch), 
 c) ovTcag avoTjiog ianv, aais noXsiiov avz slgijvtfg 
 
 aiQEia&aijheis so senseless as to choose 
 
 war in preference to peace. 
 ovTctjg avoi^Tog iativ, wtrrs noksiiov avi slg^rrig 
 
 aiQsTrai, hie is so senseless, that he {actually) 
 
 chooses war in preference to peace, 
 f) qnXoTi/ioTUTog ^v, mats navra vTiofisivai rov 
 
 inaiPEia&ai srexa, he was very ambitious, so 
 
 as to bear any thing for the sake of being 
 
 praised. 
 
 214. Vocabulary 35. 
 
 To put forth naturally, (fv<a {nsqivita et sqivv are in- 
 
 trans.; I am produced 
 =1 am by nature, or it is 
 my nature to, &c. 
 
 Supply, afford, offer, auQexm.' 
 
 Sweet, pleasant, agreeable, rjdvg, sia, v. 
 
 Terrible, clever, Sstvdg,' i\, 6v. 
 
 Hard, difficult, jralewos, jJ, 6v. 
 
 Senseless, anoijzog, eg, or. 
 
 In preference to, instead of, dvzi. 
 
 Peace, slg^vti, tjg, ^. 
 
 Ambitious, fond of honour, qpiiort^MO?, og, or. 
 
 Undergo, bear, mo-ftevm. 
 
 On account of, for the sake „ /--^^ \ 
 f srsxa [gen.) 
 
 Leaf, (fvXlov, ov, to. 
 
 iTapl^e<!9ai, mid. ia also used for to afford, without any perceptihli 
 difference of meaning. (See example in 298. 6.) 
 
 f — vos, an old pass, termin. (like rem, rfs), whence jEuiit terrible 
 myiis Itateful, &c, (B.) 
 
96 ON THE INFINITIVE 
 
 Bring up, educate, naiSsvo}. 
 
 Very, nam.^ 
 
 Wing, nrsqov, ov, i o; nzegv^, vyog, ij 
 
 Young bird, veoaaos, ov, 6. 
 
 Art, also, contrivance, tsx*"1> VSt n- 
 
 trick, 
 
 Long, fianQog, a, or. 
 
 Not yet, ovTzto.^ 
 
 Endure, bear, avixofiaO 
 
 To get teeth, feathers, &c., (pita. 
 
 To give one trouble, to mo- novov or nqdfuaxa naqtjsiv 
 
 lest, harass, <fcc., 
 
 Exercise 40. 
 
 215. It is the nature of man (213. a) to love those 
 who confer benefits upon him. The city is a diflccult 
 one to take. The woman is a terrible one to find out 
 contrivances. The man is unable to hold his tongue. 
 He told me that his daughter had been well brought up. 
 If you give me any trouble, I will not endure it, at least 
 (not) willingly.*' The eagle has long wings. '« He had 
 been so brought up as very easily to have enough. He 
 is so beautiful as to be admired by all. . You are so 
 senseless, that you are always hoping for what is im- 
 possible." They are too wise'" to choose war in prefer- 
 ence to peace. The young birds have already got ^ 
 feathers. The trees are already putting forth their 
 leaves. The child has not yet got (any) teeth. If you 
 molest me, you shall not come off with impunity.'' They 
 harassed them so, that the army was not able {indie.) 
 
 is This word is often strengthened by the addition of tl {itilw n)- 
 
 •> iro), TTOTort, ever yet, ever up to this time. The former is joined 
 ti> oi, f!t i the latter to oiil, firiii ; and both relate to the past. Oiilmrc, 
 milTroTc, are commonly employed only generally, or with reference to 
 the future. (See 238*, note on examp. 6.) 
 
 ■ This verb has a double augment : imperf. ^mx^fi'i '""r- ^vccxifi". 
 
 •■ Aor. 1., OB per/., has a diiTerent meaning. 
 
ON THE INFINITIVE. 97 
 
 £o ailvaiice.' This wine is pleasant to drink. It is the 
 naiure ot boys to pursue what is pleasant. 
 
 "§>37. The Infinitive continued. 
 
 215. a) The infinitive with the article in the gen. 
 sometimes denotes a motive ojr purpose. 
 
 It may be considered ss governed by tuma understood. 
 
 217'. h) "When the infinitive has a subject of its own, 
 the general rule is, that it stands in the accusative. 
 
 Thia rule holds good, when the infln. is used with r6, (as in 
 221. c). ' 
 
 218. b) A preposition with the infin. may be equiva- 
 lent to a sentence introduced by a conjunction. 
 
 219. d) But when the subject of the infinitive be- 
 longs to and is expressed with the former verb, it is 
 generally not expressed with the infinitive. 
 
 The examples in 221, show that this rule holds good, whether the 
 subject of the injin. be the subject of the preceding verb or an 
 obhqne case governed by it. — In the second example the accusative 
 would 1)6 expressed even in Latin ! dixit sefeshnare. 
 
 220. e) When the subject of the infinitive is omittcl 
 because expressed with the other verb, an adjective or 
 substantive that forms the predicate with the infin. is 
 mostly put in the same case that the subject of the in- 
 finitive stands in in the other clause. 
 
 Thus (in 221. e) vlSs conforms to *A\i^avSpos* ds^s to lyu • irpoOviiov 
 to airav, &c. — This construction is called Atiractum, 
 
 221. a) itsi^la&J] ds aai 'Aralavrrj, tov (iri 7.r^axa.g x«- 
 
 KovQysT'v rijv Ev^oiav, and Atalanta also 
 
 was fortified, that robbers (or pirates) 
 
 might not commit depredations in EtibcRa. 
 
 b) oldsv STzqdx&i] Sia 70 sxEivov fii] naquvai, 
 
93 ON THE INFINITIVE. 
 
 nothing -upas done, because he was not 
 present. 
 
 c) oix oqQag i^jfti to x«xc3s naa^ovt a aftv- 
 
 i>sa& ai avTidgmna xaxms, it is not right 
 for one who suflfers wrong to avenge him- 
 self by doing wrong in return. 
 
 d) Ssonal aov nccQa/iEvsiv, I beseech (or entreat) 
 
 you to stay with us. squj a^iovdd^siv, he 
 said that he was in a hurry, avvstnuv 
 bfioXoya, I confess that I assented. 
 
 e) 6 'u4Xe^avdQoe ecpaaitsv sJvai /fibg vlog, Alex- 
 
 ander used to say that he was the son of 
 Jupiter, 
 snstaa avioiie sTvai &s6 g, I persuaded them 
 
 that I was a god. 
 tdeovTo avT ov elvai tiqo&v iiov, they en- 
 treated him to be zealous, 
 f'leffzt fi 1 fEvia&ai £vdai[iovi,l may (if I 
 please) become happy. 
 222. Vocabulary 36. 
 To wall, fortify, tbixi^co. 
 
 A wall, reixog, sog (ovg) to. 
 
 Evil-doer, rascal, villain, xaxovgyog (xaxog et iQyov). 
 Villainy, xuxovqpa, ag, rj. 
 
 Misdeed, xaxovQytjfia, aTog, to. 
 
 To do evil towards, do 
 harm to, to inflict dam vaitovgysco. 
 age on, ifcc. 
 To ward oif, Aftvveiv ri tin (also with 
 
 dat. only, aftvvBiv Tin, to 
 defend. In Mid. ward 
 off from myself; repel, 
 requite, revenge myself 
 on, with ace. of person ; 
 also without case, topro- 
 tect oneself. 
 To return a man like for . , , , , 
 ijjjg_ Toig ofioioig ufjivrea&iM, 
 
 To remam witn, noQaidvto 
 
ON THE INFINITIVE. 
 
 99 
 
 Say, 
 
 To feel or be thankful for, 
 
 return thanks for, 
 One may, 
 One might, 
 It is right, 
 Master, ^ 
 Laugh, 
 
 qxiay.m {— give out "with 
 a slight intimation that 
 the thing is not exactly 
 so." V'dmel.) 
 
 loLQiv siSsvai{gen. of thing) 
 
 slsati {licet). 
 
 LQ&Wg ifil. 
 
 deanoTtis, ov, 6. 
 fsXao) (with fut. mid. -dao- 
 fiai). 
 
 Exercise 41. 
 
 223. The city was fortified, that no one ^ might do 
 injury to the citizens. Nothing was done, because 
 (221. b) that villain gave us trouble. Let us beseech our 
 friends to be zealous. He said that he would be with us, 
 if it was agreeable to us.^' I persuaded them that I 
 was a philosopher (221. c). I persuaded the judges 
 that Abrocomas was a rascal. It is a hard thing (65) to 
 conquer one's temper. He is too young'" to have mas- 
 tered his temper. If you ward off from me this danger, I 
 shall feel thankful to you for your zeal. I will revenge 
 myself on him who has injured you. If you return like 
 for like to him who has treated you ill, you commit a 
 sin. You used to say (221, e)ithat you were master. 
 We ought to defend the laws of the state. It is in our 
 power**? to become happy. You may (if you please) be- 
 come a philosopher. Ho says that he will deliberate. 
 Nothing was done^ because {prep.) all the citizens envy 
 the judge. He says that he will brave this danger. It 
 IS not right, that a citizen should plot against the con- 
 stitution. If all the citizens defend the laws, it will be 
 well. 
 
 jiiiSsis, as a purpose' is exprcBsed. 
 
100 ON THE INflNITIPE. 
 
 224. Vocabulary 37. 
 
 Preposition ix. 
 Before a vowel ix becomes «| • it governs the s^oi. and 
 means in general, out of, forth from. Hence, of 
 cause=in consequence of ; from, for : also, of smc- 
 cession of time. 
 
 Out of the city, Ix jtjg noXeais. 
 
 For this cause or reason. ix ruvi^g ri^s aUiag. 
 
 This being the case, for , 
 
 this reason, therefore. *" ^'""■'"'• 
 
 After our former tears, ex imv ngoaGsv daxgimv. 
 
 Unexpectedly, f| unQoadox'ijTov {angoadox)] 
 
 roe, tmexpected). 
 
 Exercise 4'2. 
 
 225. We are now laughing after our former tears. 
 The men from (out of) the city are plotting against the 
 king. He says that he is watching over the safety of all. 
 The Grecian cavalry, unexpectedly charging the ranks 
 of the Persians, conquer (them). It is sweet to laugh 
 after troubles. The physician says that diseases are 
 from Jupiter. This being the case, it seemed good to the 
 generals to depart. The slave says that the pitcher is 
 broken. He says that he is glad' the citizens are rich. 
 He says that he takes pleasure in sleeping. He said 
 that the judge had an upper chamber, whenever he stay- 
 ed in town. This being so, let every man provide for 
 his own safety. I asked him how much he thought the 
 geometer's possessions would fetch," if sold. I wonder 
 at what has been done' by the general. It is not every 
 man,'" that can bear unexpected (evils). This man has 
 inflicted more damage upon the city than any other 
 single person.'* Would that the physician had remain- 
 id with (us)! Would that the physician were here! 
 Would that the physician had been here ! 
 
ON THE INFINITIViS. 101 
 
 § 38. The Infinitive continued. 
 
 226. Attraction may take place (that is, the predi' 
 cate substantive or adjective be in the nominative), 
 when the infinitive is introduced by the article or aats. 
 
 227. a) nqos to avpufi^ov iQaai, Siot, to qiiXavroi ilvcu, 
 
 they make self-interest the object of their 
 lives, because they are lovers of themselves. 
 
 b) ixnsiJiTiovTai im t^" 01*0101 loXg Xnuofuvoig elvai, 
 
 they are sent out, on the understanding 
 that they are to be equal {on an equal foot- 
 ing with those that are left behind. 
 
 c) ovdelg T}]).iicovTog sarco rrttQ vfAiv mars, rovg v6n- 
 
 ovg na^a^ag, [iri Sovvcu dcitijv, let no one be 
 so powerful amongst you, as not to be 
 ' punished if he transgresses the laws. 
 
 228. Vocabulary 38. 
 
 It is expedien t or profitable, av/icpsQei (dat,) 
 
 Expediency, utility, ro av/itpsgov: (TaavfiqjSQOvra, 
 
 what is expedient.) 
 To make self-interest the » , , ».. 
 
 objectof one's life, "^"^ ^° av,icf^or ??,»-. 
 Self loving, a lover of self, ,, 
 
 selfish, ^davzog,og,ov^ 
 
 Self-love, selfishness, ^ikavtia, ag, rj. 
 
 Transgress, nuQa^aivm" (of a law, (fee, 
 
 to break). 
 
 So great, so powerful, rriUxovtpg,-avtri,-ovxo. 
 
 To be punished, suffer pun- dUriv SiSovai [gen. of thing, 
 
 ishmeiit, dat. of person by whom). 
 Infinitely, many, very ma 
 
 ny, a vast number of, '*"?""' "'' «• 
 
 " HTi' with dat. often marks a condition. 288. 
 
 " ffaiua, PtinDjiai, 0l0ma, Wriii. 0fiaa> and ifftim, bans. (^/Jiji, /?ijfli, 
 Bdiiv, 0s Pfivaii pas.) — Topaffaipa has also perf. pass. mpttfiiPajtai, aOT 
 ramSiBivi. 
 
i02 ON THE INFINITIVE. 
 
 Ten thousand, ixvqIoi. 
 
 Soldier, argaTioitijg, ov, 6. 
 
 Country, naiQi's,^ tdog, 17. 
 
 Treaty, anovdal, wv (properly "li 
 
 bations"). 
 
 Excessively, ayav. 
 
 Excessive, 6 uyav. 
 
 Preposition, ivzi. 
 
 Governs genitive : signification, instead of; in prefer- 
 ence to; (213. e) ; equivalent to. 
 
 Exercise 43. 
 
 229. Let us fly from excessive self-love. Let us pur- 
 sue the honorable rather than the expedient. They 
 choose war in preference to peace, because they have 
 not tasted the evils of war. They undergo every toil, 
 because they are ambitious. He says that a king is 
 equivalent to very many soldiers. All men, so to say,'*' 
 are lovers of self. If he were not ambitious, he would 
 not endure this. I am come on an understanding, that 
 I am to be on-an-equal-footing with the other citizens. 
 Do not transgress the laws of your country. They bear 
 every thing for the sake of being praised, because [prep.) 
 they are excessively ambitious. Let us choose what is 
 honorable in preference to what is expedient. It is not 
 right, to make self-interest the object of one's life. It 
 does not belong to a pious man, to tear death excessive- 
 ly. It is not every man that can" master self-love. I 
 have not fallen in with Abrocomas for a long time. 1 
 love both the children of Abrocomas ' and those of Phi- 
 lip. Every body aims at becoming happy. It is profita- 
 ble to men to be pious. If you do this, you shall be pun- 
 
 P Properly a poetical fem. adj. agreeing with y?. 
 
 ' Nouns in 05 have the Doric gen. in a (for ov), when they are the 
 Damea of fordgners, or of Doric Greeks of no celebrity ; as 'AfifoKf^as 
 G 'hPfOK6^a. (R.) 
 
THE PARTICIPLE. 103 
 
 ished for your villainy. All the laws of the state, se to 
 say," were transgressed by this villain. He thinks that 
 the treaty has been broken. 
 
 ■§. 39. The Participle. 
 
 230. A participle assumes an assertion; or rathei 
 states it attributively, not predicatively. Whenever it 
 is convenient to express this assertion by a complete 
 sentence, we may do so ; connecting it with the princi- 
 pal sentence by a relative pronoun, or a conjunction (or 
 conjunctional adverb) of time, cause, condition, or lim- 
 itation. Hence, vice versa — 
 
 231. a. b. c. d) Relative sentences, and sentences in- 
 troduced by when, after, if, since, because, although, 
 &c. may be translated into Greek by omitting the rela- 
 tive or conjunction, and turning the verb into a parti- 
 ciple. 
 
 In translating from Greek into English, the proper particle to be 
 used must be found by considering the relation in which the parti- 
 ciple stands to the principal verb. 
 
 Thus, " I visited my friend nwroSra," may mean, ' who woe ill,' or 
 'because he was ill,' or 'when he was ill.' 
 
 232. c) T^he'Englishverbal or participial substantwe 
 .mder the government of a preposition, may often be 
 translated by a participle agreeing with the nominative 
 case of the sentence. 
 
 283. g) A past participle may often be translated in- 
 to English by a verb, connected with the principal verb 
 by ' and.' 
 
 Of course, vice versa, the first of two verbs connected by 'and' 
 may be translated into Greek by a past participle. 
 
 234. a) ■^vvri lie XVQ'"' oewp «^« «ei&' iKoicrijv ^fisgav mov 
 avtri riKTovaav, a certain widow woman 
 had a AcM which laid her an egg every day. 
 
104 THE PARTICIPLE. 
 
 i) 7« Jie^/Kwa avaXdaag anijylaTO, when 6r 
 after, he had spent all his money, he hang- 
 ed himself. 
 
 c) x«y-S7t6v iari Xsynv nQog tijv yaariqa, ura ovh 
 
 txovaat, it is difficult to speak to the stom- 
 ach, because it has no ears. 
 
 d) yiyvaaxoi/Tsg on yaxaiaTir, ofttae i'ri&vftov- 
 
 aiv avtav, though they know that they are 
 hurtful, they nevertheless desire them. 
 
 e) Xij'i^ofisvoi ^mmv, they live by pUmdering. 
 /) xgazav ds ^dovmv xal im&viiiav, diaqie^cvtms 
 
 av acaqiQoroi, but if he gained the victory 
 over pleasure and his desires, he would he 
 temperate in an uncommon degree, 
 g) la^av, sqtrj, tovtov, fiaaii'ymaov, take this fel- 
 low said he, and Jlog him. gi^iag 5" 6 noi- 
 firiv nizQav, to xeqag avz'^g itaisa^u; but the 
 shepherd threw a stone and broke her horn. 
 
 235. Vocabulary 39. 
 
 A widow, yt^qa, ag, rj. 
 
 To know, yiyvmanta.' 
 
 To consume, spend, uvaliaxm (fut. avaXda(o,aor. 
 
 avciXmaa,). 
 
 Stomach, belly, yaaz^Q, tgog, ij. 
 
 The future, to fieXXov. 
 
 To plunder, ii^tfo/iai. 
 
 Remarkably, in an uncom- . , 
 
 raon degree, dcacpsgovTrog. 
 
 To scourge, flog, (laaztyom. 
 
 To throw, Qintm. 
 
 Stone, nhgog, ov, 6 (nsTQu, ag, ii, 
 
 in good authors, is a 
 
 rock.) 
 Bare, uncovered, yitXog, >f, oV. 
 
 Participles with peculiar meanings. 
 
 At first, at the beginning, aQ^oftsvog, i], ov. 
 
 ' yiyvuffKOf yvuffoitat, fyvioKa^ iyvuirftai, iyvuv. {syvtiiv, yvuOi, yvoilft. 
 Ira ytarai, ynfs) 
 
THE PARTICIPLE 105 
 
 At last, TsXevTcor, aaa, mv. 
 
 After some time, SiaXtnmv xqovov.' 
 
 With, {often translated by) sj^mv, aymv, (psQcov, XQcoiiSt off 
 
 Exercise 44. 
 
 |Et= Obs, Sentences in Italics are to be translated by 
 participles. 
 
 236. I shall be happy, iflknowmyself. The judge 
 himself shall be punished, if he transgress the laios of 
 the state. The master himself took the slave and flog, 
 ged him. He fled for refuge into the temnle, that'" he 
 might not be punished. Since you see this, are you not 
 without fear of death ? If you do what you ought, you 
 will be happy. That shameless (fellow) lives by flat- 
 tering the rich. What impiety!" He set oE with ten 
 thousand Hoplites. Cyrus was riding with his head 
 uncovered. Take the boy and punish him. He has 
 spent both his own money and his' father's. It is not 
 every man who can" be without fear of the future. 
 He threw a stone and broke the eagle's head. He cross- 
 ed the river, though it was flowing xoith a full stream. 
 The wolf was persuaded, and went away. The physi- 
 cian, with much skill {art.), freed the boy from his dis- 
 ease. At last he went away. At first you spoke ill ot 
 every body. After some time I will be with you. 
 
 % 40. The Participle continued. 
 
 237. a) The participle of the future is used to ex- 
 press a purpose.^ 
 
 ' So JiaX. TToXiiv or h\{yov y^p. 
 
 ' Of course in choosing which may be used, we must consider 
 whether the persons merely had, or led, or brought, or itsed the thins 
 or person wiih which he performed the action. 
 
 " The intention Is spoken of in a less certain way by the additioB 
 t/f wf. He had Cyrus arrested, as diroKTEvSv. 
 
 5* 
 
100 THK PARTICIPLE. 
 
 238. b) Many verbs that signify emotions, perception 
 by the senses, knowledge, recollection, cessation or co7i- 
 iinuance, &c., take the participle, where toe should use 
 the infinitive mood, the participial substantive, or, 
 ' that,^ &c. 
 
 238.* a) iym eQ^oftaiviup iniKovQijaoir, I am corn- 
 ins to aid you. 
 
 Tov ddtxavrra naga tovs Sixaaiag ayeiv 8h 
 diKtjv doiaovTu, he who wrongs another 
 should be taken before ihe judges to be 
 punished (literally, one should take, &c.) 
 
 TOVS tovio noi^aovrag iy-nsfinsi, he sends 
 out men to do this, 
 b) r^Ssw TOvg nalSag -O-viirovg ysvvi^act.g, I knew 
 that I had begotten mortal children (or, / 
 knew that the children I had begotten 
 were mortal). 
 
 •^nQofiriv avzav olofiircov thai aoqKOTdzaiv, 
 I perceived that they thought themselves 
 extremely wise. 
 
 avvoiSa ifiavr^ aocpog av (or <soq)^ ovii), 
 I am conscious of being wise (or, that I 
 am wise). 
 
 ovde'noTs'' fiiTEiiiXriai (toi oiyijaavTi, I have 
 never repented of having held my tongue. 
 
 239. Vocabulary 40. 
 
 To bring assistance, to aid, imxovQeco {dat.) It may 
 succour, have besides an accus. 
 
 of the thing : " imnovQeiv 
 i>6a(p to bear help against 
 a disorder ; to combat it.) 
 
 Judge, Sixaaz^g," ov, 6. 
 
 • See 214, h. ; " but ofiltirors, like nunquam, is occasionally found 
 with past tenses even in the best writers." (P.) 
 ■* «» rw y^ttftSva brtKovpJiaa. (Xen.) 
 
 ■* The 6iKauTfis decides in a court of justice accarding to right and 
 laiB . the KfiTiK in the other relations of Ufe according to equity and his 
 knowledge of human nature. (Pass.) 
 

 ' 
 
 THE PAKTICIPLE. 101 
 
 Beget, 
 
 
 YSfrdm. 
 
 Dare, attempt, 
 
 
 lo'i.fidaJ 
 
 
 Verbs that take the participle. 
 
 See, 
 
 
 OQaoo. 
 
 Learn, am aware. 
 
 (lav&dvio.' 
 
 I repent, 
 
 
 fiSTai^ilsi ' ftof . 
 
 Make to cease, 
 
 stop. 
 
 navfo. 
 
 Cease, 
 
 
 ^jfyco, navonau 
 
 Am ashamed, 
 
 
 alaivvofiai.^ 
 
 Remember, 
 
 
 (isfivijiiai. 
 
 Appear, 
 
 
 qiaifOfiat.' 
 
 Am evident, 
 
 
 dIjXoe «/;<t^=am evidently 
 
 Know, 
 
 
 oZ5« (2 perf. of eiSeo.) 
 
 Am conscious, 
 
 
 avvoida i/iavT^'. 
 
 Rejoice, 
 
 
 lalQoo. 
 
 Perceive, 
 
 
 aia&aroixau 
 Exercise 45. 
 
 239* I am ashamed of having flattered Xenochdes. 
 Remember that you are a man. He was conscious of 
 acting unjustly. He rejoices in being praised, because 
 he is ambitious. I have ceased to be a flatterer. I am 
 conscious of fearing death. I am not ashamed of hav- 
 ing, conferred many benefits upon him. I know that 1 
 am mortal. I do not repent of having ravaged the 
 whole country. I am conscious of wishing to destroy 
 whatever I may take {shall have taken •). He is evi- 
 dently doing disgraceful things. He evidently cannot 
 either speak well of his friends or treat them well. 
 Cyrus knew that the son he had begotten, was mortal 
 
 y Of things requiring courage. It has also the meaning of susii- 
 ncre, to hear to do so and so. 
 
 ■ HavS&va^ jiaOfitTOiJiatj fiEiiddjiKa. ^jiadov. 
 * jiSTd-fiEXetj fttTa^fitXfiTzi^ &c. 
 
 fc ala'^vvo^ai Tiiiitiv=^I' am ashamed to do it; ai^yfyopai votav 01 
 oif/aas, I am fishamed of doing, or having done it. 
 ' Or ^aivajtiv. diixSv, if it should appear that I have acted unjustly 
 ^ inXis luTit inupnos, he is evidently vexed 
 » 91, e. 
 
108 THE PARTICIPLE. 
 
 (238* b). I will put a stop to his inflicting damage on 
 the city. I knew that the children he begot were mortal. 
 Do not cease to love your mother. Know that vou shall 
 be punished for your injustice. The physician is here 
 to (p) ' combat the boy's disease. Take the villain be- 
 fore the judges to be punished. They will evidently 
 attempt this. I knew that he had done more service to 
 Ihe state than any other single person." I will send out 
 men to (p) inflict damage on the city. 
 
 "§ 41. The Participle continued ; Tv^idvai, Kav&avm, 
 cp&drca. 
 
 240. tli&dvcs)^ {come or get before) and ).ar&dv(a^ 
 [am concealed) are generally rendered by adverbs, 
 the participle that accompanies them must then be 
 turned into a verb, 
 
 241. The participle J.av&dvoav or Xa&mv may be reu 
 dered secretly, without being observed, seen, &c. Hence 
 ika&sv elasX&av is nearly equivalent to slaijl&ev laOcor, 
 but gives more prominence to the notion of secrecy, 
 
 242. a) 6 Kvgos, a r s ' n atg mv, Tidsro roTg roiovroi?, 
 
 Cyrus, as being a boy, was pleased with 
 such things. 
 
 b) stvxov naQovtsg, they happened to be present, 
 
 ivfidvu mv, he happens to be (or simply, is.) 
 
 c) Xav&drm it noimv, 1) am concealed from 
 
 myself doing it = do it without knowing 
 it ; unconsciously, unknown to myself, 
 
 ' A (p) after the first word of a cjause shows that it is to be turned 
 jito a participial clause, as explained in the two preceding sections. 
 
 9 ipOdvciJt tpBljffOjiat, ^ipBcuca. iiftd&aaf t!<pOr)v. Fut, tpOitrot in later wri- 
 ters. (if6r]v—<p9attiv, fQi5, (pSfivai, fpOds). EtpOnv is the older aorist : bi.1 
 lifSaira is used once even by Thuc, and from Xenoplion downwards if 
 die more common form. (B.) 
 
 •> \av6ara, Miru, XcXi)9a. l^aOor. (Scc 156.) 
 ' Often ars c>i. (See 371.) 
 
THE PARTICIPLE. lOM 
 
 2) am concealed from others doing it^= 
 do it without being observed; secretly 
 without being seen or discovered. 
 
 d) eqi&tjv avtovg acpixoiisvog, I arrived before 
 
 them. £<p&^v aquxofjisvos,'' I arrived first, 
 
 e) ovx av (p&dvois noiav rovzo, you cannot 
 
 do this too soon. 
 
 f) ovx av cpd-dvoig nomv rovzo; wonH you 
 
 do this directly ? = do it directly. 
 g)Xeys qi&daas, speak quickly; at once 
 oLvvaag^ rQe^s, run immediately, 
 
 2-13. Vocabulary 41., 
 
 Preposition «»o'. 
 
 Signification, from ; governs the genit. 
 
 To fight on horseback, aqp' Innav, 
 
 To have done supper, anh Ssinvov yivsa&at. 
 
 To do a thing of them- , . , 
 
 , ° am gavzoiv. 
 
 selves, '^ 
 
 At the suggestion of others, «g)° dvSgwv higoor. 
 
 Openly, dm rov TZQOcparovg (froni 
 
 adj. nQoqpav^g). 
 
 Preposition ngo. 
 
 Signification, before (of time, place and preference), in 
 behalf of, for : governs genit. 
 
 For (=in behalf of) the , . „ , , 
 ] • V. ' ngo rov paaiktwg. 
 
 To value very highly, to tiqo noXlov noisia&ai (to 
 
 attach great importance value before, i. e. more 
 
 to, than, much. See 282). 
 
 To choose war before, in ngo stQ^rijg (for which dvn' 
 
 preference to, peace. is used in 213, e). 
 
 ^ loeo/iai (commonly a^ixi/co/iai), l^ofiatf ly^au 1x6^7^)/, 
 ' From ivitm or dvimv, to accomplish. 
 
110 THE GENITIVE ABSOLUTEj <fcc. 
 
 Exercise 46. 
 
 244. The physician happened to be present. You 
 cannot punish the boy too soon (242. e). The enemy 
 arrived at" the city before us. Go away immediately 
 (242. g). Won't you go away directly (242./) ? If you 
 do this before our enemies (do it), we have conquered. 
 If you do this before me, I am undone. If we arrive at 
 the city before them, all will be well. The slave broke 
 the pitcher without being discovered. The Scythians 
 fought on horseback. The father went in to the gener- 
 al without being observed. These Hoplites weic drawn 
 up before the king himself. He is too sensible'" to choose 
 war before peace. He has done supper. Speak at once 
 (242.^), if it is agreeable" to those who are present. To 
 incur danger in behalf of the state is honorable. It is 
 the part of a good man to incur dangers himself for his 
 friends. He did this at the suggestion of other persons. 
 I should never have done this of myself. If Xenoclides 
 had not been their general, they would never have dared 
 to commence a war openly. Men enact laws, ihat^" they 
 may not be injured. Having done supper, they prac- 
 tised equestrian exercises. 
 
 ^ 42, The Genitive Absolute, &c. 
 
 245. a) The case absolute is in Greek the genitive : 
 it marks the time, or generally any such relation to the 
 principal sentence, as we should express by when, after, 
 since, as, because, though, if, &c. 
 
 246. b. c) The participles of impersonal verbs are put 
 absolutely in the nominative ; of course without a noun, 
 and in the neuter gender. 
 
 " cts, if ihey went into it 
 
THE GENITIVE ABSOLUTE, &C. Ill 
 
 247. d) When the time relates to a person, irti is gen- 
 erally expressed. 
 
 248. e) When a motive is attributed to another per- 
 son, the particle cSff is generally used with the gen. oi 
 ace. absolute. 
 
 249 a) i[iovxa&ev8oviog,'whi\st Iwas a.sleep. tovrat* 
 ovToag iioftmv, this being the case ; or, as 
 this is the case. 
 
 b) dta ri fiiviig, i%ov dmsvai ; why do you re- 
 
 main, when you are at liberty to go away ? 
 
 c) So 8sov amevat, when, whereas, &c. you 
 
 ought to go away. Bo^av" ^luv amivai, 
 when we have determined to go away. 
 Also do^av tavTo.,' this being determined. 
 
 d) im Kvqov ^aaiksvovTog,'in the reign of Cyrus. 
 
 e) EGuana wg ndvtag s id 6 rag (or ndvTtov 
 
 Ei86rmv), he held his tongue, as suppos- 
 ing that all knew. 
 
 250. TOCABULARY 42. 
 
 Words used in Aomin. Absolute. 
 
 When or whereas it was , , 
 said or told, uQVi^eror. 
 
 It being disgraceful, possi- , , , , , , , 
 ble, impossible, plain or '^^'^XQor-^vmtov-advpaio, 
 
 evident, -^''^'"' «"• 
 
 There being an opportuni- ,, 
 
 ty, when I may or might, "'^B'"'- 
 It being fit or incumbent, jtQoalJKov. nQoaijxet{dat.) ix 
 
 belongs to. at ngoa^itov- 
 TBg, those that belong {o 
 us = relations. 
 When, whereas one ought, dear. 
 
 ^ So ioKurJv, ieSoyjjievav. 
 
 ® Also S6^av-os TovroVf io^avTMV rovroiVj and H^avra ravra, 
 
 P i^Tw, hciTTi, wipcuTiv, tfeoTi, &c. jrpaTTew, all signify, one can or 
 
 may : but hccn relates to physical possibility (it is possible) : ciean to 
 
 moral possibility (it is allowed) : 'inn and Traplart stand between these 
 
 two meanings, without being confined to either of them ; the latter im- 
 
 lying also the notion oi facility, (B.) 
 
112 
 
 THE GENITIVE ABSOLUTE, &C. 
 
 As far at least as this is con- 
 cerned, as far as depends 
 on this, 
 
 F'or the sake of, 
 
 After the manner of a dog, 
 
 Hke a dog, 
 Without, 
 
 TovTOv ys efcta. 
 
 XaQip (with gen. = prop- 
 ter; hut xo^Qiv ifiriv, fot 
 my sake). 
 
 xvvog bUrfl. 
 
 avsv {gen.) 
 
 For any thing the other 
 heavenly bodies could do ersxa 7mv keqiov ao-r^oo*-. 
 to prevent it, 
 
 Exercise 47. 
 
 251. Without you I should have perished for any 
 thing my other friends could have done to prevent it, 
 Why do you remain, when we have determined to suc- 
 cour our friends? Why do you hold your tongue, 
 whereas you ought to speak 7 Why do you remain, 
 now that you have an opportunity to depart 1 He ask- 
 ed the boy, why he remained, when it was his duty tc 
 depart. Though they were toldt to be present, they are 
 not come. If it is agreeable to you,^' we will go away. 
 I hope that we shall thus arrive before" the Persians. 
 He had the same upper-chamber, whenever he wished. 
 I'he slave told me, that the physicians were come [p) to 
 combat the boy's disorder. If you act unjustly towards 
 your slaves, know'* that you will be punished by the 
 gods. I knew that all the rest of the country had been rav- 
 aged by the Persians. Why did you choose war, when 
 you might have chosen peace ? He told me that all were 
 
 f)ermitted to go in to the general, whenever he was at 
 eisure. 
 
 t It being told. 
 
THE RELATIVE. 113 
 
 Exercise 48. 
 
 252. Cyrus evidently''^ desired to be praised. I per- 
 ceived that he wished to disobey the laws of his country. 
 O boy, cease to do this, since (p) it is disgraceful to de- 
 spise your father. The boy went secretly (241) into his 
 father's house. But this being determined, we cannot 
 set out too soon.'' The master, as being a fool, was de- 
 ceived by his slave. Do not practise many arts, since it 
 is impossible to do every thing well. Let us not despise 
 our relations. As far as money is concerned, you will 
 rule over all the Greeks. Know that you will get off 
 well, as far at least as this is concerned. He told me 
 that, if any man was well suited to govern men, it was 
 Cyrus.*' The physician told me, that he had come for 
 my sake. This animal runs like a dog. This being 
 the case, I will go away at once. AH men, so to say, 
 desire what is absent. It is the part of a senseless man, 
 to hold cheap what is present, from the desire of what is 
 absent. He said nothing himself, as supposing^' that 
 all felt grateful to Xenoclides. 
 
 § 43. The Relative. 
 
 253. a. h. c) The relative is often used to introduce a 
 cause, ground, motive, or design of what is stated. 
 
 Obs. 1. When it expresses a cause or ground it takes the jjkKc. ; 
 when it expresses a purpose (as in 258. c), the Jut. iridic, [or the sub- 
 junctive 1]. 
 
 Obs. 2. The relative is not used merely to connect a sentence with 
 the one before it so frequently as in Latin. When so used, it is 
 probably always expressive of some emotion. (B.) 
 
 1 'Conjunctivus cum pronominibus adverbiisve relativis Consociatus 
 nonnisi in veterum epicorum sermone fini indicando inservit.' (Herm. 
 ad CBd. Col. 190. So Krager,Lachmann,&c.) Some MSS. read oiriof 
 In the passage of Thucydides, 258. c. 
 
114 THE EELATITK. 
 
 Obs. 3. SS$ is not uaed as a mere antecedent to the relative, biK 
 oJrtj, which is not so strongly demonstrative. 
 
 254. d) The antecedent is often expressed in the 
 relative clause, and omitted in the principal clause. 
 
 When this is the case, the relative clause often stands first ; the 
 Bubst., which mostly loses its article, is then not to be placed im- 
 mediately after the relative. 
 
 255. c) The relative is often made to agree in case 
 with the antecedent in the principal clause. 
 
 This is called Attraction of the Relative : it seldom takes place ex- 
 cept where the relative should regularly stand in the aamsative, the 
 antecedent being in the gen, or dot. and vnthoui a demonstrative 
 pronoun (as o^roj, hcTms). 
 
 256. g) When the relative is attracted, the antece- 
 dent is often placed in the relative clause, but in the 
 case in which it would stand in the principal clause. 
 
 257. g) Theantecedent is sometimes wholly omitted. 
 
 As, for instance, when it is some general or indefinite notion 
 {man, thing, &c. as in 258. g, ex. 2), or has been before mentioned, 
 as in 258. h. 
 
 In (258. h) the ret. seems under the government of a preposition 
 belonging to the other clause. As in English sometimes,— " she 
 would have the head of wAuMerer advised it." 
 
 258. a) &oiV[iaaTov ttoisTg o g rjntv ovSh S i8 m g, you act 
 
 strangely in giving us nothing. 
 
 b) sfiandgi^ov trjv fitiJiQa, oicov ts'xvmv Ixvgriae, 
 
 they pronounced the mother happy in 
 having such children. (Here oicav = on 
 roiovrmv.) 
 
 c) ri pavg nqsa^itg ayei, oineg to. aqiitBQa qiQciaiaaiv,^ 
 
 the ship is bringing ambassadors to 
 make (or, that they may make) their own 
 statement. 
 oTiXa ntmvia.1, otg apivvovvTai lovg aSixovvrag, 
 they are procuring arms to defend them,- 
 selves with against those who injure 
 them (or, with which to repel or punish, 
 those who injure them). 
 
 ' More probably, jipiaovrnv. (KrOger.) 
 
THE RELATIVE. 115 
 
 (1) ovTog iariv, ov sldsg avSqa, ) This is the man 
 ov eldeg avBga, ovTog iariv, ) you saw. 
 
 Attraction op Relative. 
 
 e) (lEradidoos avz^ rov airov, ovnsQ aviog i^sig, 
 you give him a portion of the food which 
 you have yourself. 
 
 f) TQ) {lysjiovi matsvaoniv qj av Kvgog 5(j3, we wili 
 
 confide in any general whom Cyrus may 
 give us • (for ov &'). 
 
 g) anolavat" av sjfw a.'j'a&mv, I enjoy the good 
 
 things I possess. fiBixvijiAtrng wv enQct^s, 
 remembering what he had done, 
 h) [isrsnifiTtSTO uXXo aTQareviiu, tighe <p TiQoa&sv 
 slxB, he sent for another army, in ad- 
 dition to the one he had before. 
 
 259. Vocabulary 43. 
 
 Surprising, strange, GavpiacTTog, if, ov. 
 
 To act strangely, ■Qavjiaazov tzoieTv, 
 Corn, (food for man in gen- 
 eral,) 
 
 Ambassador, nQia^vg, ecog, 6. 
 
 To send for, nEtamnnoiiai. 
 
 To enjoy, awoXavw.* 
 
 Prepositions Iv, avd, stg. 
 
 iv = in, answer to where? — governs dat. 
 
 wi'a =(properly) up : in, on, thiough (of a large space 
 
 of time) — governs accus. 
 ug= into, towards, against, in reference to — governs 
 
 accus. 
 
 ' Dederit. » See 94. 
 
 " Thia verb (which is probably from the same root as \affziv. P.) is 
 properly to receive from; to receive whether advantage or disadvan- 
 tage from any thing. So that (like our, to reap the fruits of ) it is used 
 in both a good and a bad sense. 
 
 J Plur. often alra in Att. Greelc, which is also found in Herodotus. 
 
 " avroXauM, dmXamoiiai. Imp. dncXavov, aor. diriXavira, though no BilH' 
 ole verb is found. airiiXouov, dir^Xavrra are later forms. 
 
 otroff.' 
 
116 THE KELATI7E. 
 
 The first of all, iv loXg Tigmzos." 
 
 It depends upon you, iv aol tan. 
 
 Through the whole country, uva naaav jijv y^y. 
 
 Through the whole day, ara naaav rtif ruiiqav. 
 
 Every day, «»« naaav rjjisqav. 
 
 Every year, ava nav hog. 
 
 By fives, or Jive and Jive, ava nivts. 
 
 To attend a master, dg diSaamlov <foirat'> {(it- 
 
 y.iav understood). 
 To send (a boy) to a mas- > » » „ -i „ - 
 
 Exercise 49. 
 
 260. I pity the mother for having been deprived ot 
 such a daugher (258. b). 1 will give him some of the 
 wine which I have. He sent for more wine in addition 
 to what he had drunk already (258. h). This is the 
 hare you saw (258. d). You act strangely in speaking 
 ill even of your friends. He knew that I should enjoy 
 the good things I possess (258. §•), Receive the good 
 things you desire (258. g). I have a stick to beat you 
 with (258. c). The Hoplites arrived Jirst of all. All 
 these things depend on you. They harassed us all the 
 day, so that (211) the Hoplites could not march. They 
 went into the city by fives. Those who had plotted 
 against the king entered {went into) the city by threes 
 without being observed.'" Say quickly, what your 
 opinion is {what seems good to you). I, for my part, 
 would choose peace in preference to all that I possess. 
 I knew that (p) the citizens would choose" peace in 
 preference to war. Why do you wait, when it is your 
 duty to succour your friend? The Athenians used to 
 do this every year. They are not aware that (p) they 
 
 ' This phrase is elliptical : Iv toTs Trpuirot iTaf>7jtrav=lv roTs napo^trtv 
 tpSiToi TraoTiuav. Time, uses Iv rots even with a fern, superlative. (See 
 IJL 81.) 
 
 y Properly, to go frequently into his house. 
 
THE KELATIVE. IH 
 
 are despised''* by every body. They do this, not only 
 every year, but also every day. I admire your lilies, but 
 not ■ your brother's. The boy attends no master. We 
 send our boys to masters. 
 
 Exercise 50. 
 
 261. I repented of having flogged" the slave. I in- 
 deed eat that I may live, but others live that Ihey may 
 eat. Socrates said, that he indeed ate that he might 
 live, but that others lived that they might eat. The 
 beauty of the city was admired by all who were-there.' 
 He said that if the citizens obeyed the laws of the state, 
 they would prosper (102). I wonder at the water being 
 turned into wine. The widow would have died" but 
 /or'" her hen, which (p) laid her an egg every day. 
 The beauty of the boy was admired by Socrates him- 
 self. The Persian cavalry unexpectedly charged the 
 ranks of the Greeks. He says that he (219) has a pain 
 in his head. I perceived that he rejoiced''^ in the wealth 
 of the citizens.* I am ashamed of being glad'^ that my 
 daughter is beautiful.* He is evidently''^ vexed at the 
 misdeeds of his brothers. Henceforth let us despise no- 
 body. The judge told me that we must persuade (120. c) 
 the citizens. Would that you had done what you ought ! 
 Would that you would do what you ought ! I am at a 
 loss what to do (98). 
 
 § 44. The Relative continued. 
 
 262. a) When the relative, with such a verb as to be, 
 call, believe, (fcc. stands in apposition to a noun, it gen- 
 erally agrees in gender with it, ra,ther than its proper 
 antecedent. 
 
 " ni should stand last : it then takes an accent (oi"). 
 
118 THE RELATIVE. 
 
 263. b) eanv-oi''==snoi, some, and may be declined 
 throughout : — 
 
 N. EOTlv olj iartv ai, icTlv S. 
 
 Gr. ^artv uvm 
 
 D. toTtv oiff, Itrriv alsj Sotiv ois, &C. 
 
 264. c) In the same way eauf ore =sometimes ; earn 
 onov, somewhere, &c. 
 
 265. d) So also lattv with oaiig is used as an inter 
 rogative. 
 
 266. e) ecp cf or ^tb is, ' oJi condition that,' with tlie 
 future indie, or the infin. 
 
 The relative in this construction answers to the demonstrative 
 hn TovTto: which, or lt\ nTalc, is not unfrequently expressed. 
 
 267. g) av&' oov, because, for ( =avTl tovzov oti). 
 
 It may, however, be used in its proper meaning: 'in return far 
 those things which,' &c. 
 
 268. h) e! Tig '' does not express any doubt as to 
 whether there was a,ny, but is used as equivalent to 
 oatis, whosoever, whatsoever (= all that). 
 
 269. a) qiS^og, rjv al8m aaloviisv, the fear which we 
 
 call bashfulness. 
 6) ano 7av iv SixsXia noXstov eariv (ov,from 
 some of the cities in Sicily. 
 
 c) ovantQ bISov eativ onov, whom I saw some- 
 
 where. 
 
 d) eat IV ovajiv ag av&Qtonovg rs&avitaxag sni 
 
 aoqiia ; are there any persons whom you 
 have admired for their wisdom 7 
 
 e) iLs'lco (Toi, «g)' ^.aiyrj<sEi, I will tell you, on con 
 
 dition that you will hold your tongue. 
 
 f) ■fjQs&ijaav sgo' cpts avy/Qaxficu. i/o/iovg, they were 
 
 chosen on the condition that they should 
 draw up laws (i. e. to draw up laws). 
 
 ■ For '»unt qui dicanV the Greeks said, tariv ol \tyovoiv, or eiaXv ol 
 ityavTK, or £i<r!v of \iyomiv. Examples of the last construction are no' 
 tncommon. (Er.) 
 
 ' 7-is indef. has gen. jov, dat. ™ Cboth enclitic), for rwis, r ni Sir 
 
 ^ITTtS has BtOV, OTta 
 
 » 
 
THE KfiLATIVE. 
 
 119 
 
 g) lOQiv aoi olda av& av ^X&eg, I feel thankful 
 
 to you for coming, 
 h) iqidsiQov El 7 1 ^Qijaifiov ^v, they destroyed 
 
 every thing of value. 
 
 270. Vocabulary 44. 
 
 To be banished, 
 To return from banish- 
 ment, 
 To wound, 
 Some, 
 Sornewhere, 
 Sometimes, 
 Hold my tongue, 
 
 xajsQxoiiai, xdreuu. 
 
 MTIV Oi. 
 
 saziv onov. 
 sativ ore. 
 aiydtt).' 
 
 Peeposition did. 
 
 Governs accus. and genitive. , 
 
 Signification : (with gen., ^throughy of space of time ; 
 
 and of means. . 
 " (with accus.) ^on account of; also, 
 
 through, of a cause. 
 
 On your account, 
 After a long time. 
 
 Every five years. 
 To pity, 
 
 To be angry with, 
 To be at enmity with, 
 At a little, at a great dis- 
 tance, 
 To have in One's hand, 
 
 Sia as. 
 
 3ia noXlov ^qovov : also, dta 
 XQovov, after some time. 
 8ia nivts srav.' 
 8i owTOv s^uv. 
 8i OQyijg s^siv. 
 Si sj^b-Qag yiyvsadal ztvt.* 
 
 Si okiyov, 8ia noXXov. 
 
 Stu xeiQog e^stv. 
 
 " ^dyciv is used for fvycXv, to be in hanishment. (Heindorf.) 
 
 o Put. generally, myfiaojiai. It cannot, like ci^itiw, take aceus. of 
 thing. 
 
 '' Also &ia Tti^TiTQv ETOVS &nd 6t& lecfiTtTbiv Irtav. 
 s So iii ^iXiac Uvai nyi. (Xen. Anab. iii. 8.) 
 
120 6 otog av avqg. 
 
 Exercise 51. 
 
 271. I deem you happy in having received*" such 
 good things. Most men evidently desire'" the good 
 things which their neighbours possess. I will go away 
 on condition that the physician shall stay. Some of 
 them were wounded by the enemy. I will tell you, on 
 condition that the others shall hold their tongue. Is 
 there any person whom (269. d) you have praised for'' 
 his forwardness? I will endeavour to do this so that 
 (211) even you shall praise' me. I would choose 
 liberty before all the good things I possess (258. g). 
 He chose war, when he might have peace. Xeno- 
 clides was chosen general, with three others.^^ I re- 
 joice to have been elected'* general by the Athenians. 
 Why am I wretched, when I map become happy ? I 
 am at enmity with Abrocomas. He was banished 
 through the Athenians. I rejoice in seeing you'* after 
 some time. Know that it is through the gods'' that you 
 are doing well. Know that it is through me that you 
 have returned from banishment. The physician is 
 come on your account. Theydo this every five years. 
 The boy pursues the dog with [having) a stick in his 
 hand. 
 
 ^ 45. 6 oiog av ar^g. 
 
 272. The relative adjectives, olog, oaog, I'lh'xoe, &c. 
 tsufier attraction not only in the accusative, but also in 
 the nominative, when the verb einl with an express 
 
 >■ Gen. — ahiu takes ace. of person, gen. of thing. 
 Infin. pres^ 
 
 k i. c. know, doing well (nom. partic.) through the gods. The other 
 sentences of this kind (having 'it ia' followed by 'that') aie to 1)H 
 turned in the same way. 
 
6 olog ai) avqq. 121 
 
 subject stands in the relative sentence ; as, iqafiai otov 
 aov avdQog, for eqafiai oivSQbg loioizov olog av el. 
 
 Obs. 1. This attraction consists in the omission of 
 the demonstrative adjective in the gen., dat., or accus., 
 and then putting the relative adject, by attraction, in 
 the case of the preceding substant. The verb of the rel- 
 ative sentence {sl/u) is also omitted, and the subject of the 
 relat, sentence agrees with the attracted relative. 
 
 Obs. 2. In this construction, oaog follows such words 
 as ■Qaviiaajog, Tiktiazog, acpOovog : and dg the adverbs 
 i^tKV/iaatoag, ■0-avitaozag, &c. 
 
 /?T3. a) G. eQtt[tai oiov aov avSqog, I love such a 
 man as you. 
 D. ittQi^onai otq) CToJ urdgi, I gratify such' 
 
 a man as you. 
 A. iTicui'ca olov as apdgu, I praise such a 
 man as you. 
 i) N. otoff ffi' {avfio), such a man as you. 
 G. Tov otov aov {avdQog), of such a man as 
 you, &c, (fee. 
 c)'0'uv[iciar6v oaov 7iQov][aQ7ias, he madt, 
 
 astonishing progress, 
 d) & avuKaltag tog adhog yiyovs, he has be- 
 come surprisingly miserable. 
 
 274. Vocabulary 45. 
 
 To love, cQaa." 
 
 To gratify, i^uQi^ofiai 
 
 Advance, make progress, ngo^iaqia 
 
 To leap, aXkoiiai." 
 
 To throw, ptwroj. 
 
 The truth, io aXij&sg {alij&'^g, true ; ak- 
 
 ■q&sia, truth); 
 
 ^ .. ^ HI 
 
 ' Ttep is often added : ol olai nep ifisTs ^vipes. 
 
 ™ tpaiiif poet, spapaif ipacBfiaoiiat, iipdadt]v (gen.) love. (See Index.) 
 Fres. pass. tptSiiai, (^tpSadai^ epunevos), to be lovdd. 
 
 ■» iXKofuui iXoijiai. Aor. 1. ildiiiiv with a in the moods, aor. 2. <Xiiyii;« 
 with a. Aor. 1. should probably be preferred for indie, and part. ; aor. 
 2. for optat. dnd ivf-v. (B.) Herpiann rejects the indie, and imver. ol 
 aor. 3. 
 
 6 
 
Ititi 
 
 otog av ar'^Q. 
 
 True happiness, ^ tag aXij&mg eiSuiixonU. 
 
 To dwell, olxm. 
 
 Miserable, wretched. a&Xiog, a, ov. 
 
 Preposition, xara. 
 
 Properly Ka-id signifies a motion from a higher place 
 downwards : and governs the genit. and accus. 
 
 With genit. it means, down from, down, under; but 
 more commonly against, with verbs of speaking, 
 thinking, &c. '" 
 
 With accus. it means, at, by, near, during, m an in- 
 definite way ; also, according to, and with the distri- 
 butive sense of our ' by' [by twoSy «fcc.) 
 
 According to reason, 
 
 During, in, or at the time 
 
 of the disease. 
 In villages, 
 Two by two, 
 In all respects, 
 Sensual pleasures, 
 According to Plato, 
 
 xata loyov (also with gen. 
 " in proportion to"). 
 
 xata Ttjv votrnv. 
 
 xara xwfiag {vicatini). 
 
 xata, Svo. 
 
 xaza ndvza. 
 
 al xarcc to Omfta rfiorai. 
 
 xaza niuTava. 
 
 Exercise 52. 
 
 275. They cling to sensual pleasuits, because" they 
 have never tasted true happiness. They are too wise" 
 to cling to sensual pleasures, (Men) gladly gratify such 
 9 man as you are. I would gladly gratify such men 
 as you. They leapt down from the wall. Do you 
 wish (98) that I should speak the truth against my 
 friend? The boy is like his father in every respect. 
 This is (65) hard, and for men like us impossible. The 
 king loved such men as you are. The boy has made 
 astonishing progress. He said that he would" very 
 g.adly gratify a man like you. Men like you always 
 speak well of the good. A man like you is praised by 
 every body. I would rather see men like you, than the 
 king of the Persians himself. He has become very 
 
ov8s)g oaiig ov. 123 
 
 wretched, unknown to himself.''^ I cannot gratify a 
 man like you too soon.'''' Will you not gratify a man 
 like me directly?'" Sophroniscus, as being selfish, 
 obliged nobody, willingly at least.*^ All men, so to 
 say,** like to oblige such men as you. All men, so to 
 say, rejoice in praising''' such a man as you are. These 
 things happened in the time of the disease. I know that 
 they dwelF'' in villages. The eagle has wings in pro- 
 portion to its body. To live according to reason is a 
 different thing (from living ») according to passion. I 
 will tell you on condition that you (will) send your boy 
 to some master (259). 
 
 § 46. ovdeig oatig ov. 
 
 276. In ovdeig ooTig ov {nemo non) the declinable 
 words are put under the immediate government of the 
 verb. 
 
 Kiihner calls this incerted atlractian, because the noun (or word 
 representing It) conforms to the relative, not the relative to the 
 noun. 
 
 Sometimes adverbs are aiiected by this kind of attraction ; /S^mj 
 
 KttOiVj oOev TT£p JJKEI (£0T KElCt). 
 
 277. N. ovdeig oazig ovx civ ravra noi^aeiev. 
 G. ovdsvbg otov oil xateyeXuaev. 
 
 J), ovdsvl or CQ ovx ansuqivaio. 
 A. ovSiva ovTiva ov xuiinlavae. 
 
 There is no one who would not do this. 
 
 Theie was no one whom he did not laugh at. 
 
 There was no one whom he did not answer. 
 
 There was no one whom he did not loeepfor. 
 
 278. Vocabulary 46. 
 
 To laugh at, xaiayeldoii.r 
 
 ° The art. must be expressed, though the infin. is to be omitted. 
 
 ' yeXdUf -atrofiai, but iye^aca. Short a. 
 
124 ovdsis Satis oh. 
 
 To answer, anoxQivoiiaifi 
 
 To weep for, KataKkalco. 
 
 Especially, allcag ie xai (ooth other 
 
 wise and also). 
 There is nothing like hear- „ .g^^ ^r^^ S^^omai. 
 
 As fast as they could, eg rosjjois d-novj 
 
 The agricultural popula- . , ^ ~ „ 
 jjgjj ° ^ '^ 01 ai^cpi pjv exovtsg. 
 
 Exercise 53. 
 
 279. There is no one who would not weep for suck 
 men as you." There is nobody whom he does not de- 
 spise. There is no one whom he does not hold cheap. 
 There is no one whom they do not gladly oblige. 
 There was none of those present" whom he had not 
 plotted against. I act strangely iti not gratifying'" a 
 man like you.'' I know that I shall love''* a man like 
 you. lam ashamed of having plotted" against a man 
 like you. He evidently wished'" to oblige such men as 
 you. That is a hard thing, and for a man like me at 
 least,' impossible. To live according to reason is un- 
 pleasant {not pleasant) to most persons, especially 
 (when they are) young. There is nothing like hear- 
 ing the ambassadors themselves. The agricultural 
 population are doing well. They pursued the dog as 
 fast as they could. 
 
 I Aor. 1. dmapibrivat is passive, from aTOKpiva {secemo), except in 
 late writers, who use it for dnxpimirBai. (B.) 
 
 ' Gen. of Ta^os. 
 
 ' Put the partic. after the negatives. OiScvds orm oi niirav in if at 
 KaeUKtK'.aii itarlip eim. (Plato, Protag. 317. c.) 
 
olog. Sim. fxeXXm. 12S 
 
 <^ 47. oiog. ds'a. (liTlm. 
 
 280. a. b) olog with the infinitive implies great fit- 
 ness or ability in a thing : re is usually joined with olog 
 in this signification ; as oiog zs ei/u noisTv, I am the man, 
 the fittest one to do it, / am able to do it, caii do it. 
 Without the infinitive, with neuter, olov denotes possi- 
 bility/. 
 
 281. c. d) de<a with oXiyov, nolXov, &c. is used hoth 
 personally and impersonally, in the meaning oi Iwant 
 but little of, am ia,rfrom doing, «fcc. : impers. noXXov dsT, 
 there wants much, far fi'om it; bUyov SeX, there wants 
 little, all but, &c. Sometimes dslv is omitted with blt- 
 ^ov, &c. 
 
 282. e.f) ixeXlio is followed by an infin. of the fu- 
 ture, present, or aorist. 
 
 Obs. The future infin. is the most, the aorist the 
 least common." (P.) 
 
 283. a) olog r s d(ti, I am able (i. e. am such as to 
 
 do a thing), a to v td iazi, it is possible. 
 i) 01 TiQoa&sv odovTsg oioi liiivsiv shiv, our 
 front teeth are adapted for cutting. 
 ov yccQ ijv olog auo navtog KSQdaivsiv, he was 
 not of a character^ to do anything what- 
 ever for the sake of gain. 
 
 ■ There is a large clasa of verba the object of which, expressed by 
 an infinitive, relates to future time, and may, therefore, be in the fu- 
 ture^ though it often is in the pres. or aor. " The present is preferred 
 when either the certain definite occurrence of the action is to be 
 marked, or its immediate commencement from the time the words are 
 uttered." (K.) Buttmann properly observes, that a distinction should 
 be made between verb^ whose ohiect is necessarily future (e. g. hope, 
 promise, expect) and those where the object is not necessarily future 
 (e. g. say, think, i&c.J : with the latter the pres. or aor. might be mis- 
 understood ; with the former, not. But the MSS. often agree in giving 
 the pres. or aor. (with reference to future time) after such verbs. (B 
 ad Plat. Crit. 14. 3.) 
 
 ' Or, was not a man to, &&. 
 
136 oiog. Sea). [tikXca. 
 
 c) oXiyov dsai daxgvaai, I could almost cry ; oi 
 
 am near crying. 
 
 hllyov Seiv idditQvcra, I was near crying. 
 
 bXiyov ndvTsg, nearly all {8eir omitted). 
 rovTO fUQ no}.Xov 8siv stnoirig av, for a 
 man would not assert that, far from it. 
 
 d) dvoTv deovta " eixoai, eighteen. 
 
 e) /itlXd) jQcnfiEip, yqdqiiiv, fqaxpai, I am going to 
 
 write, 
 f) El fislXei q)iX6aoq)og ysvea&ai, if he is to be- 
 come a philosopher. 
 
 283*. Vocabulary 47. 
 Cry, shed tears, SmQvm. 
 
 I am far from, nollov Sito. 
 
 Nearly, almost, oXlyov dsTv (used as an art- 
 
 verbial phrase ; or bXi- 
 
 yov only). 
 Far from it, noklov dsiv. 
 
 Am going to, [isXXm (also, am likely to, 
 
 and am to, &c.) 
 To gain, xsgdaifto. 
 
 Gain, xegdoe, eos, to. 
 
 Stove, xd/iTvog, ov, 7/. 
 
 Mostly, ra, noXXd. 
 
 Front (adject.), ■ 6 hqooQev. 
 
 Prepositions, djuijpt, nsqi. 
 
 Govern genit., dative, and accus. 
 
 Signification : aiicpl or nsgi lov, ' ahout,^ in answer to 
 both where 7 and whither 7 d/tqii or ntglri or nra e/ew 
 or Eirai is, to belong to,^ to be, or be employed about. 
 
 " The conatniction 6vi>Tv liCvroiv has disappeared, under the influ- 
 ence of modem criticism, from the works of the great writers, with the 
 Bingle exception of JCen. Hell. i. 1, 5 ; hTsiairXtZ Svoiv oEomatv lXkooi vavaiv, 
 where Scavcais is undoubtedly the proper reading. (Krager.) 
 
 * ol aiitpl (or rtcpi) *A.wTav, Anytus and his foUowers or party , a 
 phrase employed by Attic writers, when they chiefly allude to only one 
 individual; leaving it at the same time, for some reason, undecided 
 and in the dark, whether they mean that individual alone, or others ' 
 besides. (B.) ** 
 
Oi.og. dso}, fiiXXai. 121 
 
 ss^j T^ denotes care about: it follows verbs of /earm^ 
 
 (Ssbietai), being at ease about (d-a^gsiv), &c. 
 «/<q)t and (more commonly) nsQi tov are of, about (de) 
 
 as in ' to talk about.' Also, <fo^sia-&ai, qtilopsiKsiv (to 
 
 contend] asQi Tivog. 
 nsQi Tiollov noiua&M or {jysia&ai,^ to value highly, to 
 
 make a great point of, or attach great importance to. 
 
 Exercise 54* 
 
 284. He asked whether this was possible. We cut 
 with our front teeth. He told me that his father had the 
 tooth-ache in one of his front teeth. He has large"front 
 teeth. He was not of a character to fear death. He 
 says that he does not choose to go in to the general, 
 since (p) he is not at leisure. The Athenians sailed 
 with{part.) nineteen ships. It is not possible that one 
 man should ever do'' all this. You will not escape from 
 (86*. b) death. He is • mostly about the stove. Do not 
 think that I do this from insolence. Young men are of 
 a character to desire many things. Nearly al\ (of them.) 
 wish to entrust the arbitration to Socrates. They will 
 be entrusted with this" by nearly all (of them). I am 
 far from desiring all that you have. He fears the same 
 things thcit we do (182). He says that he (219) is with- 
 out fear of death. He says that the mother is afraid 
 about her daughter. The agricultural population are 
 doing well. I asked the general, whether he was going 
 to march against the king. He says that he has been 
 entrusted with this." 
 
 y So fffpt v^eiovos, ffXEioTow, &c. nsfil utfcpoS. (See 243.) 
 
128 onmg. ov /ti}. 
 
 § 48. onong. ov lirj. 
 
 285. a. b) oncog,'- when it refers to the future, has 
 either the subj. or \h.Q future indic.,'\ and retains them 
 even in connection with past time, when the optative 
 might have been expected (69). 
 
 286. c. d) The verb on which the sentence with onmi 
 depends is often omitted. 
 
 Rem. This construction is equivalent to an energetic imperative • 
 — opn or bpSTc may be supplied. 
 
 287. ovfiri,^ with the/w^ indie, or aor. subj., is used 
 as an emphatic prohibition or denial. 
 
 Rem. 1. This construction is probably effi/iiimZ: oi (&i Mr!) 
 ^ih ' • . &c. 
 
 With the second pers. sing, of the future indie, it is a prohibition ; 
 with the subj., and other persons of the future, a denial. 
 
 Rem. 2. Elmsley says: "o-i fifi cum futuro vetantis est, cum 
 subjunctivo \ero negantis ;" but Hermann shows, that the prohib- 
 itive meaning depends on the person, not on the tense. Elmsley 
 explained this phrase in what seems the simpler way, by join 
 ing the uij to the verb. Thus oi n>i ^nXfjirci; ; := icillyou not not-talk 
 ^ will you not hold your tongue 1 = hold your tongue. But Her- 
 mann (who at first agreed with Elmsley), Rost, Kunner, &c. adopt 
 the other explanation, supposing itas itrri, or some such phrassj 
 understood. 
 
 287*. d) (fQovrt^s on tag ftijdev ala^QOP not-^asig, takf; 
 care to do nothing disgraceful, 
 b) ^vve^ovXsvev ovrn noiBiv, ontog 6 cTzog avTiaxTd, 
 he advised them to do this, that the pro- 
 visions might hold out, 
 
 • onus is properly ' how,' and it cannot be used for • that,' except 
 where for ■ that ' we might substitute ' that ly this means,' or ' that so. 
 With the future indie, it is always strictly • how,' Htm rpS^ti. 
 
 t The fut. with Struis expresses a definite intention, for the accom- 
 plishment of which vigorous measures are to be pursued. (R.) 
 
 "i Dawes laid it down as a rule, that the subjunctive of the aor. 1. 
 act. and mid. was never used with oiruf, oi jifi, but that the fut. indie. 
 was used instead. This rule is now given up by the best scholars j but 
 Biittmann thinks that the subj. of the aor. 2. was employed with a kind 
 ■jf predilection, and that, when the verb had no such tense, the fut 
 indie, was used in preference to the subj. of the aor. 1. 
 
oncog. ov fitj. 129 
 
 c) oaooe uvtiQ sasi, that you behave (or quit your- 
 
 self) like a man. 
 
 d) oncog fir] noi^a^rs, o TzolXdxig vfiag s^Xaxfisv, be 
 
 sure not to do what has often been detri- 
 mental to you. 
 
 e) ov /lij XaX^asig ; do not chatter pray, ov iiij 
 
 yivtiTtti lovto, this will assuredly not hap 
 pen. 
 
 288. Vocabulary 48. 
 
 To Lethink myself, consid- ,v 
 
 er, take care, cpQorntco. 
 
 Talk, chatter, iaXsm. 
 
 Whilst he was walking, nszalv nsQinaToiv. 
 
 Nevertheless, o/ico?. 
 
 To be at dinner, demvBm {psinvov, coena, the 
 
 principal meal of the day 
 taken towards evening). 
 
 Preposition int. 
 
 Governs genit., dative, and accus. 
 
 Signification : in answer to question where 7 generally 
 
 with genit., sometimes with dat. in the sense of ' ore' : 
 
 as iff imiov 6)[sTa6ai : sqp' mTtcp iroQsvsa&ai. 
 In answer to questions whither? with accus.; as im 7l6- 
 
 qiov Tivd, to a certain hill ; and more generally, on, in, 
 
 towards to, <fcc. 
 
 They marched to JSardis, im ^dgSsmv. 
 They sailed to Chios, im iijg Xiov. 
 
 Towards home, in oixov. 
 
 em with dative denotes in addition to, besides ; close 
 by (as im r^ norafi^) ; an aim, or condition (266), and 
 the being in one^s power (65). 
 
 «W with genit. often marks the time by means of some- 
 thing contemporary, generally a contemporary per 
 son (65). 
 
 To come for } (to effect it), iX&uv im rovicp. 
 this, \ (to fetch it), " " tovto. 
 
 6' 
 
130 [ti]. fit] ov. 
 
 To be drawn up four deep, snl TazzaQoiv Tszaxdou. 
 To be named after a per- » » . '.,„„, 
 
 To endure a thing for the , , , . 
 sake of praise, 
 
 Exercise 55. 
 
 289. Be sure to be here yourself (287*. d). Take care 
 that your children may be as good" as possible^" (287*. a). 
 Be sure to behave like men worthy of the liberty you 
 possess. Take care not to say what has often hurt you. 
 Take care to injure nobody. The Grecian Hopliles were 
 drawn up three deep. Cyrus marched for Sardis with 
 (part.) his Grecian Hoplites. He said that these things 
 were not in his power. ^^ They made (mid.) a treaty on 
 tiiese conditions. He is named after the great king. 
 He said that his boy was named after Thales, the phi- 
 losopher. They killed him whilst he was at dinner. 
 The Athenians, though {p) they were able to take the city, 
 nevertheless sailed back home. In addition to all this, the 
 Athenian generals have already sailed home. He told me 
 Ihat the general was not of a character" to act unjustly 
 by the citizens. They are not sent out (ore an under- 
 standing that they are) to be slaves (227. b). He says 
 that he dwells close by the river. He is very ambitious, 
 so as (211) to do every thing for praise. He said that 
 the corpse was of a superhuman size." He said that he 
 had suffered things too great for tears." Do not do 
 this pray. They will assuredly not obey the laws of 
 the city. Leave off chattering. 
 
 ^ 49. [11]. [iq ov. 
 
 290. a. b) After expressions of fear, solicitude, un- 
 "iertainty, &c. jmjJ is used with the subjunctive or indie. 
 
 "* BeKrt<TTOi, 
 
[ATI. Jll] OVi 131 
 
 Od3, The iru^fc. is used when the,spe3]!:er wishes to intimate hia 
 conviction that the thing feared, &c. has or will really come to pass. 
 Of course l\iesubj. becomes the ovt. in connection with time pott. 
 and in a dependent proposition. (70, 71.) 
 
 ■ 291. ' c) The notion oi fear is often omitted before (lij 
 ou, the verb being then generally in the subj. 
 
 292. f. g) firiov is also' used with the. infin. after 
 many negative expressions: — 
 
 1) After to hinder, deny, fed misgiving, &c. when they have a 
 negative with them; if not (as in 293.' e), they are used withjuij, 
 wl;ierc we use no negative.t 
 
 2) .After such expressions as ^civov etvat, aiay^p6v or aiaj^vvijv sivat, 
 
 ai!ry(<.vc{T8at. 
 
 3) After such negative expressions as, to be unable, impossible, 
 not Ttght, &c. 
 
 4) pi oi is also sometimes used with the participle i and with 
 Zt T£ and infin., after negative expressions. 
 
 293. a) BsdotHd uri &dvm, I fear that /shall die. 
 
 SedoMu fiTj oi ■Odvm, l fear that /shall not 
 die. 
 6) (fo^ov/iai ixi] svQi^aofisv, I fear we shall find. 
 cpo^ovfiai fi ri afKpotsQiov ^ fiaQf^KUfigv, I fear 
 that we have missed (lost) both. 
 
 c) alia fiij ovx y diSaxrov, but perhaps it is a 
 
 thirig that cannot be taught. 
 
 d) £1 ds vepijaofts&a inl ^aailei, zl i/fTzodav firi 
 
 o iipft Ttdvia ra diivozara na&ovrag dno&a- 
 vsTv ; but if we shall fall into the power 
 of the king, what will prevent us from . 
 being put to death, after suffering all 
 that is most terrible ? 
 
 e) ancxailvaai rovg 'Elltivag /irj il&sTv, to pre- 
 
 vent the Greeks from coming, tiqvovv- 
 TO [iti nEnratxiiiai, they (denied that they 
 had fallen) said that they did not fall. 
 umatovvTEg avTov fiij ^^siv, not believing 
 that he would come. 
 
 <■ But the ftri is not always expressed after verbs of hindering, pre 
 
 **, ■ Thus. ivoiSyriTos yap Sv j etriv roiavSs ^n oi KaroiKrsipiov ISpay (Soph 
 Ar.f. 96.) • 
 
132 
 
 liij. Ill] ov. 
 
 f) av yaq vnia^ov ^tiTj^aeiv,' as j ij^ oatov aoi o, 
 
 lit] oil ^oij&eTv BmawavvQ, for you prom- 
 ised to investigate it (with us), as hold- 
 ing it impious in you not to come ts 
 the assistance of justice. 
 
 g) ovTS 111] fitiivlqa&ai Svvaitat avtov, ovts ftsfivijiiB- 
 
 vos firi ovx Inatvilv, I can neither not re' 
 member him, nor remembering not 
 praise him. 
 
 293'. Vocabulary 4?. 
 Capable of being taught, 
 
 that can be taught, 
 Science, 
 
 Know, know how. 
 To fall into a person's 
 
 power or hands. 
 To prevent a person. 
 
 SiSaxToe, 1], 6v. 
 
 smazrifiri, tig, ii. 
 iniifrafiai. 
 
 pyvtdQai eni Tin. 
 
 ifinodtov ilvai fi^, or alter 
 negatives or in ques- 
 tions implying a nega- 
 tive, iMj ov. ixTioSav is, 
 out of the way of. 
 
 oaiog:^ SUatos, a, ov, (of 
 what is' permitted by 
 human law. 
 
 xaikvto, anotioii.vco. 
 
 aqvionai. 
 
 deidco.' 
 
 vnonTivm {accus. of person). 
 
 Preposition fistd. 
 Groverns genit., dative, and accus. 
 
 Right, lawful (as deter- 
 mined by divine or nat- 
 ural laws. 
 
 Fall, 
 
 Hinder, prevent, 
 
 To deny, 
 
 Pear, 
 
 Suspeqt, 
 
 • 282, note c. 
 
 ' liricTfijiat, iTnarfiaoitai, fiirtcrriji 
 
 ijK. Imp. rprtcrafiriv. 2 gtng. prtS. iir£> 
 
 s But as opposed to UfSs, ocno; relates to man, i. c. to natural laws, 
 dence Upa xal laia, ' divine and human things ' 
 
 ^ B-iirrw, Titaovjiai, iriirTUKa. i-nttrov. 
 
 « ItiSa, 6etiroiiat, iiSoim and iiSXa (both with meaning ofprea ) Ao> 
 I. lietnii: 
 
/«)/' WITH RELATIVES, &C. 133 
 
 Signification : with accus., after. 
 " " with genit., with. 
 " " with da?.(only in the poets),a9»o?i g, intei 
 
 Exercise 56. 
 
 294. I fear his coming to some harm {lest he should 
 suffer something). I feared the boy would come to 
 some harm. I fear we shall find, that (p) these things 
 are not so; I fear about my boy lest he should come to 
 some harm. The father, though he feared about his 
 boy, nevertheless went away. I cannot either go or 
 stay (110). I knew that they would prevent'* the king . 
 from coming (293. e) into the country. I fear that we 
 have treated them ill. I fear that the rascal will not 
 die. It is disgraceful not to defend Jhe laws of our 
 country. Nothing prevents this from being (293. e) 
 true. What prevents us from dying at once ? It is a 
 disgrace not to be without fear of death. It is a terrible 
 thing, not to bear what comes from the gods. It is not 
 right, not to choose to fight for one's country. It is not 
 right not to die for one's country, if it be necessary. I am 
 ashamed not to appear to have conferred great benefits 
 upon my country. I fear this will happen. After this 
 what prevents us from dying ? They sent out men tc 
 prevent them\ from coming into the country. 
 
 "^ 50. ftij with Relatives, the Infinitive, (fcc. 
 
 295. a. c) /i^ is used in relative sentences and with 
 participles, adjectives, &c., whenever the negative does 
 not directly and simply deny an assertion with respect 
 to some particular mentioned person or thing. 
 
 Hence lelative sentences, participles, and adjectives take nr, 
 
 * See 238*, the third example. 
 
134 fl^ WITH RELATIVES, &C. 
 
 whenever they might be resolved into a sentence with ' jf,' or de 
 scribe only a supposed case : not particular individuals, but individ- 
 uals otaclass.k 
 
 296. d) The infinitive generally takes jwij, except 
 where the opinions or assertions of another person are 
 stated {in sermone obliquo). See 110. 
 
 297. b) With Saais' the infinitive takes f«J, the in- 
 dicative oi- 
 
 298. a) t ig 8s dovvai Svvarai ezsQc^, a [lij avrbs iffii ; 
 
 but who can give to another what he has 
 not got himself? 
 h) aaifolEidv coi trags^ovzai., ccTcrze as (ii]8eia 
 XvTTsTv, they will afford you security, i,o 
 that no man shall annoy you. 
 nqdyfiata iiageTj^ov, caoTS ovxiii iSvvato 
 to azqarivjia tiogsvsa&ai, they harassed 
 them, so that the army could not ad- 
 vance further {any longer). 
 
 c) ovdsis . . . oatig fit] nagtazctt, no one who shall 
 
 not be present (or, who is not present)." 
 6 uri marsvcav, he who does not believe, 
 ta [Ml Kald, dishonorable things. 
 
 d) TO iiij iifiKV yiqovzag avoawv iau, it is wrong 
 
 (an unholy thing) not to honour old men. 
 
 e) (Ml ylvono," may it not be so ! fii] idoig rovto, 
 
 m,ay you never see this ! 
 
 ' The thing to be considered, with respect to a relative or parti- 
 cipial clause, is, whether it introduces some new particular concerning 
 the object spoken of, or forms one complex notion with it. In this way 
 it merely restricts the general notion to a particular sense ; the tiling 
 epoken of being, not the substantive itself, but the substantive so limited. 
 
 ' Or iii, which is used (though less frequently) in the same way. 
 
 " In connection with future time, the Greeks and Romans marked 
 the futurity of the condition or connected notion. We generally do 
 not. Thus in the example we should say, ' a man who is not present,' 
 taking that as a general notion, without referring it to the time of the 
 othei verb. The future must be used when it is necessary to mark this 
 out ; but to use it always, as some writers do, who plume themselves 
 upon their accuracy, is against the idiom of our language ; of which 
 any fine may convince himself by examining a few consecutive pagc3 
 of th^s English Bible. 
 
 = Translated by ' God forbid ! ' in the English Bible. 
 
Uri WITH REIiATIVES,,&C. 
 
 135 
 
 299. Vocabulary 50. 
 
 One who has slain a man 
 with his own hand, the 
 actual murderer, 
 
 Wrong, wicked, impious. 
 
 Security, safety from dan- 
 ger, 
 
 Safe, 
 
 To be in safety, to be safe. 
 
 Voluntarily, 
 
 Lazy, idle. 
 
 avzopiQ, QQs, 6 ettj (one ter- 
 
 min.) 
 
 utoaiog, OS, or. (See 293*.) 
 
 aaqiaXrig, ■^g, s'g. 
 
 Iv T9 aaqialu that. 
 
 ideXovTrjg,' ov, 6. 
 
 aqyog, 6g, 6v (from «, eqyov) 
 
 Preposition nuqa. 
 
 Governs genit., dative, and accus. 
 
 Signification : with genit. from, after such verbs as to 
 
 receive, learn, brijig, come; and with the agent after 
 
 the passive verb. 
 With the accus., to, and (in answer to where 7) at. nagu 
 
 with the ace. has also the meaning of the Latin prcB' 
 
 ter ; besides, beyond, against. 
 With the dative, beside, along side of, by, among &c. ; 
 
 as eari^ Tiaga t^ ^aatlsi, " he stood in the king's pres 
 
 ence ;" nag ifioi, " in my opinion" (meojudicio.) 
 
 Besides his brsad, 
 Beyond, more than the 
 
 others. 
 Against the laws of the 
 
 gods. 
 Contrary to or beyond 
 
 what was expected. 
 
 naga rov agror. 
 naga roiig aXXovg. 
 
 naga. lovg rav &smv -dsfffiovg. 
 
 fiaga do^av. 
 
 Phrases. 
 
 ^ had a narrow escape from naga /iixghv ijl&ov ano 
 
 death, ■davslv. 
 
 r had a narrow escape, nag' oXiyov Sis'qivyov. 
 
 ' Properly, as a volunteer. 
 
136 SOME ADVERBS OF TIME, &C. 
 
 Exercise 57. 
 
 300. He who [p) does not love his father, is impious 
 I fear it may he impious not to honour old men. No one 
 who is not present (298. c), shall receive money. I en- 
 treat you not to stay. The sons of the Persians of the. 
 present day^^ pursue what is dishonorable. He who 
 (p)does not trust God, Aas become miserable, un- 
 known to himself.''^ Not to love one's own children is 
 wicked. It is not possible for me to give you what I do 
 not possess myself. He is too wise" not to know that. 
 Not to do good to your friends, when (p) you can, is 
 wicked. Pursue those things which are not (p) against 
 the laws of the gods. He said that, if there was any oc- 
 casion, he would labour" more than the rest. Know 
 that I will incur'^ this danger with you {ph) Besides 
 his bread he has wine. I am conscious''' of having had 
 a narrow escape from death. He was very lazy, so as 
 to undergo no labour voluntarily. He was very lazy, 
 so that he underwent no labour, at least willingly.*'' 
 I had a narrow escape from those who were pursuing 
 me. These things happened contrary to what was ex- 
 pected. If we conquer the barbarians in*^ one more 
 battle, we shall be in safety. I have received this wine 
 from the faithful slave. They denied that they were 
 (293. e) the actual murderers. I suspect p that this is 
 impious. He went away, because (p) he suspected 
 that it was impious to remain. Shall we say this (99) 
 or not ? 
 
 § 51. Some Adverbs of Time, 6fc. 
 
 301. a) Some adverbs govern a noun in the same 
 case as the adjectives from which they are derived. 
 
 p iffoirrrfu is followed by ace. and infin., or (when it implies, fear) 
 Tty jifj, viroTTTevffas /x$ rt irpds rijs wAcwj inatrtov tirjf &c. (Xen A.r, 
 
 iii. 1, H ) 
 
SiOME IDVERBS OF TIME, &C. 13V 
 
 302. 1) Hence comparatives and superlatives take 
 the genitive. 2) Some particles are sometimes simply 
 adverbs, and sometimes ^re;posj<ioMs governing a case • 
 e. g. uficc o/Jiov, together : — «/««, (or 6[iov'^ zoTg aXXotg. 
 
 303. 6) wg, as a preposition (= nQog), is only joined to 
 nersons. 
 
 304. Some adverbs, especially relative ones, refer to 
 verbs and whole clauses, and thus connect propositions 
 This is the origin of conjunctions. 
 
 305. d) axQi or f^e'^^Qi, scos « and sate, both in the sense 
 of 'until,' and in that of ' as long as,' govern the subj. 
 or opt. when there is any uncertainty ; the indie, when 
 not. 
 
 306. ]) Of course the opt. will appear without a* 
 in oratione obliqua, even where there is no uncertainty. 
 2) Hence, when a thing is spoken of as an object or 
 purpose contemplated, the subj. with av' will be used 
 in connection with pres. oi future time ; the optative,' in 
 connection with past time and the oratio obliqua. 
 
 307. e) nQiv, as being a comparative, takes »; (which 
 however is often omitted), and generally the infinitive, 
 but the subj. with av, if the event is future. 
 
 Hence the subj. with an will be used after the imperative and^- 
 twe with negatives : i. e. when before = till. 
 
 308. a) a^iag rifimv noXe/i^aoi^sv, we will conduct 
 
 the war in a manner worthy of ourselves. 
 6^- ehijl&sv CO g ifte, he came in to me. 
 
 'i t^^ypis ov ia often found : So sus ov, &c. 
 
 ' With TrpiK and livixa, and (in poetry) with jilxP't "XP'' '"s> *^^ 
 subj. is sometimes found without Siv. (K.) 
 
 • And according to Hermann (against EUnsley) with &v. " tJbi in 
 rectS oratione ir^iv an et similes particuls conjunctivum requirunt, in 
 oratione obliquS manet av, sed conjiinctivo substitnitur optativus ut pro- 
 prius orationis obliquse modus." (Praef. ad Track, p, 8.) — Hartnng says : 
 " When the optative thus takes (in oblique narration) the place of the 
 subjunctive (in direct), the particle 3i> may, whenever one pleases, be 
 left at his old post." (Partikellehre, ii. 304.) — Poppo, however, rejects 
 Sv from Xen. An. vii. 7, 35. tSiovro /if] dTre^Qeiv irpiv dtv duayayot to irrpa' 
 nv/ia (which in direct narration would K>. jtii dmXSrii irpii» Sk d^rayiym 
 . . . ), a passage quoted by Hartung. 
 
138 SOME ADVERBS OF TIME, &C. 
 
 c) itttqiaofiai hnois xEXivasig, I will be with you 
 
 whenever you bid me. 
 
 d) nSQiiisvoo img av (or fiifqig av) ti.&ri, I will 
 
 ivait till he comes (venerit). 
 noi]]aov zomo stag hi l|«(TTt, c?o if/tis whilst 
 
 you still may. 
 ears (/««»') at anovdai rflav, ovnore STKtvoftijti 
 
 rjnas oixreiQBJv, as long as the treaty lasted, 
 
 I never ceased to think upon ourselves 
 
 with pity, 
 ovnors X^yovaiv saz u v agj^maiv aizcop, they 
 
 7iever leave offiiW they rule over them. 
 
 e) nq\v ri tXOslv ifii (or nqiv il&av ifts <■ before I 
 
 came, nqiv av eX&m, till I come {=ti\\ I 
 shall have come ; venero). 
 
 309. TOCABULARY 51. 
 
 Near, ey^vg. 
 
 Near the city, syyvg tifg nolsmg. 
 
 Apart, X'^Q'S- 
 
 Apart from, or without the X'"Q^s zav aXXmv (so dixa 
 
 rest, zivog). 
 
 Immediately, directly, eli&vg. 
 
 Directly or straight to the ^.^^ , - ^,^ 
 
 foimediatel y on his arrival, av&vg tixcov. 
 From our verv birth, as '«> » 
 
 soon as we are born, 
 
 Most of all, itdlusTa nittrnv. 
 
 Except a very few, n^nv navv blqm. 
 
 Except if, nXriv el. 
 
 Out of, without the city. Igw r^s nolmg. 
 
 Exercise 58. 
 210. Do not go away till I come. I will not cease 
 
 ' Also irpiv ^Mov iyiS. The preceding clause has often jrp6a6tv in it 
 which makes the vplv appear superfluous. 
 
 » fiSvs and rfft) are no more diilerent words than /il^fs "nd /lexP' \ 
 but the Attics generally used Mvs 6{ time, ciBv of place. It is only acci 
 dentally, that ciOis is identical in form with the masc. adjectiTe. 
 
ON INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 
 
 139 
 
 fighting till I have conquered you. It is not possihle foi 
 you to conquer your enemies out of the city, till you 
 have chastised those in the city itself. He went away 
 before I came. I was banished myself before you re- 
 turned-from-banishment. Whilst you are still at leisure, 
 speak. We were afraid, till (^s^gts) the Greeks sailed 
 away. They did not cease till {before) they sent for the 
 boy's father. We used to wait about ' till the gates 
 were opened. I will not go away till {before) I have 
 conquered you. He said, that he would come to us, 
 whilst he still might. Do not cease, till you have mas- 
 tered your temper. Whil st you remain, combat the boy's 
 disorder. He said that he feared the gods most, when- 
 ever he was most prosperous {was doing best). The 
 general went in to the king. And they {of persons be- 
 fore mentioned, 38) obeyed, except if any man stole 
 any thing. He said that he was nearly related" to him. 
 They march straight to the city. Immediately on his 
 arrival, he told me that we^ought to set about'' the task. 
 Prom our very birth we want many things. He died as 
 soon as he was born. 
 
 § 52. On Interrogative Sentences, 
 
 311. Besides the interrogative adverbs and pronouns, 
 the following particles are used in questions. 
 
 312. aqa is mostly used in questions that imply some- 
 Ihing of uncertainty, doubt, or surprise. 
 
 313. The answer ' Yes' is expected by, — 
 
 aQ ov; ^ 7«'Q } ov; ovxovv ; ailo ri ij; 
 
 314. The answer ' No' is expected by, — 
 
 aga [ti^ ; ij nov {num forte 1) fi^ or (tav , " 
 
 w pui;=fi^ ovu : but the etymology being forgotten, avv is Bometiraet 
 aaed with it. Also n5vf.fi; and jiSv oi ; the latter Te quiring an ssaen;- 
 ing answer (==nonne ?) 
 
140 ON INTEKEOGATIVE SENTENCES. 
 
 Ob3. oi expects yes ; nTi,no. — oi! is often followed by jifiroc! also 
 by Sij, In irou, with which it has an ironical (oice, I imagine, foreactk, 
 Also ovn TTov, 
 
 315. h. i) sha, snura {then — and yet — and neverthe- 
 less) express astonishment and displeasure, implying 
 that what they suppose has been done, is inconsistent 
 with something before mentioned. 
 
 316. k) From the frequent use ofaXXo ri rt, it came to 
 be used as a simple interogative particle, and the ^ 
 was often dropt.=' It is then better to write it as one 
 word, alloTi (K.) 
 
 317. rina&m ; {having suffered what ? = ) what pos- 
 
 sesses you to . . . &c.? 
 ft fna&cov ; {having learnt what? =what in- 
 duces you to . . . &c. 'f 
 
 These phrases are used in indignant, reproachful questions : Ihe 
 former obviously relates to the feelings ; the latter to the under 
 standing, and consequently to more deliberate oiTences. 
 
 318. a) ag evrvxiis ; are you prosperous ? 
 ' OLQ ovx eativ aa^evrig ; is not he ill 7 ) r-y-p- -i 
 
 he is ill, isn't he?) <■ '' 
 aqa firi iariv aa&svrig ; is he ill? ) r^y 
 
 he is not ill, is he? \'- 
 
 c) t] !zov lEToXiiTjxag tavra ; you have not surely 
 dared to do this ? [No.] 
 
 d) ri yag, sdv ti igojT^ oe Saxgdr^e, anoxgivsl ; if 
 
 Socrates puts any question to you, you 
 
 will answer him, will you not ? [Yes.] 
 c) ovti 71 ov iym dygom^o/itti / surely I am not 
 
 behaving rudely am, I? [No.] 
 /) II mv 71 as adutsT;^ he has not injured you in 
 
 any respect has he ? [No.] 
 g) l*V '^i vemTsgov' dyysU,Eig ; you bring no bad 
 
 news I hope, do you? [No.] 
 
 ^ Stallbaum thinks it was dropt in animated, impassioned ques- 
 lions, and retained in those of a more sedate and iober character. 
 
 7 The present of this word is used for the perfect, for a man con- 
 tinues to wrong us till he has made us reparation. (Heindorf, Protag. 
 463.) 
 
 » rsiHTepov for plov (a new thing ; news), and that per ewphemismun 
 (ovKaic6ii. (Heind. Proi. 461.) 
 
 h) 
 
ON INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 141 
 
 A) elrjatyag IlXovrog mv ; and did you then 
 hold your tongue, you Plutus 7 
 
 i) S 71 sir ovx oiEi ^sovg av&Qcanmv rt qigovti^siv ; 
 do you then really not think that the 
 gods regard mankind ? 
 
 k) aXXo Ti i] nsQi nlsiarov noiy,07img lag ^sXtiarot 
 ol vsarsQoi saovrat ; do not you look upon 
 it as a thing of extreme importance, 
 that the rising generation should turn 
 out as well as possible ? 
 aXXon ovv oiys (fikoxsqMg (fiXovai to xegdoi . 
 < what ! do not the covetous love gain 7 
 
 319. "Vocabulary 52. 
 
 To strike, ivittta. 
 
 Free, iXsv&sQog, a, or. 
 
 Weak, ill, aaOsvyg, ■qg, ig [a, a&e't'og. 
 
 strength). 
 Weakness, infirmity, a , ., 
 complaint, ua&svs^a, ug. q. 
 
 Fond of gain, qnXonsgdijg, ^g, s'g. 
 
 Preposition ngog. 
 
 Governs genit., dative, and accus. 
 
 Signification: to, close by ; in answer to whither 7 ngog 
 generally takes the accus. : in answer to where ? the 
 dative. 
 
 With ace. ngog also means towards, against, in refer- 
 ence to, with a view to, in comparison of 
 
 With genit^ ngog means from, by (after to hear, to be 
 praised or blamed by, and frequently after the pas- 
 sive verb). 
 
 It is also used with genit. of situation and in adjura- 
 tions. 
 
 I am wholly wrapt up in ^ / r, , , 
 
 .,. •' ' ^ 71 g g T V T (^ oi,og sifii. 
 
 To pay close attention to , _ t > a. 
 
 one's affairs, "^°^ "'* >tguriiaci pr^e,j9au 
 
 In addition to this, ngog rovzoig. 
 
142 ON INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 
 
 To fight against a person, ngog riva. 
 
 To calculate with one- Xoylt.ia&ai nqog iaviiv (^sa 
 
 self, with axinzsa&ai, anonnv, 
 
 to consider). 
 
 To be dishonoured by, ttziiid^Ea&ai nqog rivoa 
 
 On the father's side, nqog narqag. 
 1) To be consistent with, 
 
 like, characteristic of; 2) 
 
 to be on his side; 3) to , , 
 
 make for him, to be for *^''«"'eo? ^ivog. 
 
 his interest ; to be a good 
 
 thing for him. 
 
 Exercise 59. 
 
 320. Are not these things for our interest rather than 
 for that of our enemies (318. b)1 Is not he wholly wrapt 
 up in these things 1 You do not surely wish to have 
 wine in addition to your bread (318. c)? I do not swre^y 
 act insolently do I (318. e)1 You are not come to bring us 
 (;>) any bad news, I hope {are you)! [No.] And are you, 
 then, not without fear of death, though (p) a pious man 
 (318. h) ? And do you, then, not think that you shall 
 be punished for what you have done {p. pass.) against 
 the laws of the gods ? What possesses you to strike ° 
 a free man? What induces you not to choose to stay 
 with us any longer? What possesses you, tTiat you 
 will not cease to behave-insolently'' towards your 
 friends ? These things are not more for the interest of 
 our enemies than of us, are they? [No.] Have you 
 been in any respect dishonoured by Xenoclides ? Do 
 you not think it a most important thing, that your child- 
 ren should be brought up as well as possible (318. k)! 
 It is not like a pious man to fear death excessively. 
 The other party are more on Cyrus's side. Know that 
 these things are" for the interest of Cyrus. I know that 
 he is on the side of the Athenians. De we not both see 
 and hea.r from our very birth ?°' 
 
 " Translate as if it were, 'having suffered what do you strikf ?' &c 
 
INDIRECT SINGLE QUESTIONS. 143 
 
 ^ 53. Indirect single Q,uesiions. 
 
 321. a) The proper forms for indirect questions are 
 those pronouns and adverbs which are formed from the 
 direct interrogatives by the prefixed relative syllable 
 a — , which gives them a connecting power. 
 
 Thus from ttiJo-os; Trotosj tov} TrdQev} ^wy; &c. are formed hTiiaos, 
 
 So Suns, formed by prefixing the relative to n's, Is the propel de 
 pendent interrogative. See 72, note y. 
 
 322. But as the Greeks often pass from oblique, to 
 direct narration, so they often use the simple interroga- 
 tives in dependent questions; and even, as in {b),inter- 
 mix the two. 
 
 323. c) Occasionally, though very seldom, the rela~ 
 tive forms tkettiselves are used in dependent questions. 
 
 c) When, aa in this example, a pronoun or noun is the accus. 
 after the first verb, and the nam. before the second, it is generally 
 expressed in the accua.,^ and not in the nominative. 
 
 324. d) When the person of whom the question is 
 asAred repeats it, he uses the forms beginning with 6 — . 
 
 325. a) oix oJdu (or ov» «;f m) onoi rqanwiiai. (See 72. 6). 
 
 ovK oJda oat ig iati, I don't know who he 
 is. ovx olSa a 71 (a g to nQayjiO, inqa^iv,! 
 don't know how he did the thing, aao- 
 xQirai dv8QSt(og on otsqu aoi qiaivetai, an- 
 swer boldly which of the two is your 
 opinion. 
 
 b) idfisv'' noaa ts Jan xai bno ta, we know both 
 
 how many they are, and of what kind. 
 
 c) OQug ovv fjfteig, eqi?], oaoi icfiiv ; do you see, 
 
 said he, how many we are 7 (or hmv 
 many there are of us 7) 
 
 ' The accusative is generally retained in the Engliah Bible ; *' I 
 know thee, who thou art," &e. 
 ° See 71. c. 
 
144 INDIRECT SINGLE QITESTIONS. 
 
 d) ovTog,^ ri noiBig ; — 0,11 nom ; you there,whai 
 are you doing 7 — what am I doing ? 
 
 326. Vocabulary 53. 
 
 Preposition vnu. '*' 
 
 Governs genit., dative, and accus. 
 
 Signification: with genit., by, after passive verb's and 
 
 active verbs with a passive notion. Also, to express 
 
 a cause ; from, out of, through. 
 With dat., under, after verbs of rest only: sometimes. 
 
 instead of the gen., after passive verbs {da/il^rai vnb 
 
 Tivi). 
 With accus., under, after verbs of rest as well as verbs 
 
 of motion. Also, about, ot time. 
 
 To die by the hands of, dno&avEtv inh {gen). 
 
 To learn by compulsion, in' dvdyKijg. 
 
 He diiit through 01 from , , „, /,, ,^ 
 
 J- ° •' vno oeovg [oeog, ovg, to). 
 
 jear, 
 
 To be mad from intoxica- ' \ ,^ / „ 
 jj vno /.tsiTijg ftansal/ai,. 
 
 At or about nightfall, iizo vixra {sub noctem). 
 
 Exercise 60. 
 
 327. The slave died by the hands of his master. 
 Most boys learn by compulsion. I perceived ( p) that 
 the boy learnt by compulsion. I do not repent of hav- 
 ing learnt^* these things by compulsion. He said that 
 the shameless flatterer was mad from intoxication. 
 The few are wounded by the many. I will go away on 
 condition that (269. e) you will yourselves set out at 
 nightfall. Do you see, said he, how many men are 
 wounded by a few ? I don't know how the eagle had 
 his ej5e knocked out.*' I shall praise (all) whom I see 
 (94. 1) marching in good order. How much would your 
 possessions fetch, if they were sold? He says that he 
 
 * airos, avrri, are used (instead of ooc.) in exclamations ; you there ' 
 
DOUBLE CiOESTIONS. 145 
 
 will hold his tongue though he should have " much to 
 say. If the slave should die by your hands, you will be 
 punished. Do you see how many there are of the ene- 
 my? He. says that he has been entrusted with these 
 things.^' These things happened about the same time. 
 
 <^ 54. Double Questions. 
 
 328. Direct double questions are asked by noTSQOv 
 (or noTSQo) — rj, less commonly by oqu — ij. 
 
 Rem. fidu — !i ig still less common : 5 — 3 belongs to poetry, espe- 
 cially epii poetry. 
 
 329. Tndirnct double questions are asked by Eire— 
 EiTS : u — 5 : noTSQov — jj. 
 
 Rest. 5—5 belongs to epic poetry, though occasionally found in 
 Atiic poets, em — S, and ei — citc, are also used by poets. 
 
 330. a) noTSQov sxpovrai Kvgqi, ^ ov ; will they follow 
 
 Cyrus or not 7 
 TiQiv 8iji.ov thai . . . ftoTSQOv hpovxai Kvqo^, ^ 
 ov, be/ore it was known, whether, &c. 
 
 b) TovTcp tov vovv ngooBf^s, il Sittaia liyto, ^ fxij, 
 
 attend to this, whether what I speak is 
 just or not. 
 
 c) axojiwiiBV BITS flxog ovtajg £][Etv, sirs (iri, let us 
 
 consider whether it is likely to be so, or 
 not. 
 
 331. Vocabulary 54 
 
 The road home, ^ oixuBb ' odos ■ 
 
 To suffer a thing to be 
 
 done, to allow it to be nigioQcico.' 
 
 done with impunity. 
 
 • oiitaSe Is from the ace. of a shortei form (such as oil, a!ic6s) of o'ltot. 
 Though this form does not occur, several similar ones do ; e. g. aX«(, 
 KftSxa, for dXK0, Kp6Kiiv. (B.) 
 
 *■ It takes the infinitive if the thing is to be prevented; the partici- 
 ple if it is to be avenged. Of course (by 73, note r) mpuSciv will be used 
 for aor., -irepiitpcdOai for fut. — The phrase brings to one's mind our ' tn 
 
 7 
 
146 OBSERVATIONS ON «, BCIP. 
 
 Boldly, ■0-a^^mv (participle). 
 
 Restore an exile, xaToiym. 
 
 To pay attention to, to at- rov row ngoaixsiv, or nqoi4 
 
 tend to, ■xuv only, with daU 
 
 liikely, natural, stxof.^ 
 
 Exercise 61. 
 
 332. I don't know whether he is alive or dead. If 
 you attend to your afiairs yourselves, all will be well. 
 If you attended to your affairs yourselves, all would be 
 well. If you had attended to your affairs yourselves, 
 all would be well. I will not allow our Jand to have 
 been ravaged with impunity. Are the same dogs piu- 
 aiing the sheep, or not? Go away boldly on co7idition 
 of holding your tongue. 
 
 I fear that we shall forget our road home. I knew 
 that they would not suffer'^ their country to be ravaged. 
 O citizens, let us not suffei our country to be ravaged. 
 They will not stand hy and see us injured. They 
 made peace on condition that both (parties) should re- 
 tain {have') their own. He said that Xenoclides was 
 too wise"" to be deceived by his slaves. He says that 
 more arms were taken than could have been expected 
 from the number of the dead?' He says that he'^ is 
 not afraid of death. The king sent persons to restore 
 {the exile) Xenoclides (238*, third example). 
 
 § 55. Observations on tl, lav. 
 
 333. a) d is used for on {that, after O^avfid^m, and 
 some other verbs expressive at feelings. 
 
 ftand by and see' (a man injured) ; but it gets its meaning in a different 
 way ; i. e. not from the notion of seeing and yet not acting, but from 
 that of not seeing, of looking round about an object instead of a* it. 
 ilence it agrees more nearly with our to overlook (an offence). 
 
 * Neut. oftiVwf, part, offoma {am Ziie), which has three formsot 
 
OBSERVATIONS ON El, idv. 147 
 
 This arises from the Attic habit of avoiding positivcnese in speak- 
 ing ; which, in this case, speaks of what may be quite certain as 
 only probable. 
 
 334. b) sl is (as we have seen, 80) used for ' whether .-' 
 t lias this meaning after verbs of seeing, knowing; con- 
 sidering, asking, saying, trying, &c. 
 
 335. idv is also used in this way with the subjunctive 
 when the question relates to an expected case that re- 
 mains to be proved. (K.) 
 
 336. a) ay avuKtm si ovrascn^' a voa fir} owg % si/it 
 
 sinsiv, lam indignant at being so unable 
 to express my meaning. 
 
 ovx dyana, d [itj Sixtjv sSanisr, he is not con- 
 tented with not having been punished. 
 
 ■d-ttViidZto sl uriSsis vfimv ogyi^stat, I am as- 
 tonished, that not one amongst you is 
 angry, 
 b) axstpai' sl o'EXk/pav rofiog xdlhov s](si, con- 
 ' sider whether the Grecian law is better. 
 
 axsxfitti iar tods aoi (lallov dgsaxri, see 
 whether this pleases you better. 
 fi)}8e Tovto aQQijTov sarca ftoi, idv as nmg nslaw, 
 nor let me leave this unsaid, if I may by 
 any m^eans persuade you (i. e. that I 
 may see whether) I can, &c. 
 
 337. Vocabulary 55. 
 
 Am indignant, dyavaxism (dative; but it 
 
 takes the accus. of a nent, 
 pro?i.) 
 
 O Athenians, w avdQsg ^A&tivaioi. 
 
 Please, ap/axco' (dat.y 
 
 ^ Demonstrative pronouns and adverbs are strengthened by what is 
 called the i demonstrativum, which is a long accented i answering to 
 •ce in Lat. Short vowels are thrown away before it. oiroai (this man 
 Aere), o^m?, to«ti, &c. So o^roici. 
 
 ■ The Attics use ckottS, ma-Totftat, {or present (not mcTTnitai), but nS 
 if pat^ laKvpajiriv, and laKEiifiai, from uKtTTTOjjiat , depon. middle. 
 
 ** dgzcKi)S, dp£(7(i}, &C- perf. pass. Yiptojjai : i/pttrOiji/. 
 
148 CONDENSED QUESTIONS. 
 
 Exercise 62. 
 
 338. It is this very thing, O Athenians, that I am in- 
 dignant at,i that you allow half your country (58) to 
 have been ravaged with impunity. This it is that I am 
 indignant at. Cyrus being indignant, sets out with 
 {part.) five horsemen for Sardis. He pleases more men 
 than any other single person."* He says that he is of a 
 mild disposition (137. a). I asked him whether the 
 king was of a mild disposition or not. Do you see how 
 many are suffering the same as you (182. a) 1 Do you 
 know of what kind the laws of the Persians are (323) ? 
 You there, what do you say? — What do I say ! Al- 
 though, if any man is of a mild disposition, it is he." 
 I wonder that you are not able to go in without being 
 observed.'"' He says that he is not of a character to do 
 any thing whatever for the sake of gain (283). 
 
 ^ 56. Condensed Questions. 
 
 339. a. b. c) By attaching the interrogative to a par- 
 ticiple, or using it in an oblique case, the Greeks employ 
 a single sentence in questions where we must use two. 
 
 Rem. Thus in translating from English into Greek, a relative 
 clause attached to an interrogative one will be got rid of. 
 
 340. a) liavnoiovvtE? uvaXd^otsv rriv aqialav agsT^r: 
 
 what must they do to recover their an- 
 cient virtuel (or, by what conduct can 
 they, &c.?) 
 b) Karafisfid&riKOig ovv tovg n noiovvtas to 
 ovoiia. 70V10 dnoxaXovaiv ; (have you learnt 
 = ) do you know, then, what those persons 
 do, to whom men apply this name ? 
 
 1 I am indignant at this thing itself. 
 
CONDENSED QUESTIONS. 149 
 
 c) tivag zovaS bqa ^s'vovs ; who are these 
 strangers whom I behold ? 
 
 341. VOCABULAKY 56. 
 
 With what object in view, n' ^ovlonsvog; 
 
 By Jupiter, vn Jla, or vi] lov "> Ma. 
 
 No, by Jupiter, fia. Jia. 
 
 Apollo, 'AizoXliov," oovoe, o. 
 
 Neptune, IloaeiSmv, arog, 6. 
 
 Minerva, 'A&rivn, ag, 17. 
 
 Swallow, x^7.id(av,° ovog, fj. 
 
 Nightingale, ariSm,^ ovog {ovg), ^. 
 
 Spring, ««?,' euQog, to. 
 
 Once, ana^. 
 
 Bring, lead, &ym. 
 
 To burn out, hxaim. 
 
 Peacock, Tamg, to, 0. 
 
 Exercise 63. 
 
 342. One swallow does not make a spring. He told 
 me that one swallow did not make a spring. I asked 
 by what conduct I should please the gods. The eagle 
 is having its eyes burnt out." He says that the eagle 
 has had its eyes burnt out. With what view did the 
 other party march into the country of the Scythians the 
 same spring ? The peacock lays only once a year. He 
 (p) who commits no injury,' requires no law. By 
 Apol lo, I will be with you, if I am wanted. By Minerva, 
 I will free the boy from his disorder. Who is this phy 
 sician that you are bringing (340. c) 1 Will you not go 
 away at once ? — No, by Jupiter, not I {iymys). Even if 
 
 ■" The art. is generally uaed except in /li or po Ai'a. 
 
 " 'AriXAiDi' and IIi><rcii!aii/ have ace. 'A^niXXto, noutiJw, voc.'AmXf,,,, 
 
 ° X^KiStav. V. ;^£X«Jor. 
 P dtiitav, has also G. dtiSovst V. aiiSoT, 
 
 1 In prose lap is nom. in use ; but the gen. and dat. are of the con- 
 a^cted form, ijpo;, Jfpi. 
 
 ' Who injures not ai all. 
 
150 VARIOUS CONSTRUCTIONS. 
 
 you should be unseen by others, you will at least be con- 
 scious" yourself of haying acted unjustly. What do those 
 sons do with whom all men, so to speak,*' are angry 
 (340. 6) ? He envies every body." By Neptune, there 
 is nobody he does not plot against (277). Envy nobody. 
 The nightingale sings most beautifully. 
 
 >§> 57. Various Constructions. 
 
 343. a) ri fi^v is a solemn form of asseveration. 
 
 344. b) The prepos. civ is omitted before wrrtp, airj, 
 &c. which then = together with, with. 
 
 345. c) a[t(pntsQov is used adverbially (or ellipticalli/) 
 by the poets ; both ; as well — as, <fcc. So unqjorsga is 
 used in reference to two words, without being made to 
 conform to them in case. 
 
 346. d) When xai refers to aXXog, it has the force of 
 especially, in particular. 
 
 347. e) sQxsa&ai, ts'vai, with part, fut., is to be going 
 to, or on the point of. 
 
 348. /. g) Sometimes «^oo makes an emphatic circum- 
 locution with the past particip. : and with some verbs 
 (e. g. the '2nd pers. of XriqiXv, ntf.it,uv, {fhia-qiiv) it is used to 
 make a good-humoured observation. 
 
 349. A) giegooi'appearsredundant in some expressions, 
 but denotes a vehemence of purposenot altogether free 
 from blame. 
 
 Hence it answers to our to go and do a (foolish, impetuous) Oiing ; 
 to take a thing andjling it away^ &c. 
 
 350. a) ^ fti]v ina&ov tovro, I protest that I suffered 
 
 this, ofivvpu ' ij [irjv doiasTv, I swear that I 
 will assuredly give (or, solemnly swear 
 that I will give). 
 
 ^ Suvvjit, ijiovitat. diibjfjiOKa, bijiotra. Perf. pass, d^u^oir/iaij but the oth£t 
 oersons and aor. 1. pass, more commonly without the a. 
 
VARIOUS CONSTRUCTIONS. 151 
 
 b) aTKokofto at vijeg avroTg avdguaiv, the skips 
 
 were lost together v^ith their crews. 
 
 c) dtaqisgovteg ^ aocpia ^ xdllst y aiKp otega, dis- 
 
 tinguished either for wisdom or beauty, 
 or both. 
 d") T a IS (iUji evSaifiovil Ka\ nalSag i^siKatt}- 
 xoovg avzqi, he is happy Both in other re- 
 spects and especially in having obedir,nt 
 children. 
 
 e) onsQ ^^a ' iQav, what I was going to say. 
 
 f) ndXai ■0-avfidaag s^m, I have long been 
 
 wondering. 
 
 g) nal^sig " exoav, you are joking. 
 
 h) inzs^alsv iavTov qp eg m v Qi]^aioig, he went and 
 flung himself into the hands of the Thc- 
 bans. 
 
 351. Vocabulary 57. 
 To swear, o/ivvfii (ace. of the god or 
 
 thing sworn by). 
 Just as he was ^tisq or mantg sJjfa-. 
 
 Exercise 64. 
 
 352. The damsel is beautiful in person (137) in other 
 respects, and especially has very beautiful eyes.'* He 
 swore that he would assuredly give them three talents 
 if he had them. I swear that I will assuredly do this. 
 I swear by all the gods that I will assuredly confer a 
 great benefit upon the state Those with the king, with 
 (p) iheir heads uncovered, charged the ranks of the 
 Greeks. He told me that the ships were lost, together 
 with their crews. He told me that, butfor^^ the gener- 
 al the ships would have been lost, together with their 
 crews. Are you not trying (me),' whether I am mad 
 
 ' Imperf. of tljit, ibo. 
 
 ■ zaf^a), nai^ofjiai, -oSjial, nivaiuiiai. Inaioa. Later writers have iitax^a, 
 wsTraiynat. (B.) 
 
 » TtsifaaSu takes gen., seldom ace. (Thue. i. 71.1 
 
152 VARIOUS CONSTRUCTIONS. 
 
 325. c) ? You are not trying (me) whether I am mad, art' 
 you ? Is he distinguished from » other people by (his) 
 wisdom, or (his) temperance, or both (350. c) ? Are you 
 joking, or are you mad ? Cyrus set out just as he was, 
 with five horsemen. He went and gave (350. h) all liis 
 possessions to his neighbour. I have long been wonder- 
 ing at the shamelessness of this flatterer (350./). 
 
 § 58. Various Constructions continued. 
 
 353. a) With dlxaiog, a^iog, (fee, the loersonal con- 
 struction is preferred to the impersonal. 
 
 354. b) oaov is used elliptically with the infinitive. 
 
 355. c) Some words that imply a comparison (e. g. 
 
 (p-Odvetv, diaqjSQSfv, ivavtlog, SinXdaiog, idiog, 
 vnsQ&sv, TZQi'r) often take the construction 
 with f 
 
 356. e) The verb note7v is often admitted after olds* 
 vilXo '■ ^ — , alio T( ij — ; tc aXlo ^ — ; &C. 
 
 357. /) A person's quoted words, when quoted ex- 
 actly as he uttered them, are introduced by ou. 
 
 Rem. Here the Greek idiom differs from our own: we omit '(half 
 when a person's words are quoted exactly, and insert it when not. 
 
 357*. g) After tt ov^ — ; (in questions) the aor. ap- 
 pears to be used for the present. 
 
 358. a) dixaiog slfii tovto jtQmtEi* (= dlxaiov iatit 
 
 " Does he differ from . . . ?) 
 
 » When the SAXo is spelt with an apostrophusin this phrase, it mostly 
 drops its accent, and thus looks like the abbreviated dXXa, but. The ac- 
 cent was dropt, because in some very similar phrases the d\X' is dx\d : 
 and in some others it is difficult to say whether it stands for SXXo or dXX4. 
 Wherever it certainly stands for aXXo, it should retain its accent. (See 
 364, note a.) 
 
 y ri ovvj E0J7, ov Sitiyiiaa /xot ; quin tu mihi narres? "Haec inter* 
 mgatio alacritaiem quondam animi et aviditatem sciendi exprimit.' 
 Weiske.) 
 
VAKIOUS CONSTRUCTIONS. 153 
 
 ifta rovro izQaTtstv), it is just (or right^ 
 that I should do this. 
 
 b) s(p9aaE roaovTOv oaov na^tfra avsyvaxivai 79 
 
 yj^cpiafia, it arrived first {indeed), but 
 only sufficiently so, for Paches to have 
 had time to read out the decree. - 
 
 c) (f&dvsis ilxcav rj to, tirijra, (psvystv, you draw 
 
 (your nets) before the birds fly away. 
 
 d) ovic kv ff&dvoi anoOvqaxtov,* he will cer- 
 
 tainly die (or, be killed). 
 
 e) 11 aklo ovToi ij BTiE^ovlBvsttv ; what did these 
 
 ■people do but plot 7 
 
 f) anEXQwazo on §aaiXsiav ovx av dE^ai/Aijv, he 
 
 answered, "I would not receive a king- 
 dom." 
 
 g) rl om inoiTjaaiiEv ; (why have not we done 
 
 it?=) why don't we do it 7 Let us do 
 it directly 7 
 
 359. Vocabulary 58. 
 
 Give orders, order, imrdTTca. 
 
 Would wro6aZiZ« have been » »' « » a - 
 
 J f J EHivovvEvasv av oiaqixrag^rs'^ 
 
 To be the slave of, dovlEvco. 
 
 Exercise 65. 
 
 360. But for Xenoclides, the whole country would 
 probably have been ravaged. But it isjtist that every 
 man should defend the laws of his country. You do 
 nothing but give orders. He answered, I should be a 
 fool if (p) I were to do this. He answered, I will give 
 you a portion of the food which I have myself. He 
 went away before his friend arrived. It is right that 
 every body should o]blige such a man as you are. He 
 answered, I have done more service to the state than 
 
 " That is, he cannot die too soon (for die he must). Buttmann gives 
 a diflerent explanation. 
 
 7' 
 
154 PARTICLES AND PHRASES. 
 
 any other singfe person. He answered, I will come to 
 you if I am wanted. You do nothing but laugh at all 
 the citizens. What do you do but hold all men cheap ? 
 He answered, I will collect as inany men as I possibly 
 can. He answered, I will come to you as quickly as 
 possible, to (p) combat the faithful slave's disorder. He 
 answered, if any body has done much service to the 
 state it is you. They arrived first, indeed, by just time 
 enough to have destroyed those with the king (358. b). 
 Why don't you make me also happy ? Why don't you 
 answer? He answered, if Xenoclides had not been 
 present, the ships would have perished, together with 
 their crews. If (/?) you do this, you will certainly be 
 the slave of your temper. If he were not ambitious, 
 he would not undergo every labour. 
 
 § 59. List of Particles and short connecting and 
 other Phrases. 
 
 Oes, Those with an asterisk cannot stand first in a sentence. 
 
 361. ays 8^, ' bui tome ;' ' come now.' 
 
 362. asl {Ion. and poet, aid, aih), always. 
 
 6 asi aQifwv, the archon for the time being : the 
 person who at any time is archon. 
 
 363. ui.i]9sg (accented in this way), ironically, indeed ? 
 itane 7 
 
 364. akXi, but. It is often used to introduce quick, ab' 
 rupt retorts, objections, exhortations, &c. «U' aSv- 
 vatov, 'nay but, it's impossible' (or, why, it's, inir 
 possible), alia §ovlofiai, 'well, Twill!' 
 
 aXld is also our 'but' = ' except' after general 
 
PAUTICLES AND PHRASES. 155 
 
 negatives : some case of aXlog generally stands ii) 
 the preceding clause. 
 
 cim 17,' unless, except ; nisi. 
 
 aXi.0 T( fj (or aXloTi) ; used as an interrogative pai- 
 ticle (316). 
 
 S.7.Xms te aai, especially/, in particular. 
 303.' KjMK, at the same time (as prep. ' together with, 
 dat.) afio. followed by aai in the following clause ; 
 as soon as (omitting the nai.^) The two assertions 
 are marked out as occurring at the same time ; and 
 the particles may be variously translated, according 
 to the view with which the coincidence is pointed 
 out: no sooner — than; already — when; when — 
 at once, &c. 
 
 366. aiieXei (properly the imperat. of a^adeoo, don't mind, 
 or be anxious about), as adv. doubtless, certainly. 
 
 367. *av, see 75 : for idv. see 77. 
 
 368. ara,' up ! (for avdarrj^i, rise up .') 
 
 369. av^ dor, because, for (267). 
 
 370. *aQa'^ {kq, pa,s iri £lpic poets), therefore, conse- 
 quently, then. 
 
 1) It is also used where it seems to be without 
 power, but indicates conformity with the na- 
 ture of things or with custom; as might 
 have been expected ; ex ordine, rite. Hence 
 it serves to mark a transition to an expected 
 proposition. 
 
 " aX\' ? has this meaning after negatives and questions that imply a 
 negative. The dXA' might sometimes be supposed oiAXo, used elliptically ; 
 but frequently this is' impossible ; and it is better, therefore, to under- 
 stand it always to be liAAo. (Krflger.) — A case of olXXoj often stands 
 already in the sentence. The construction probably arose from two 
 nearly equivalent forms : oWm aWo — dWa, and iiiSlv aWo — ?/. ' (K.) 
 
 *" e. g. a^a aKT)K6afLiv rt kg} rptrjftdp^ovs KaBitjTaiiev. 'A-jia is also USed 
 with the part. like iastA^v : Hjis mSr' elTrCiv dviam. 
 
 ' When prepositions are used alone as adverbs, and thus become 
 equivalent to verbs, they throw back the accent. 
 
 ^ The old derivation from 'APS, (to fit, trans, and intrans.) seema 
 iar preferable to Hartung'a derivation from a common root with api^a,. 
 rapio, repente. So KOhner. 
 
 o Enclitic. 
 
166 PAKTICLES AND PHUASES. 
 
 2) After tl, idv, &c. it has the force of indeed 
 or perchance. — «i (lij uqcc (nisi forte) has often 
 an ironical meaning ; unless, forsooth.' 
 
 371. ate (with part.), as being (242. a). 
 
 372. *av [backwards), again; 2) on the other hand , 
 Z) further ; and then also. 
 
 373. *avtE, avzoLQ (both Epic), and atdq, have the same 
 meaning as av. So also the poetical *ttv&ig. Ion. 
 avTig. (avruQ and dtuQ begin a sentence or clause.) 
 
 374. avrmg, thus (emphatical) : 2) ut erat; of things in 
 their original, unchanged state, or that are of com- 
 mon every-day occurrence; 3) it is attached to 
 words expressing reproach, contempt, or neglect, 
 e. g. childish, useless, vain, «fec. Hence 4) it is used 
 alone as equivalent to intxTijv, idly, vainly, uselessly. 
 It is a sister form of ovrmg.s (B). 
 
 375. *ydQ {ys ago), for. 
 
 It often refers to a short sentence to be mentally 
 supplied (suchv as, I believe it; no wonder. 
 <fcc.) In questions ■■ it answers pretty nearly 
 to our 'the7i,' aiid implies surprise {=why7 
 what?) 
 Ti ydg ; quid enim 7 or quidni enim 1 — certainly , 
 to he sure. 
 
 nmg ydq; [Att.) is an emphatic denial =hy no 
 means. 
 'i,7Q. *y«(^ strengthening particle), a^Zeas/,' at all events, 
 certainly. 
 
 ' *Apa, the interrog. particle, stands first in its sentence. " Attic 
 poeta, however, allow themselves to interchange the quantity, and use 
 Spa for consequently, apa as the interrog. particle ; but without altering 
 the proper place of each." (B.) 
 
 Hermann, on the other hand, says, that it should always be written 
 iii; »> in Homer ; and Hartung thinks Buttmann's a strange mistake, the 
 derivation being from ailnJf, he and no other, self (so that avTtiiss=thus 
 and in no other way). He considers that the rough breathing is only » 
 dialectic peculiarity. utJrws ^oL, avron Alt. (Eustalh.) 
 
 I" Especially after ris ; ttStc ; irtSs ; &c. 
 
 ' For which yoh is more commonly useil. 
 
PARTICLES AND PHRASES. 15T 
 
 It adds strength and emphasis to the word to 
 which it is added, answering the same purpose 
 that an elevation of the voice does in speak- 
 ing, or italics in a printed passage. It is used 
 in rejoinders and answers, either to confirm 
 or to restrict ; also in exhortations to make 
 them more impressive. 
 iywys, I for my -part — ««xo7(»s ys, quite naturally 
 — na.vv ye, quite so, certainly. 
 y« 8^,' certainly. 
 
 yi Tot, yet at least ; at least however ; however, 
 ye (i^v (certe vero ; vero), certainly however ; but 
 yet ; hence it is also a strengthened 8L 
 
 A. 
 
 377. 5toTt (=5(a tovto ozi), because: but later writers 
 often use it for oi«, that. 
 
 378. *8e{see fiiv) has three meanings of and, but, for 
 [the last in the old writers only]. 
 
 379. *d^,i a strengthening particle, properly now (for 
 which ^Sri is used) ; it is employed in various ways, 
 to enliven a speech : — 
 
 aye Sri, cpeqe S^, come now ! 
 
 TiSrt; what then? 
 It also means truly, forsooth. After relatives it 
 has the force of our ' ever.^ Sang 8^, whoever it may 
 be, &c. It often follows superlatives. 
 
 380. *8^nov (confirms a conjecture proposed. M.) : it is a 
 more emphatical nw (see nov), I imagine or sup- 
 pose; doubtless. 
 
 *8i]7iov&£v is used to hint, with a little irony, that 
 the contrary is impossible. 
 
 * Interest hoe inter yi In et yl m, quod lij sententiam per yl restric- 
 tam simpliciter confirmat, roi antera earn sententiam indicat oppositam 
 esse prsBcedentibus quodammodo. Hinc yi S/j est sane quidem, enim,. 
 vero ; yi m autem certe quidem. (Herm.) 
 
 ' It is only in Homer and Pindar that S ii stands at the beginnin| 
 af a proposRuon or clause. (M.) . 
 
158 PARTICLES AND PHRASES. 
 
 *Sii&sv has also the ironical force oid^, forsooth. (M), 
 *diJTa, Hke 8^, is used in assuring and confirming 
 {surely, certainly). 
 
 E. 
 
 381. d, if;2) whether; and 3) after some verbs of 
 feeling, that. (See.333.) 
 ^ SI >cat, if even, although. 
 I Koi d, even if, even though. 
 SI ydq, O that ! — a Avish ; like d&s. 
 al fii], unless. 
 «t (171 did, but for. 
 
 e'lTig, em, properly, if any one ; if any thing : but 
 it is used as equivalent to oarig, with more emphasi? r 
 whoever, whatever. 
 
 sia, \^\) afterwards, thereupon; 2) then. 
 
 They are used in scolding, reproachful ques- 
 tions (see 315), and often with verbs, to refer 
 emphatically to a preceding participle." 
 
 383. iv9a, demonstr., here, there ; but also, and in prose 
 generally, relat. where." Iv&dSe, demonstr., here; 
 hither. 
 
 ivtav&a {Ion. iv&avtu), here. 
 
 iv&sr, hence, thence, whence : ivOsvds, hence. 
 
 tv&sv (liv — hQiv ds {hinc — illinc), on the one side 
 — on the other. 
 
 sv&ev «at ev&ev {hinc illinc ; ah utraque parte), on 
 this side and that ; on both sides. 
 
 svTsv&Ev, hence, thence. 
 . (All these words relate also to time.) 
 
 384. iitsi, after ; 2) since, quoniam. 
 
 Before interrogatives and the imperat., it has 
 the meaning offer ; for else. 
 
 'H oi Swaftevot E^psTv rai hSovs, e7rQ TrXavto/ievoi diroiXovTo. 
 " But Ma or txfla Sri may stand at the beginning of periods for ibi 
 lliere. or then. 
 
PARTICLES AND PHRASES. 159 
 
 insiS^ has the same meanings, but insc is fai 
 oftener used in the sense of since. 
 
 385. ears (= 4' oVst), until, as long as. 
 
 386. hi, yet, still, further. 
 
 ovKiTi, fiijxhi, no more, no longer. 
 
 387. i<f ^,' on condition that : icp iprs, the same but 
 generally with the infinitive. 
 
 H. 
 
 388. ^, or;^ in comparisons, than. 
 
 389. ^, trull/, certainly : but generally a mere interrog- 
 tive particle [ — ne, but only in direct questions]. 
 
 ^ fxrjv assuredly, in asseverations, promises, &c. 
 
 390. jjdti, now, already. Also, 'without going any 
 further.''^ 
 
 391. Tjv =idv (see 77). This is the form used by the 
 Attic poets for idv : never av. 
 
 0. 
 
 392. *&'^v {enclit.), I should imagine ; surely ; in iron 
 ical, sarcastic speeches, ov &^v, ij 9^v. It is pect ..- 
 liar to Ionic and Doric poets. 
 
 1. 
 
 393. iva, where; 2) in order that.' 
 
 t This derivation seema disproved by such passages as Xen. An. iv, 
 5, 6: tore iiri Td 6mtiov, usque ad. I believe it to be is with the old 
 connective tI. See re. 
 
 • Here if' li (properly=Jm' Tovra S — ) is equivalent to IkI Tovra is — „ 
 
 P It retains this meaning in questions : 176611/ fJKsi ; i) inXoir on e( aya- 
 fas ; where is he come from ? or is it plain that he is come from tht 
 market-place (and so the question unnecessary) 1 
 
 ^ ffdi/u yap fioi SoKEi ^iSjj ttoWov &v H^tos €it>at ImrpoiiPSj S>v toiovtoi,, 
 Xen. 
 
 ' Iva (=in which case) goes vrith indie, of a past tense to exprest 
 what would have happened, if, &c. W ^u rvfMs. !/ £ ? x V} &c. 
 
100 PARTICLES AND PHRASES. 
 
 K 
 
 394. xai, 1) aiid ; 2) also, even. 
 
 re — xai, both — and, or and also : as well — as 
 [But these particles are often used where wt 
 should only use 'one?.'] 
 
 xtti el, xuv el : see under el. 
 
 xat (laka, ) before these words xaJ has a peculiar 
 
 xcu flaw, ) energy. 
 
 xtti [tijv, ( immo,) well! certainly ! 2) (atqui), and 
 yet. ^ 
 
 xaiueq, although. 
 
 Koi zavTo. {idque), and that too. 
 
 xcciroi, and certainly ; 2) and yet certainly; and 
 yet ; 3) although. 
 
 xai {also) often seems to be superfluous in familiar 
 conversation : lvaxa\ etSa, that I may know, &c. 
 
 xai is used in questions, to imply that nothing 
 can be expected, «fec. It may be often translated 
 by at all, possibly, ri XQV tigoaSoxav; asks for in- 
 formation, but zixQ>l X aUwQoaSoxav ; 'what can ont 
 possibly expect ?' implies that nothing can possibly 
 be expected. 
 
 xai — de. When xai and ds come together in a pro- 
 position, xai is also : but the two are often used 
 where we should use ' and also.' 
 
 395. *xe, xir, an enclitic particle, used by the Epic po 
 ets for 5.V. 
 
 M. 
 
 396. 1*0., not by — ; a particle of swearing. It has a 
 negative force when alone, but may have either *«i 
 or ov {yes or no) with it. ■ 
 
 397. (ittXiata /lev — el da jxij, (fee. =if possible — but if 
 not, (fee. — mentioning what is best to be done, and 
 also what is the second best, if that is not feasible." 
 
 ' Witli numerals, words of time, &c. na^mra (about) signifite tliat 
 
PAKTICLES AND PHRASES. 161 
 
 398. ftaXXov Si, or rather. 
 
 399. */««*'>' indeed — answered by bs {hut), or sometimes 
 by aXXd, (livroi, &c. 
 
 The answering ds is sometimes omitted : — 
 
 1) When the opposition is clearly marked 
 without it : e. g, hy naturally opposite 
 words, such as adverbs of place and timcj 
 with an opposite meaning: here — there; 
 in the first place — secondly. 
 
 2) When- the opposition is suppressed: 
 chiefly when personal and demonstrative 
 pronouns are used with [liv at the begin- 
 ning of a proposition. Thus, iym ftev, 
 equidem. 
 
 400. '^avToi, to be sure; 1) I allow ; 2) hut indeed, 
 however. 
 
 401. (Jiri, not ; 2) lest, or that not; 3) that (after verbs 
 oi fearing, &c.) In questions it expects the answer 
 ' no,' being somewhat stronger than (imv ; {num ?] 
 After some verbs (e. g. restrain, prevent, forbid, 
 deny, &c.) it is used where it seems to be superflu- 
 ous, from owr using no negative particle. 
 
 [i^ ov : see § 49, 
 
 402. /i^S^W See 0^8/. 
 
 403. "ff^v, 1) truly, indeed; 2) but indeed, yet. 
 
 riliriv; why not 7 
 
 404. fjifrs ys, (nedum) much less. 
 
 N. 
 
 405. vri, ' 5y,' in oaths (with ace.) 
 
 the statement made is nearly exact (according to the belief of the 
 Epeaker), without pretending to be quite so. 
 
 ' filv and il are much more frequently uaed than indeed — hut, which 
 always express a strong opposition, whereas the Greek particles connect 
 any different propositions or notions. Thus a section, chapter, or even 
 part of a whole work, often ends with (for instance) rai ravra jilv omon 
 iyiveTn : when the next chapter will necessarily begin with something 
 like tJ 6' iarepaia (on the following day). It is only when the contexi 
 dearly requires it, that jilr if to be rendered, it is true, indeed. 
 
162 PARTICLES AND PHRASES. 
 
 406. *fv, vvv (enclit. B), properly the same as vvv. fw 
 which it sometimes stands ; 2) for ow, then, now 
 
 407. vvv Sij, now ; 2) with a past tense, jxist note. 
 
 408. 6 fjsV — 6 58," </ie owe — the other. 
 01 fisr — 01 de, some — others. 
 
 6 jMsV, 6 3' ov often stands alone in reference to a 
 preceding proposition, navzai q)tXrjTsov, aXX' cii ibt 
 Itev rop S' ov, we must love all, and not {love) one 
 man indeed, but not another, naqriaav oi^ 6 [tev 6 
 8' ov, aXXa navzeg. 
 
 409. 8a (quod vera est), after which the iovto iazi is 
 omitted.' 
 
 410. o&ovvExa (= orov ivexa), hecause, that, in the Tragic 
 poets. 
 
 411. olog {noiuv), of a kind or character (to do, (fee.) 
 olog T8, able, possible. 
 
 olov Eimg, as is natural ; as one may (or might) 
 suppose. 
 
 412. onoTE, when, whenever ; 2) since: as qiiando, 
 quandoquidem are used for quoniam,. 
 
 413. onov, where (there were) ; 2) since (siquidem). 
 
 414. onmg, as adv.,. Aow; 2) conjunct., in order that, 
 that, ontog sascT&e, see that you 6e=a strong im 
 perative. 
 
 415. oaai ijftiQai or batmiqai, daily ; properly, as many 
 days as there are. 
 
 oaog follows ^av/iaaTogaxii superlatives of quality, 
 nXeTrrza oaa or oaa nkslaztt, quam plurima : ■&av(iaa- 
 zov oaov, mirum quantum. 
 
 oaov ov (or oaovov), all but. 
 
 416. ore, when, bze fisv — oze Si,'' sometimes — some' 
 times, 
 
 " For 5 fiiii — S li we sometimes find Sj jilv — Ss U. 
 
 " S ii TrivTav ScivCTaTov {but what is the most terrible thins "j all, U 
 this). 
 
 * Whenever the forms t6tc. Its axe used twice (sometimes only 
 
PARTICLES AND PHRASES. 163 
 
 417. on, that (instead of Lat. ace. with injin.) , 2) be- 
 cause, for 8ia rovTO on, i. e. Siori. 
 
 oTtalso strengthens superlatives, and is used to in- 
 troduce a quotation in the very words of the speak- 
 er, where we use no conjunction (see 358. /.) 
 
 on {iri, after negatives, except. 
 '118. ov, not: in questions it requires the answer ' yes.' 
 
 [if) ov dtdXvaig=the non-destruction. 
 
 ov yuQ alia, is commonly used in the sense of 'for^ 
 with increase of emphasis, q. d. '■for it is no other- 
 wise, but.' (M.) 
 
 oi) fifi : see 287. 
 
 ov [i^v, yet not, but not ; 2) as a negative protesta- 
 tion. See ri fi^v. 
 
 ov /i7]v alld (or ov fiivToi alia), properly, ' yet not !' 
 — but / it has generally the force ofye^, however j 
 sometimes oi rather, m%ich more. 
 
 oil ndvv, by no means. 
 
 ov (frjfu, I say (that) not ; deny, refuse. 
 
 419. oil OTi^ — aD.a xai, not only — but also, 
 oil ^n — aZil' ovSs, not only — but not even, 
 oix ontag — alia xai, not only not — but also. 
 
 oix oaov and oi'x qlov are also found for ov^ on and 
 oil omog respectively. 
 
 420. { ovfs, [i^rs, ? Both forms are connecting nega- 
 f aids, ixrjds, \ tives, answering to neque; 1) nor, 
 
 and not ; 2) owe, or firiTs repeated are neither — nor. 
 
 The forms oiSs, i^jde, have the further meaning of 
 1) also not; 2) not even, which is always their 
 meaning in the middle of a proposition, 
 
 ov^ us, not even so. See wg. 
 
 421. *ovv, therefore, then.'' It gives to relatives {patia- 
 ovv, &c.) the force of the Lat. cunque, [ever, soever). 
 
 once) for mri-w-m7l, sometimes — sometimes, they are accented totC — 
 5t£— . (B.) 
 
 • When jiri on, fifi S-as begin the sentence, imBi^ri rts may be sup- 
 plied ; or they may be understood like the Latin ne dicam, and are thus 
 Etronger than the preceding expreesions, but both in a negative sense. 
 
 ." ovv is often used to resume a speech that has been interruptdd by 
 a parenthesis (=7 say.) 
 
104 PAETICLES AND PHRASES. 
 
 1) owovv, properly an interrogative of inference, 
 as ovxovv svTj&sg rovio ; ' is not this, then, 
 
 foolish?' But generally the interrogative 
 force, and with it the negation vanishes, and 
 oixovyis to be translated simply by ' therefore' 
 and begins a clause." 
 
 2) ovKovv is a strengthened negative ; not in the 
 least. — In the meaning ' therefore not,' with- 
 out a question, it is better written ov« ovv. 
 
 422. ovnco, never yet. 
 
 ovSsnoTS, never, is used of both past and future 
 time ; ovSeaanoTE, only of past time. (See woo.) 
 
 n. 
 
 423. *ns'Q (enclit.), quite : used nearly like js, to strength- 
 en a preceding word. It is frequently appended to 
 relatives, and adverbs of time, cause, and condition. 
 Thus mantQ properly means ' exactly as.' 
 
 It is derived, probably, from nsqi, in the sense of 
 ' very.' 
 
 424. 717] (liv—mi ds (not nj] (liv — mj ds, Hermann), part- 
 ly — partly. 
 
 425. nX^v, except : as conjunction, or preposition with 
 gen. : TiXrjv si, except if. 
 
 426. nollmig, often, after d, idv, n^, has sometimes the 
 meaning of (forte) perhaps, perchance, 
 
 427. *wore (encht.), at any time. With interrogatives 
 it expresses surprise : tig nots ; who in the world 7 
 
 428. *nov (enclit.), somewhere ; 2) perchance,perhaps ; 
 3) I imagine, used in conversation when any thing 
 is assumed in a half-questioning way, that the speak- 
 er may build something on the assent of the person 
 appealed to. 
 
 429. nqoe as ■dsmv, I adjure you by the gods (IxsTtvm is 
 generally omittted in this form of adjuration). 
 
 « oixovv, extra interTogationem, acerbam intordura habet iroraam 
 (Brcmi, Dem. p. 238.) 
 
paetici;es and phrases. 165 
 
 430. nQo tov ' (better nQorov), before this or that iiTna 
 (== ngo tovrov or sxslvov rov j^qovov).^ 
 
 431 . *«a) (enclit.), I till now, hitherto : but they are 
 *7ti6noTS, \ never joined to affirmative proposi- 
 tions in this sense. 
 
 ovnm, fi'^nca,' never yet, not yet. noanore is sel- 
 dom annexep to the simple ov, ft^, but to ov8t, 
 utjde. The form without nco (ovdmots, never) 
 is commonly employed only generally or 
 with respect to the future. Both nd and noi- 
 TtoTs may be separated from the negative par- 
 ticle by other words between. 
 
 These particles are also used with relatives, 
 interrogatives, a.Xid participles used as equiv- 
 alent to relative sentences. With these words 
 there is no negative expressed, but the notion 
 of a negative lies at the bottom of them all. 
 Tig nta ; — osvl nmnors ^Imaaixsr, &C. 
 
 432. ncofiaXa, ^ properly, how so ? how then ? hence, by 
 no 'means. 
 
 433. Ta nsv — ta 8s, partly — partly (adverbially). 
 
 434. *T aqa or i ag (poetical), aga strengthened by toi. 
 
 435. *Ti{que). Seexa«. 
 
 In the old language (as we find it in the Epic 
 poets) re seems to impart to many pronouns 
 
 A &v yap Tcj Tt p d rov oiSefiia ^oriBui nm toXs ^JLeyapzwriv oiSanSSsv 
 iirUXBsv. (Thu'c. iv. 120.) 
 
 ^ It answers exactly to our ' hefore this! ' before that.' 
 
 " Quando in serie orationis prtBteritum tempus memoratur, tunc de 
 eo quod ante illud etiam fuerit formula TrpoToS non videtur adhiberi 
 posse, nisi simul insit relatio ad prasens tempus ; hoc est, nisi diserte 
 simul significare quis velit, nunc non amplius ita esse." (Buttm. ad 
 AlciJb. 1. 14.) 
 
 • Not to be confounded with Homer's ofcu, nfixa^amm, i^fiTrag, in 
 no way, by no means. 
 
 ^ For rr<u5 liiXa ; (B.) Others say for iro! ui\a ; — iru being a rather 
 uncommon Doric form for w60si/ ; 
 
166 PARTICLES AND PHRASES. 
 
 and particles the connecting i)0\v^er) winch 
 they afterwards retained in themselves with, 
 out the particle. 
 
 Thus we find fiiv ti, dirs, ya.Q tSj &c., and even 
 xai TS. 
 
 Especially the particle is found after all rela- 
 tives, because these in the old language were 
 merely forms of the pronou?i demonstrative, 
 which through this re obtained the connect- 
 ing power {and this), and thus became the 
 relative {which). As soon, however, as these 
 forms were exclusively allotted to the rela- 
 tive signification, the particle re was dropt as 
 superfluous. Hence we often find in Homer 
 OS IS, oaov Ts, &c. for og, oaov, and the like. 
 The particles moTs, ars, and the expressions 
 otog ts, icp 4 1^ 3-r6 remains of the ancient 
 usage. 
 
 436. r^ftfV — zg Si, in one place and another; here — 
 there ; in one respect — but in another. 
 
 437. Ti, in some respect, in any respect, at all.' n 
 [ir/v ; why not 7 
 
 438. to 8s often introduces a statement opposed to what 
 has been said before, and may be translated by 
 {quumtamen') whereas, but however, or sometimes, 
 but rather. (See Heindorf, Theset. 37.) 
 
 TO 8i with the superlat. often stand alone, with the 
 omission of tovto ianr. to 8b [liyiar ov ndvra rav- 
 ra (lovog Kmsiqyaawto, but the greatest thing is 
 (this), that, &c. (See o 8s — .) 
 
 439. *Toi (enclit.), properly an old dat. for Tiji, meaning 
 therefore, certainly. But these meanings have dis- 
 appeared, and ro( has only a strengthening force :s it 
 
 * It is often added to travv, u'^i^ov^ oiih. 
 
 f Td fov ScT, iis, Si,c.—quum tamen non oporteat. 
 
 t According to Hartung, rof has not a sirengthening but a resiric- 
 live meaning, which, however, often comes to the same thing : e. g. la- 
 liLKn Toi ff' ail, I would have killed you, and n( thing else=7 would asaur- 
 edly have hilled you. Nagelsbach thinks it the old dat. of the pronoui 
 c< (rii). 
 
PARTICLES AND PHRASES. 107 
 
 Is frequently used with personal pronouns, and in 
 maxims, proverbs, &c. 
 
 *'ioivvv, therefore, then, nmv, so now. It is also 
 used when a person proceeds with an argument ; 
 now, further, but now. Besides this it is frequently 
 used in objections, either in a continued narrative, 
 or more commonly in replies : why or why then, 
 [Very seldom as the first word of a clause. P.] 
 
 roiyaq {ergo), therefore. 
 
 toiyaQtoi ?i.ndL toiyaqovv, therefore, even therefore, 
 and from, no other cause, precisely for that reason. 
 
 440. tors /xiv — tot* Si,^ at one time— at another. 
 
 441. rovvBxa (Epic), on that account ; therefore. 
 
 442. rnvTo [liv — tovto de, on the one hand — on tho other. 
 
 443. T^, therefore. 
 
 £1 
 
 444. lag (relat. adv.), as (as if, so as) ; 2) oi time, as, 
 when; 3) with numerals, about ; 4) it strengthens 
 superlatives, especially of adverbs, and some posi- 
 tives. 
 
 wff (prepos. = slg), to, with ace. : but only of living 
 thiiigs. 
 
 wg (conjunc), that; 2) in order that, with subj., 
 opt; or fut. indie. : 3) so that, with infin., more com- 
 monly mars : 4) sitice ; 5) quippe, for. 
 
 mg sn ' [= (og srsari, as it is possible) is used with 
 superlatives : cog hi fidhara, as far as it is any way 
 possible. 
 
 cog snog slnsir, so to say. 
 
 cog avrslovri (sc. X6y(p) slnstv, to be short ; in a word 
 [For which avvslovzi nnsiv, and avvslovn alone 
 are found.] 
 
 '' See note on ore. 
 
 ' When prepositions are employed instead cf the compounds of eli/ai 
 or rather when, this verb being omitted, they stand alone as adverhi 
 ihc accent is thrown back on the iirst syllable. See it«i. 
 
IC8 
 
 PROPOSITIONS IN COMPOSITIOM. 
 
 as (with accent) = ovrcog, thus. It is common in 
 the poets, especially the lonians ; but in prose is 
 found only in ov^ mg. xou mg. 
 
 Table of the less obvious meanings of Prepositions in 
 Composition. 
 
 aiufi, on both sides. 
 
 avzi, against, marking opposition. 
 
 ava,' up ; back again. 
 
 Sid {dis) marks separation ; taking apart or 
 aside. 
 
 iv, often into. 
 
 x«ra,' down; it often implies completion, and 
 hence, 2) ruin, destruction (answering in both to 
 per). 
 
 fieTci (trans) marks transposition, change. 
 
 naqd, sometimes signifies (like prceter) missing 
 doing amiss. nuQa^aivuv, to transgress, (fcc. 
 
 •i With &aivtiv, &c. ana, up, and Kara, down, mean rcBpectiveiy inlo 
 the interior, and dotcn to the coast. 
 
 ' Hence icara ia sometimes equivalent to up in EngUsli : nar upayun, 
 to eat up. 
 
 or 
 
TABLE 
 
 DIFFERENCES OF IDIOM, ETC. 
 
 English. 
 
 1. (§ 1.) He who does. 
 
 2. (§ 2.) Socrates. 
 
 A woman. 
 
 3. (^ 3.) My slave. 
 
 ITour slave, (fcc. 
 
 4. I have 5 a pain 
 I am suffer- > in my 
 
 ing from ) head. 
 
 5. He rejoiced {or, was 
 
 vexed) when the citi- 
 zens were rich (or, 
 that the citizens 
 were rich). 
 
 0. My friend and my bro- 
 ther's. 
 
 7. (§ 4.) The wisdom of 
 the geometer. 
 
 Greek. 
 
 The (person) doing (6 
 nQaTtav). 
 
 The Socrates {often). 
 
 A certain woman {yvvfj iig)' 
 
 [When a particular per- 
 son is meant, though not 
 raamerf.] 
 
 The my slave. 
 
 The your slave. 
 
 I am pained {as to) the 
 head: ace. {alyo)). 
 
 He rejoiced {or, was vexed 
 at {im) rich the citizens. 
 
 The my friend and the of 
 
 the brother, 
 {Very often) The of the 
 . geometer wisdom — or, 
 
 the wisdom, the of the 
 
 geometer. 
 
170 
 
 TABLE OF 
 
 English. 
 
 8. The beautiful head. 
 
 9. The son of Philip. 
 Into Philip's country. 
 
 10. The affairs of the state. 
 The people in the city. 
 Those with the king. 
 My property. 
 
 11. (§5.) The men o/oZd. 
 The men of old times. 
 The roBn of those days. 
 The intermediate time. 
 The present life. 
 
 The upper jaw. 
 
 12. (§ 6.) The rhinoceros 
 
 has a very hard hide. 
 They have strong claws. 
 
 13. The beautiful ; beauty 
 
 (in the abstract.) 
 Beautiful things. 
 Whatever things are 
 
 beautiful. 
 What is beautiful. 
 
 14. Speaking. 
 Of speaking. 
 
 By speaking, «fec. 
 
 ^5. Virtue. Gold. Eagles. 
 
 16. To do kind offices. 
 — confer benefits on. 
 — treat well. 
 
 Greek. 
 
 As in English; or, 'the 
 head the beautiful.' 
 
 The of Philip {son, dJo's, 
 understood). 
 
 Into the of Philip {coun- 
 try, xwqav, understood). 
 
 The {neut. pi.) of the state. 
 
 The (ot) in the city. 
 
 The (o«) with the king. 
 
 ra s/ia. 
 } The long-ago (men) — oi 
 ) ndlai. 
 
 The then (men). 
 
 The between time. 
 
 The now life. 
 
 The up jaw (J; arm yvd&ogj. 
 
 The rhinoceros has the 
 (= its) hide very hard. 
 
 They have the {=theh) 
 claws strong. 
 
 TO >taX6v. 
 
 ■ Ta xala. 
 
 The to-speak. 
 Of the to-speak 
 By the to-speak, &c. 
 
 70 XaksTv : tov laleh, &c. 
 The virtue. The gold. 
 
 The eagles (when the 
 
 class is meant ; or eagles 
 
 generally), 
 
 ev noiHv with ace. of persoa 
 
differences of idiom, &c. 171 
 
 English, Greek. 
 
 .7. To prosecute on a rn r ^ 
 
 charge of murder. ^o fursue of murder. 
 
 To be tried for murder. To^y of murder, 
 ^r, /-n-s tN .7 ^ The indeed — but the. 
 
 18 {% 7.) Some—others, j olfiiv-olSB. 
 
 But {or and) he [or it), o Si. . . at the head of a 
 
 And he . . . 
 
 19. (§8.) The other party. 
 The rest of the country, 
 
 20. The wAoZe city ; oWthe 
 
 city. 
 Every city. 
 
 21. (§ 9.) With two others, 
 
 22. To perform this service. 
 
 To perform many ser- 
 vices. 
 
 23. His own ) .,■ 
 One's own [^^'""S^' 
 
 25. (§ 10.) What comes 
 
 from the gods, 
 
 'Y\\s, greater •part of . . 
 Halfoi.. . 
 
 26. (§ 11.) In my time. In 
 
 my father's time. 
 In my poioer. 
 
 27. (§ 12.) To 6e so. 
 
 To be found, ) 
 brought in, \ of. . &c. 
 guilty \ 
 as, (§ 13.) Not only— but 
 also. 
 To confer a great bene- 
 fit on. 
 
 clause. 
 xai og . . . 
 
 ol STSQOl. 
 
 The other country. 
 
 naaa tj noXtg. 
 
 naaa nohg. 
 
 Himself ^Ae third (pron. 
 
 last). 
 im^QSTSiv TovTo (pers. for 
 
 whom in dat.) 
 
 The things of himself [ja 
 iavtov.) 
 
 The (neut. pi.) of the goda 
 
 " in agreement 
 with the noun 
 governed by 'of 
 
 6 nokvg 
 6 rifiKivg 
 
 in EiAOv. tnt 70V naiQog. 
 
 fn ifioi. 
 
 To have (themselves) so 
 (ovimg Bj^siv). 
 
 To be taken or caught 
 (aXmai with gen.) 
 
 oi^ on^aXka xai. See note 
 
 on 82. 
 To benefit greatly ((ts^a 
 
172 
 
 TABLE OF 
 
 English. 
 To do a great injury to. 
 
 29. (§ 14.) I should Uke to 
 behold. 
 I should like extremely 
 
 to behold. 
 I would rather behold 
 A than B. 
 80. It is not possible. 
 
 31. Onihepleaiha.tIcoa\d 
 
 then conquer 
 
 Though I should have, 
 (fee. 
 
 32. (§15.)WhenyouAa3;e 
 
 done, you will, <fcc. 
 
 33. {^ 16.) What I please. 
 
 34. (§ 17.) And you as 
 
 much as any body. 
 And you among the 
 first. 
 
 35. Am slow to doit (112). ' 
 
 36. Conditional Pro- 
 
 positions (79). 
 (1) Iflhave any thing, 
 I will give it. 
 
 Greek. 
 To hurt greatly {iiiya §,Xin- 
 
 Obs. to, (liytattt to be 
 used, if it is ^ great- 
 est,^ not 'great.' 
 I would gladly behold 
 {rjde'mg av &taaal(t^v ."') 
 
 riSiat av ■OsaaaijJUjv. 
 
 ijdTov av QsuaaiiMiv A ^ B. 
 
 It is not {nix iativ). 
 
 As so being-likely-to-con- 
 
 quer (wj oiiToag nsQiysvo- 
 
 (tEvoe av). 
 
 If If 
 s^(av av. 
 
 When you shall have done 
 (av with subj. 90*), 
 
 a Soxsi {(loi). (If necessary, 
 a do^Etsv, or, a av fidlg). 
 
 Having begun from you 
 (100). 
 
 Do it by leisure [a^oX'^). 
 
 (1) If the consequent verb 
 is in the future, the co7i- 
 ditional verb is (gene- 
 rally) in the subj. with 
 iav" 
 
 " BcaaSai is ' to hehold' something that may be considered a specta- 
 tie. iSsiv {ipav, SxjjeaSai) is simpljr vidcre, to see. Hence iSaifii shou'd 
 be used in the phrase ' I should like to see,' when the notion of a spec- 
 tacle is quite out of place. 
 
 " Both verbs may be in the future indicative (the conditional verb 
 
DIFFERENCES OF IDIOM, &0. 
 
 173 
 
 English. 
 If it has thundered, it 
 has also lightened. 
 
 2) If you should do so, 
 
 I should laugh. 
 If you were to do so, 
 
 I should laugh. 
 If you would do so, 
 
 you would oblige 
 
 me. 
 
 3) If I had any thing, I 
 
 v)ould give it. 
 If I had had any 
 thing I would have 
 given it. 
 
 37 {That) they would 
 
 fetch. 
 {That he, dec.) would 
 
 be able. 
 They w<mld have 
 
 died. 
 I should have died. 
 38. (§20.) "We should (or 
 
 ought to) set about 
 
 the work. 
 
 1 
 
 Greek. 
 If the consequent verb is 
 in any tense of the ind. 
 but the future, or in the 
 imperative, put the con- 
 ditional verb in the indie. 
 with s». 
 
 2) When both verbs have 
 'should,' ' would,' or the 
 first 'were ^o,'the second 
 
 ' 'should or 'would,' both 
 are to be in the optative ; 
 the consequent yevh with 
 av. 
 
 3) When the consequent 
 verb has ' would,' but the 
 conditional verb not, 
 both verbs are in a past 
 tense of the indicative ; 
 the conditional veih with 
 SI, the consequent verb 
 with &v. 
 
 ■§U. 
 
 . svQSiv av. 
 
 J 
 
 r Aor. with av » {imperf. or 
 
 C pluperf. if necessary). 
 
 The work is to-be-set-about 
 (verbal in liog). 
 
 with cl). The condition is then expressed in a more positive way, as a 
 contemplated event : a construction which is often adopted when the 
 condition expresses an event hoped for or feaied (R.) ; as, ci n -ad- 
 troi/rat Mjj^ot eis Titptras rd ietvdv ^fec. 
 
 o As in the consequence of the fourth form of conditional propoui 
 tions. 81. d. 
 
174 
 
 TABLE OK 
 
 English. 
 The work should be 
 
 set-about. 
 We must set-about 
 
 the work. 
 The work must be 
 set about. 
 39. (^21.) I should have 
 died but for the dog. 
 
 dO. The all but present 
 war. 
 
 41. (■^22.) Having had his 
 
 government taken 
 
 away. . 
 Having been entrusted 
 
 with the arbitration. 
 Having had his eyes 
 
 knocked out. 
 
 42. To conquer himira the 
 
 battle of Marathon. 
 
 43. To flow with a full {or 
 
 strong stream). 
 To flow with milk. 
 
 44. (-5. 24.) Till late in the 
 
 day. 
 
 45. Willingly at Jeast. 
 Willingly. 
 
 46. So to say. 
 
 To speak generally. 
 
 47. Sensible persons. 
 
 48. To drink some wine. 
 (Not) todrink any wine. 
 
 Greek. 
 
 It is to-he-set-about {ueut, 
 of verbal in reos) the 
 work.p 
 
 I should have died, if not 
 
 through the dog (tt fti] 
 
 did, with ace.) 
 The as-much-as not (oaov 
 
 ov) present war. 
 Having been taken away 
 
 his government. 
 
 Having been entrusted the 
 
 arbitration. 
 Having been knocked out 
 
 his eyes. 
 To conquer him the battle 
 
 at (iv) Marathon. 
 To flow much (mlvg adj.) 
 
 To flow milk. 
 Till far-on {no^Qta) of the 
 day. 
 
 To be willing (exwi- thai). 
 
 As to say a word (mg mos 
 
 einslv). 
 The sensible of persons (oi 
 
 CPQOVIUOI TCOV avd'QCOTimi', 
 
 sometimes ; but very 
 often 01 (pQivifioi only). 
 
 To drink of wine. 
 
 (Not) to drink ofwitie. 
 
 V The ' work ' is to be in the case governed by the verb from wbicli 
 .he verbal is derived, 
 
DIFFERENCES OF IDIOM, &C. 
 
 175 
 
 the 
 
 English. 
 
 49. My property, wretched 
 
 man that I am ! 
 
 50. What misery! 
 
 51. (§ 25.) Who in 
 
 world . . ? 
 32. To be nearly related to. 
 
 53. (§ 26.) You shall not 
 
 do it with impunity. 
 
 54. I would not have done 
 
 it at all (132). 
 
 55. (§ 28.) It is the part of 
 
 a wise man. 
 
 56. It is not a thing that 
 
 everybody can do. 
 It is not every one that 
 can do this. 
 
 57. To be one's own mas- 
 
 58. (§ 29.) More pow:erfuI 
 
 than ever. 
 
 59. Afflictions too great for 
 
 tears. 
 
 Of superhuman size. 
 
 More than could have 
 been expected from 
 the small number of 
 the killed. 
 
 60. Too young to know, 
 
 «fcc. 
 
 Greek. 
 My (property) of (me) the 
 
 wretched ! 
 
 [r« ina, Tov xaMdaii-wroi.] 
 The misery (in the gen.) 
 Who ever? {lie nors ;) 
 
 To be near to a person {in 
 respett) of family. 
 
 You shall not do it rejoic- 
 ing (j^aiQcav). 
 
 I would not have done it 
 the beginning {ctQ^qv or 
 triv ugyfiv). 
 
 It is of a wise man- 
 
 It is not every man's [aav 
 
 tog). 
 It is not every man^s to do 
 
 this. 
 savtov Eivai. 
 
 More poAverful himself^ 
 
 than himself [avrbs 
 
 awou). 
 Afflictions greater than in- 
 
 proportion-to (? xutu) 
 
 tears. 
 Greater than acc6rdins;-to 
 
 man (^ xar av&qeanov). 
 More than in-proportion- 
 
 to the dead (^ xata lovs 
 
 rEXQpvs). 
 
 Younger than so as to 
 know (5 MffTs). 
 
 1 Of course, 'themselves than themselves,' wien more than one are 
 spoken of. 
 
176 
 
 TABLE OF 
 
 English. 
 61. (§30.) With more hasle 
 than prudence. 
 Hastily rather than pru- 
 dently. 
 More hastily than pru- 
 dently. 
 62 The greatest ipossi- 
 As great as )ble. 
 " " as he could, 
 As many as he possi- 
 bly could. 
 63. If any other man can 
 doit, you can. 
 If any man is temper- 
 ate, it is you. 
 64. 1 have injured you more 
 than any other indi- 
 vidual has. 
 
 65. (§31.) To charge a man 
 
 with a crime 
 
 66. (§ 35.) If it is agreea- 
 
 ble to you. 
 If you are willing. 
 
 67. And that too . . . 
 
 68. For the present at 
 
 least. 
 As far as they are con- 
 cerned. 
 
 69. (§ 36.) I offer myself fo 
 
 be interrogated. 
 
 70. (§37.) It was done ^Ao« 
 
 robbers might not 
 commit depreda- 
 tions, &c. 
 '71. Nothing was done be- 
 cause he was not 
 here. 
 
 Greek. 
 
 More-hastily than niore- 
 ^ prudently. 
 
 > wff or 0T« with superlat. 
 
 As many as he could most 
 
 {ocovg ^dvvazo nlelaTovg). 
 You, if any other man [si 
 
 rig xal aXXog), can do it. 
 You, if any other man, 
 
 are temperate. 
 I one m,an have injured 
 
 you the most {nlsiaia tig 
 
 avriQ as s^Xaxpa). 
 To charge [iyxaldi') a 
 
 crime to a man. 
 
 If it is to you wishing it 
 {siaoi ^ovl-oiiivcp iaii). 
 
 xai tavza. 
 
 10 ys vvv elvai. 
 
 •to im tovroig dvai. 
 
 I offer myself to interro- 
 gate. 
 
 It was done rov fiij hjazui 
 xaxovQysiv, &c. 
 
 Nothing was done Sta to 
 i*etvo» 1*1] naqeipat. 
 
DIFFERENCES OF IDIOM, &C. 
 
 177 
 
 English. 
 
 72. He said that he was in 
 
 a hurry. 
 
 73. (<J 40.) He is evidently 
 
 hurt. 
 I am conscious of 
 
 thinking so. 
 I am conscious that I 
 
 think so. 
 
 74. I know 
 — remember 
 
 — rejoice 
 — am aware 
 
 that I 
 >have 
 done it. 
 
 Greek. 
 He said to be in a hurry 
 
 (pron. omitted). 
 He is evident (d^lo?) being 
 
 hurt; 
 
 I am conscious {awoi8a) to 
 myseli thinking so (nom. 
 or dat.) 
 
 I know 
 
 lamashamed ( ^°^. 
 I'-^P^^t ^doneiL 
 
 Know tiiat you will be 
 
 punished. 
 I perceived that he 
 
 thought, Sec. 
 He will not cease to do 
 
 it. 
 ■^5, He knew that the son 
 
 he had begotten was 
 
 mortal. 
 76, (§ 41.) I did it uncoji- ' 
 
 sciously. 
 I did it unJpiown to 
 
 myself, 
 I did it without being 
 
 seen, or discovered ; 
 
 secretly. 
 
 77 I arrivedj^rs^ (or before 
 them). 
 
 You cannot do it too 
 soon. 
 
 8* 
 
 — remember 
 — rejoice 
 — am aware 
 
 C I am ashamec 
 
 ' it. 
 
 having done 
 it {part.) 
 
 having done 
 
 It repenteth to-me having 
 done it. 
 
 Know about-to give pun- 
 ishment. 
 
 I perceived him thinking, 
 «fec. 
 
 He will not cease doing it 
 (part.) 
 
 He knew having begotten 
 a mortal son. 
 
 I was concealed-from {s).a- 
 &ov) myself, doing it 
 {nom.) 
 
 I was concealed (tXa&ov) 
 doing it. 
 
 (or)- I did it being unob- 
 served {la&Mv). 
 
 I having arrived antici- 
 pated them {s(p&r}v, oi 
 i(p&i]v avrovg). 
 
 Doing it you will not anti- 
 cipate (ow uv qi&dpoig). 
 
178 
 
 TABLE OF 
 
 English. 
 Will you not do it di- 
 rectly ? 
 
 78. He held his tongue, as 
 
 supposing that all 
 knew. 
 
 79. (§ 43.) You act strange- 
 
 ly in giving us, «fcc. 
 
 80. They pronounced her 
 
 happy, &c. in hav- 
 ing such children. 
 They have arms to de- 
 fend themselves 
 with. 
 
 81. First of all (259). 
 
 82. (§ 44.) From some of 
 the cities. 
 
 Somewhere. 
 Sometifnes. 
 83. I feel thankful to you 
 
 for coining. 
 85. They destroyed every 
 thing of value. 
 
 85. (§ 45.) Such a man as 
 you. 
 
 (Of) such a man as 
 you are. 
 
 For men like us . . . 
 
 To make astonishing 
 progress. 
 
 Surprisingly misera- 
 ble. 
 
 Greek. 
 ovH av <f&avoig noimv ; 
 
 He held his tongue, as {as) 
 
 all men knowing it (ace. 
 
 or gen.) 
 You do a strange thing 
 
 who give us, &c. 
 They pronounced her hap- 
 py, &c. lohat children 
 
 she had. (258. h). 
 They have arms with 
 
 which they will defend 
 
 themselves. 
 First among the (tV joli 
 
 ngatog — HQmiTj, tiqwzoi, 
 
 &c.) 
 From the cities there is 
 
 which. 
 
 [' which' in same case as 
 ' cities.'] 
 There is where. 
 There is when. 
 I know you gratitude, /or 
 
 what {avd' (ov) you came. 
 They destroyed if there 
 
 was anything of value 
 
 {et ri, &c.) 
 
 6 olog av av^Q. 
 
 oiov GOV avSQog, &c. 
 
 TOig oioig {or oloig heq) rjiuv. 
 To advance Qavfimtoi 
 oaov. 
 
 &avftaaioog cog udXiog. 
 
DIFFERENCES OF IDIOM, &C. 
 
 179 
 
 English. 
 8G. (§ 46.) There was 
 nobody whom he 
 did not answer. 
 He answered every 
 body. 
 
 57. Especially. 
 
 As fast as they could. 
 
 58. (§ 47.) I am able. 
 It is possible. 
 
 Are adapted for cut- 
 ting. 
 Am of a character 
 to... 
 89. Eighteen. 
 
 Am 
 Is 
 
 90. Far from it. 
 to be. 
 
 91. (§ 48.) Be sure to be . . . 
 Take care to do it. 
 
 92. (§49.) I fear that I shall. 
 
 I fear tliat 1 shall not. 
 
 93. What prevents us 
 
 from. . .? 
 To prevent them/row 
 coming. 
 
 94 (§ 60.) I had a narrow 
 
 escape from death. 
 I had a narrow escape 
 
 95 (§ 51.) Immediately on 
 
 his arrival. 
 
 ■Greek. 
 
 Nobody whom lie did not 
 
 answer. 
 
 ['nobody^ under the 
 
 government of ' ati- 
 
 swered :' oaite, who."] 
 
 Both otherwise and also 
 
 {alXtag rs xai). 
 As they had speed. 
 oiog ii stui. 
 olov ts iazt. 
 
 Are such as to cut. 
 
 Am such as to . . . 
 
 Twenty wanting two (283, 
 
 d)._ 
 noXl-ov deiv. 
 
 f*'i:]'"y to be'='am in- 
 ''*'^^" ) tended to be.' 
 That {oTiiag) you shall be 
 
 ['see' understood.] 
 Take care how {oTimg) you 
 
 shall do it. 
 
 I fear fiij . . . (subj. or fut. 
 
 indie.) 
 (tq ov . . . 
 
 II iftnoSoiv ivq ovp . . ; with 
 infin. 
 
 To prevent them ft^ iX&sTv. 
 
 1 came naga iuxqov to die. 
 
 I escaped by a little (jiag 
 oliyor). 
 
 Immediately having ar- 
 rived {ev&hg ^xcor). 
 
180 
 
 TABLE OF DIFFERENCES OF IDIOM, &0. 
 
 English. 
 As soon as we are J 
 born. > 
 
 From our very birth. ' 
 96, (§ 52.) What posses- ' 
 ses you to do this? 
 What induces you to 
 do this? 
 07. (319.) To be wholly 
 wrapt up in this ? 
 
 98. f To be consistent 
 with. 
 
 " " like. 
 " " character- 
 istic of. 
 To be on a man's 
 side. 
 ' To make for a 
 man. 
 " be for a man's 
 mterest. 
 " good for a 
 man. 
 
 99. By what conduct. 
 With what view. 
 
 100. (§57.) He went and 
 
 gave (when used 
 contemptuously or 
 indignantly), 
 
 (1) 
 
 (2) 
 
 (3) 
 
 Greek. 
 
 Immediately being born 
 {sv&vg yevoiisvoi). 
 
 Having suffered what, do 
 you do this ? (rt na&mv ;) 
 
 Having learnt what, do 
 you do this? (zi ua&cov ;) 
 
 TtQoe TOVTC^ oXos slvai. 
 
 shai 
 
 nqog rivos- 
 
 Doing what. 
 Wishing what 
 
 He qpeipow gave. 
 
(QUESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX. 
 
 Obs. Words in small capitals are to be translated into Greek. 
 
 ^ 1. — 1. What is the diflerence between the imiperf. and the 
 ojor.l [The Aorist is used of momentary and sing-Ze actions : the 
 Imperfect of conimwetZ and repeaied ones.] 2. What English tense 
 does tlie aor. most nearly answer to? [Our perfect indefinite 
 (the perf. formed by infiexion)!\ 3. Is the aor. ever used for the 
 perf. 7 [Yes,* wlien the connection of the past with the present 
 is obvious from the context.] 4. Where is a governed gen. often 
 placed 1 [Between an article and its noun.] 5. How do you 
 render of ttgdiTovrtgl [Those who do.] 6. To what is the 
 artic. wilh a participle equivalent? [To a personal or demon- 
 strative pronoun with a relative sentence.] 
 
 ^ 2. — 7. Do proper names ever take the artic ? [Yes.] 
 
 8. When ? [When they are the names of persons well lcnown.'\ 
 
 9. When ia a proper name generally without the art. ? [When 
 it is followed by a description which has the article.] 10. Is 
 there an indef. art. in Greek? [No.] 11. By what pron. may 
 ' o ' sometimes be translated ? [By «ff.] 12. When? [When 
 we might substitute ' a certain ' for ' a.'] 13. Which generally 
 lias the art, the subject or the predicate (i. e. the nom. before or 
 the nom. after the verb) ? [The mibject^ 
 
 ^ 3. — 14. Your slave. [6 aog iovXag^ 15. Is the art. evei 
 equivalent to a possessive pron. ? [Yes, when it is quite obvious 
 whose the thing in question is.] 16. When must the pronouns 
 be used ? [Whenever there is any opposition (as, when mine is 
 opposed to yours or any other person's)]. 17. When an adj. 
 UfUhaut the article stands before the art. of the substantive, from 
 leAai does it distinguish that substantive? [From itself xmA&i 
 other circumstances.] 18. My father and my friend's, [o 
 i(ju>g aazijQ, xal 6 lov gjAow.] 
 
 • And even for the pluperfect. 
 
182 QUESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX. 
 
 "5" 4. — 19. The son of Philip, [o ^iklnnov : viog, son, uii 
 derstood.] 20. Into Philip's conNTBY. [eis liiv fpiXinnov 
 imqar, country, understood.] 21. How does it happen that the 
 article often stands alone? [In consequence of the omission o( 
 a noun or participle.^ 
 
 ^5. — 22. Wliat is often equivalent to an adjective? [An 
 adverb with the article.] 23. The men op old. \_ol nalai, the 
 Umg ago men.] 
 
 <5> 6. — 24. How did the Greeks express ' she has a very beau- 
 tiful head?' [She has the head very beautiful.] 25. Distin- 
 guish between to naXov and ict xaXa. [to v.aXov, is: ^tlii 
 beautiful^ ' the honorable,' in the abstract ; beauty, ra xa/lce, 
 are: beautiful (or honorable") things; whatever things are beau- 
 tiful; what is beautiful; or simply, beautiful things.'] 26. How 
 is the first pers. pi. of the subj. often used? [In exhortations.] 
 27. What is 'noi' in an exhortation of this kind? [ft)?'.] 23. How 
 may the irifin. become (virtually) a declinable substantive? [By 
 being used with the article.] 29. Do abstract nouns and names 
 of materials generally take the art. ? [Yes.] 30. When does a 
 noun (whether sing, or plur.) always take the art. 1 [When a 
 whole class, or any individual of that class, is meant] 
 
 "5> 7. — 31. 6 [isv — ds: ol (tsv — ol Si. [{this — that ; the 
 one — the other) {these — tlwse ; some — others.y] 32. How does 
 6 de stand cmce in a narrative ? [For but or and he or it : the 
 article being here a pronoun.] 33. How y.ai, off? [For 'and 
 he ."' but only when the reference is to a person.] 34. When is 
 avTOS self? l^avzog is 'self,' when it stands .in the nom. iDithoul 
 a substantive, or in any case with one.] 35. When is it him, her, 
 it, &c. ? [avrog is him, her, it, &c. in an oblique case without a 
 substantive.] 36. When is avrog same? [o avzog is 'the 
 same.'] 37. Does avzo; standing alone in an oblique case, ever 
 mean self? [Yes, when it is the first word of the sentence.] 
 
 >§ 8. — 38. Does a noun with ovtog, ods, iitsivog, take the art. 
 or not ? [Yes.] 39. Where does the pron. stand ? [Either be- 
 fore the article, or after the noun.] 40. What does srag in the 
 sing, mean without the art. ? [' each,' ' every.'] — what with the 
 arl.1 I' the whole:' 'all.'] 
 
 ^ 9.— -41. In the reflexive pronouns {sftavTov, &c.) is the av- 
 '6g emphatic? [No.] 42. How must thyself {in ace.) be trans 
 
QUESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX. 18K 
 
 ated when it is emphatic? [avros must precede the pronoun. 
 avtbv ae, &c.] 43. How do you translate ' own ' when it is em- 
 phatic ? [By the genitive of the reflexive pronouns i/iavrov, 
 asavTOv, iaviov.^ — how his, theirs, &c. ? [By the gen. of av- 
 70g.] 44. Does iavTOv ever stand in a depetident sentence for 
 the nom. of the principal one ? [Yes.] 45. What pronouns arc 
 often used instead of a case o^gavtov, to express, in a dependent 
 clause, the subject of the principal sentence? [The simple av' 
 zov, or s, (ou, 01, — aq}£Tg, o-qjce?, &c.)] 46. Is ov ever simply 
 reflexive in Attic prose? [No.*] 47. To what Attic prose- 
 writer are the forms, ov, e confined 1 [To Plato.] 
 
 ■§ 10. — 48, How is the neut. plur. of an adjective, standing 
 without a noun, generally translated into English? [By the 
 singular.] 49. How is the neut. art. with a geK. case, used? [To 
 denote any thing that relates to, or proceeds from, the thing in 
 question.] 50. How are neut. adjectives often used ? ^Adverb- 
 ially.'] 51. When is the neut. singular generally used adverb- 
 ially? [When the adj. is of the comparative degree.] 52. When 
 the neut. plur. 7 [When the adjective is of the superlative de- 
 gree.] 53. Does a predi<satiye adjective ever not agree in gen- 
 der with the substantive it refers to? [Yes; when the assertion 
 is made of a class or general notion; not of a particular thing.] 
 54. In what gender do noXvg {nXsmv, nXsiatog) and ijfMavg 
 stand, when followed by a gen. ? [In the gender of the ge7i. that 
 follows them.] 
 
 ^ 11. — 55. In what number does the verb generally stand, 
 when the nom. is a neut. plur. 1 [In the singular^ 56. Whal 
 exception is there ? [When persons or living creatures are spolc- 
 en of.] 57. IVIention some predicates with which the copula is 
 very often omitted? 
 
 (a^tog and yalsnov, &ifug, wqa, cpQovSog, 'avdyxij, 
 QuSiov, and Svvatog (with its opposite word), and hoTfiog.) 
 ^ 12. — 58. Dothemoodsof the aor. refer to posi iime? [No.] 
 59. How do the moods of the aor. differ from the moods of the 
 present 1 [The moods of the aorist express momentary actions 
 
 * Tliat is, oi, I, &c. is not used by prose-writers in a principal sen- 
 tence, to express the subject of such sentence : its place is in a de- 
 pendent or accessory clause, to express the subject of the principal 
 clause. 
 
i84 QUESTIONS ON THE SYNl'AX. 
 
 those of the present, continued ones.] 60. Does the part, of the 
 aor. refer to yas< time? [Yes.] 61. Are the moods of the aor, 
 rendered by the pres. in English? [Yes.] 62. When ^ij/or- 
 Mds, what moods does it talte ? [fijj when it forbids, taltes the 
 imperative of the present, the subjunctive of the aorist.] 63. 
 What is the difference between ^^ with imperat. pres. and ft^ 
 with the subj. aor. ? [With the sitbj. aor. a definite single act is 
 forbidden; with imper. pres. a course of action. The imperat., 
 therefore, often forbids a man to do what he has already begun."] 
 64. Of what tense is the optative the regular attendant? [TVie 
 optative is the regular attendant of the historical temcs.*] 65. 
 What mood is the subj. after a pres. or fut. turned into, when in- 
 stead of the pres. or fut. an historical tense is used ? [The opta- 
 tive.] 66. When do the particles and pronouns, which go with 
 the indicative in direct narration, take the optative 7 [The parti- 
 cles and pronouns which go with the indicative in direct, take 
 the optative in oblique narration.]^ 
 
 ^ 13. — 67. How is an assertion modified by the use of av, or 
 in Epic poetry xk, xbv. \_ttv gives an expression of contingency 
 and mere possibility to the assertion.] 6S. What is the principal 
 use of a*? [The principal vse oi av is in the conclusion of a 
 hypothetical sentence.] 69. When av stands in a sentence 
 ■ifih\c\i is not hypothetical, to what does it often refer? [To an 
 implied condition^ 70. What particles are formed by the addi- 
 tion of av to si, ore, intiSri ? [iav, ijv, av, — otav, snuSdv.] 71. 
 How is av=el civ distinguished from the simple av ? \av= idv, 
 El av, regularly begins the sentence.] 72. What are the two 
 meanings of ei? [«' is 'i/:' but like our 'if it is often used fot 
 'whether.'] 
 
 Hypothetical Propositions. 
 
 73. 1) How is possibUUy without any expression of uncertaiit 
 lainty, expressed ? [ft with indtc. in both clauses.}] 
 
 * Or: ' Historicum sequitur tempus modus optativus.' 
 t This is the general rule : but the indicative is irequently used in 
 olihque narration. 
 
 t The consequent clause may have tlic Imperative. 
 
QUESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX. 185 
 
 74. 2) How is uncertainty with Uie prospect of decisicn ex- 
 pressed 1 [By ear with subjunctive in the conditional, and the 
 mdic. (generally the future) in the consequent clause.*] 
 
 75. 3) How is uncertainly expressed, when there ^a no such 
 accessory notion (as the prospect o? decision)? [By et with the 
 optative in the conditional clause, and av with the optative in the 
 consequent clause.] 
 
 76. 4) How is impossibility, or belief that the thing is not so, 
 expressed"? [si with imperfect or aorist indie, in the conditional 
 clause; «» with imperf. or aarist indic.m the consequent clause.] 
 77. When is the imperfect used in this form of proposition? [For 
 present time, or when the time is quite indefinite.'] 78. Can the 
 condition refer to past time, the consequence to present 7 [Yes.] 
 79. Which clause has ar, the conditional or the consequent clause 1 
 [The consequent clause.] 
 
 ^ 14.— 80. To what is the optat. with av equivalent? [The 
 optative with av is equivalent to our may, might, would, should, 
 &c.] 81. By what may the optat. with av often be translated ? 
 [The optative with av is often translated by the/«fere.] 82. 
 What force does av give to the infin. and participle? [The 
 same force that it gives to the optative.] 83. To what then is an 
 infinitive with av nearly equivalent? [To an infinitive future.] 
 84. After what verbs is the future frequently so expressed 1 
 [After verbs of hoping, thinking, trusting, praying, knowing, con- 
 fessing, &c., when a condition is expressed or implied.] 
 
 ^ 15. — 85. What mood do the compounds ofay.fand rela- 
 tives with av regularly take ? [The swbjunclive^ 86. What 
 changes take place, if any, when these compounds or relatives 
 with av come into connection with past time, or stand in oblique 
 narration? [They either remain unchanged, or the simple 
 words — «, or?, ifiEi8^ : og, oatig, oaog, &c. — take their place 
 with the optative.] 87. To what Latin tense does the aor. sub- 
 juncl. answer, when it stands with the compounds of av, or with 
 relatives and av 1 [To the Latin future perfect, futurum ex- 
 actum!] 
 
 % 16. — 88. Howls what often happened, in pasi tune, expre& 
 
 • The consequent clause may have the Imperative. 
 t That w, lav, 5TaVi tnciSaVf &G. 
 
186 
 
 CiUESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX. 
 
 sed?* [By ihe optative.'} 89. What mood and particlee would 
 be used lo express this sort of indefinite frequency for pres. or fut, 
 time? [Tlie relatives with tiV and compounds of «»-.] 90. What 
 force does S.v thus give to off and other relatives 1 [The force of 
 our — ever, — soever^ 
 
 ^ IT'. — 91. What mood is used in doubling questions ? [The 
 subjunctive.] 92. After what verbs is it sometimes thus used 1 
 [After ^oi5A«,; d-iXsig; ovx s)[(a or ol8a, anoQm, igcoza, ^i]ta,J 
 
 "§ 18. — ^93. When conditional propositions depend on another 
 verb, in what mood will the consequent clause stand 1 [In the 
 infinilive.] 94. What will stand in a dependent consequent clause 
 for noirjaca 1 [noitjasiv.} — for noioTpi ar, inoiow civ 1 [noieiv 
 "■V.} — for TToi^aaiix av, inoiijaa avi [noirjaai ar."] — for ntnoi- 
 Tjxoiii av, snenoi^xetv av t [nsnoitiHsvai «*.] 
 
 ■^ 19. — 95. Does ov or uri deny independently and directly? 
 [ow.] 96. When should not be translated by pjj ? [M»/ is used 
 \a prohibitions ; with concZiVtonaZ particles ; and particles expres- 
 sing intention or purpose.} 97. When do ore, onors, take pj;? 
 [When ' ipAen' implies a condition.] 98. Is ov or (itj used after 
 oti, cog, insi, insiS^ ? [ow.] 99. Is ov or fiij used {generally) to 
 express the opinionsofanoiAer person in oblique narration ? [ov.} 
 
 100. How should you determine whether oideig, ovSi, &c. are to 
 be used, or fnidsig, (iriSsI [Wherever ^not' would be translated 
 by jM)/, we must use not oiSeig, ovde, &c., but /iijdslg, ftijSe, &c.] 
 
 101. How must the positive adverbs and pronouns generally be 
 translated into Greek in negative propositions? [By the corres- 
 ponding negative forms.f] 
 
 ^ 20. — 102. Are the vefbals in reog act. or pass.? [Passive.} 
 
 103. What case of the agent do they govern? [The dative.} 
 
 104. What case of the object? [The same case as the verbs from 
 which they come.] 105. To what are these verbals in zeog 
 equivalent, when they stand in the neut. with the agent, in the 
 
 * Hermann properly observes, that the optat. does not itself express 
 the repetition of the act, but only carries with it the notion of indefinite- 
 ness, the repetition being marked by the other verb, e. g. either a fre- 
 quentative verb, or the imperf. or pluperf. tense (which both express 
 duration), or by an aorist with nXXaxi;, &c. 
 
 t Thus for either — or ; anywhere, at any time, any thing, we muel 
 iisc neither — nor ; nowhere: never ; nothing, &c. Rule 110, as a gen 
 cral assertion, is absurd. 
 
qlTESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX. 187 
 
 dal.f omitted 1 [To the participle in dus used in tiie same way.] 
 106. When may they be used in agreement with the olijecf? 
 [When formed from transitive verbs.] 107. Express "you 
 HBOCLD cnLTivATE VIRTUE," in two ways, with aaxijrsos and age- 
 Tq. [aax^zsW iatiaoi Tijv dgsT'^v, or aa>tijtett iaiiooiq aqsr-q^ 
 108. What peculiarities are there in Attic Greek with respect to 
 the use of these verbals 1 [The ncut. plur. is used as well as the 
 netit. sing. The agent is sometimes put in the accus. as well aa 
 the object.] 109. Render neiatiov ianp awrip, and nsiatsov 
 iativ avTov. [Tisiazsov lariv avzov, we must persuade him. 
 niiaziov lauv avT<fi we must obey Aim.] 
 
 § 21. — 110. What verbs govern two accusatives ■? [Verbs of 
 taking away from, teaching, concealing, asking, putting on or off, 
 take two accusatives.] 
 
 § 22. — 111. What case does the aec. after the active verb 
 become, when the act. verbis turned into ihepassive? [The worn.] 
 112. When the act. verb governs two accusatives, may either of 
 them (and if so, which'?) remain after the pass, verb ? [The aec. of 
 the person becomes the nam. ; that of the thing continues to be 
 the object of the passive verb, as in Latin.] 113. May the daX. 
 of the act. become the nom. of the passive? [Yes; sometimes.] 
 114. Will the ace. after the act. then remain as the ace. after the 
 passive? [Yes.] 115. Kenier {iym) Ttsmatsvtiai zovio. [lam 
 entrusted with this: or, I have had this entrusted tome.] 116. 
 Do intrans. verbs ever take an ace.? and, if so, when? [Intransi- 
 tive verbs take an ace. of a noun of kindred meaning; and some- 
 times of one that restricts the general notion of the verb to a par- 
 ticular instance.] 
 
 § 23.— -117. Does the ace. ever follow an adj. ? [Yes.] 118. 
 What prepos. might be supposed omitted? [jtaza, asto.^ 119 
 Wliat ace. is sometimes found with verbs that do not properly 
 govern the ace.? [The accus. of the neut. pronoun.] 120. How 
 \Bihe duration, of time expressed 1 [By the accusative.] 121. 
 How is the distance of one place from another expressed ? [By 
 '.he accusative.] 
 
 § 24. — 122. What case do partitives, &c. govern 1 [Partitives, 
 numerals, superlatives, &c. govern the genitive.] 123. What 
 case do adverbs of time and place govern ? [The genitive.] 124. 
 What case expresses the material out of which a thing is made 
 
188 QUESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX. 
 
 ana such other properties, circumstances, &c. as we should or- 
 press hy 'of? [The genitive.] 125. Can 'once a day' be trans- 
 lated literally? [No: it must be, 'once the day.'] 126. How doee 
 the gen. stand after possessive pronouns ? [In a kind of apposition 
 to the personal pronoun implied.] 127. How does the gen. stand 
 alone, or after interjections 7 [The gen. is used alone, or after in- 
 terjections, as an exclamation.'\ 
 
 § 25. — 128. What ease do verbal adjectives, in ixog, &c., with 
 a frans. meaning govern? [The genitive.] 129. What case do 
 verbs relating to plenty, want, value, &c., govern ? [The genitive.] 
 130. What case do verbs relating to the senses govern 1 [The 
 genitive.] 131. What exception is there ? [Verbs that denote 
 sight, which take the ace] 132. By what prepos., understood, 
 might the gen. sometimes be supposed governed ? [By ersxa, on 
 account o/.^ 133. After what verbs does the gen. frequently 
 stand in this way ? [After words compounded with a privative.} 
 
 § 26. — 134. Mention two large classes of verbs that govern 
 the gen. [Most verbs that express such notions as freeing from, 
 keeping off from, ceasing from^ deviating or departing from, &c. 
 govern the gen. Most verTjs that express remembering or for- 
 getting ; caring for or despising; sparing ; aiming at or desir- 
 ing ; ruling over or excelling ;' accusing of or condemning, &c. 
 govern the genitive; but not without many exceptions.] 
 
 § 27. — 135. What case does HaTuyiyvcoaxm {condemn) take 
 of the charge or punishment ? and what case of the person ? 
 [xarayiYvoiaxia has accus. of the charge or punishment ; gen. of 
 verson.} 136. May we say, 70vto xanjyoQelrai avtov, this is 
 laid to' his charge ? [Yes.] 
 
 § 28. — 137. In what case does the pnce or uaZue stand? [The 
 price or value is put in the genitive.'} 138. In what case is the 
 thing for which we exchange another, put? [The thing for 
 which we exchange another is put in the genitive.} 139. What 
 case of a noun of titrte answers to when? and what to since ox 
 within what time ? [The gen.] 140. In what case is the part by 
 which a person is led, got hold of, &c., put ? [The gen. expresses 
 tlie part by which a person leads, takes, or gets hold of any thing.] 
 
 § 29. — 141. In what case is the thing with which another is 
 compared, put when f, than, ia omitted ? [In the genitive.] 143, 
 How ii3 'greater than ever* expressed ? [By using alios before 
 
ilTESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX. 189 
 
 ihc gen. of the reflexive pronoun.] 143. How is ' too great ' ex 
 pressed ? [^Too great, &c. ia expressed by the comparative with ij 
 Kara before a substantive; ^ aazt before a verb in the infinitive.] 
 144. Still grjsater: much greater? [m [tsi^mi': noX).^ 
 
 § 30. — 145. How are two comparatives, joined, together by 
 ^, to be translated ? [By more than, or rather than, with the pos- 
 Uive^ 14G. By what words are superlatives strengtbened 1 [By 
 we, oti, onms, Bi &•"•] 1*7. What force have «t r«s x«( aAXo?, 
 si quis alius, andaiff aci^^, units omnium maxime 7 [The force of 
 superlatives.] 148. What case do neqirzog, and adjectives in 
 -nlAaios, govern 1 [The genitive.] 
 
 § 31. — 149. What does the da^ express? [The person to or 
 for whom a thing is done.] 150. What words does it follow ? 
 [Words that express union or coming together, and those that 
 express likeness or identity^ 151. In what case is the instru- 
 ment, &c. put? [The instrument, the manner, and the cause, are 
 put in the dative-l 152. In what case is the definite time-wftew 
 put? [In the dative.] 153. Does the dat. ever express the agetit 7 
 [Yes.] 154. After what words is this most common? [After 
 the perfect pass, and verbals in Teog, zos,'.] 155. What case do 
 verba of reproaching take, besides a dat. of the person ? [Verba 
 of reproaching, &c. take ace. of the thing, as well as dat. of per- 
 son, especially when it is a neut. prmwun^ 
 
 •5. 32.— 156. What does the miVMe voice denote ? [That the 
 agent does the action upon himself; or for his ovm advantage ; 
 or that he gets it done for his own advantage.] 157. What are 
 the tenses that have the middle meaning when the verb has it at 
 all ? 'JPres., imperf, perf, and pluperf. of the passive form ; 
 and tlie futures and aorista mid.] 158. Has the aor. 1. of the 
 pass, form ever a mid. meaning ? [Yes.] 
 
 "^ 33. — 159. What verbs of the middle form must be con- 
 sidered simply as deponents? [Middle forms, of which there ia 
 no activei\ 160. Mention some aor. 1. pass, with mid. meaning. 
 [xatsxkl&Tiv (t). antiU.uyqv, iusQaim&^v, iqio^^&ijr, ixolfu^r 
 &ijv, ^axi^&Tiv.] 161. Mention some fut. 1. mid. with pass, mean- 
 ing. [mcpeXijacfiai, onoloyi^aoi^ai, cpvkci^O[tai, ■fl-gs'i/)o/««i.] 162, 
 How is ' by,' to express the agent after the pass, verb, translated 3 
 'By vno with gen. ; also^by naQO. and nqog with gen.'} 
 
190 
 
 QUESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX. 
 
 ^ 34. — 163. What signification does the perf. 2. (commcjiily 
 ^aXhAperf. mid.) prefer? [The intrans. aigmQ 164. Haeitevei 
 ihe pure reflexive meaning of the middle ? [No.J 
 
 §35. — 165. What does the /««. 3. express ? [A ./j/tore action 
 continuing in its effects.^ 166. What notions does it express be- 
 sides that of ft future action continuing in its effects ? [The 
 speedy completion of an action, or the certainty of its completion.'} 
 167. What verbs have the/u<. 3. for their regular future? [Those 
 perfects that are equivalent to a present with a new meaning: 
 e. g-. fts/ivtiiiai., xexrijimi.'] 168. What answers to the fia. 3. in 
 the active voice ? [atyo^ae with perf. participle.'] 169. What is 
 generally preferred to the opt. and subj. of the perf. ; [The perf. 
 part, with siriv or co.] 170. In what verbs is the imperat. perf. 
 principally used ? [In those verbs whose perfects have the mean- 
 ing of a present: fis'/ivtiao, &c.] 17L What does the 3 pers. 
 imperat. of the perf. pass, express? [It is a strong expression 
 for let it be done, &c.] 172. How is a wish expressed in Greek ? 
 Isi&s with the optative — the optative alone — or mqislor* eg, s, 
 alone, or with st&s, si yuQ or cag, and followed by the infinitive.] 
 173. What mood and tense are used with tj'&s, if the wish has not 
 been, and now cannot be, realized ? [The tndic. of a/)rist or im- 
 perf, according as the time to which the wish refers is past or 
 present.] 
 
 '^ 36. — 174. Mention a use of the infinitive that the Greek and 
 English haoe, but the Latin has not. [It is used to express the 
 purpose.] 175. What does the particle ooais express ? [A con- 
 sequence.] 176. How is so — as to expressed ? [So — as to; aazt 
 with infinitive.] 177. How is so — that expressed? So — that; 
 mate with infinitive or indicative.] 
 
 <^ 37. — 178. What does the infin. with the article in the gen. 
 express ? [The infinitive with the article in the gen. sometimes 
 denotes a motive or purpose.] 179. When the infin. has a subject 
 of its own, in what case does it regularly stand ? [In the accusa- 
 tive.] 180. What prepos. with the infin. is equivalent to a sen- 
 tence introduced by fiecazwe ? [8id.] 181. When is the subject 
 of the infinitive generally not expressed ? [When the subject of 
 die infinitive belongs to, and is expressed with, the former verb.] 
 
 • Dciuit. 
 
QUESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX. 191 
 
 183. When the siibject of the infin. is omitted, because expressed 
 with the former verb, in what case is the noun after the infin. 
 generally put? [In the same case that the subject of the infini- 
 tive stands in in the other dause."] 183. Wliat is this construction 
 called? {Atlraclian^ 
 
 ^ 38, — 184. May attraetion take place when the infin. is in- 
 troduced by the art. or mare ? [Yes.] 
 
 •^ 39. — 185. What kind of sentences may be translated into 
 Greek by a participle ? [Relative sentences, and sentences in- 
 troduced hy when, after, if, since, because, although, &c.] 186. 
 How may the English participial substantive, under the governr 
 ment of a preposition, often be translated? [By a participle in 
 agreement.] 187. How may the first of two verbs connected by 
 and, ol^en be translated into Greek ? [By a participle.] 
 
 "^ 40. — 188. What participle often expresses a purpose t 
 [The participle of the future often expresses a purpose."] 189. 
 Mention some verbs that take the participle where lae should use 
 the infin., a paiticipial substantive, or ' that' [Many verbs that 
 signify emotions, perception by the senses, knowledge, recollection, 
 cessation or continuance, &c., take the participle, where we should 
 use the infinitive mood, the participial substantive, or ' iJiat.'] 
 
 ^ 41. — 190. By what are qi&dpm, come, or get before, and 
 lav&drco, am concealed, generally rendered? [By adverbs.] 
 191. Mention the adverbs and phrases by which kav&dvm may 
 be rendered. [^WitkoiU knowing it; unconsciously, unknown to 
 myself; without being observed; secretly; without being seen ox 
 discovered^ 192. How may 7.a&cav bo rendered ? [By secretly, 
 without being observed, seen, &c.] 193. How qi&daag or dvvaag 1 
 [Quickly; atonce, immediately.] 194. When q)&dvto and }.av&droj 
 are translated by adverbs, how must the participles with which 
 they are connected, be translated ? [By verbs.] 
 
 [Genitive Jlbsolute, S^c.) 
 
 "§ 42.— 195. Which case is put absolutely in Greek ? [The 
 genitive.] 196. What does the participle, put absolutely, express 1 
 [The time, or generally any such relation to the principal sehr 
 fence, as we should express by when, after, since, as, because, 
 'hough, if, &c.] 197. In what case do the participles of impep 
 
J 92 QUKSTIONS ON THE SYNTAX. 
 
 Bonal verbs stand absolutely! [In the nominative; of course 
 without a noun, and in the neuter gender.] 198. When the time 
 rejates to a person, what construction is used instead of the gen, 
 absolute? {tni is then generally expressed.] 199. How is a 
 motive, which is attributed to another person, generally expres- 
 sed 1 [By the particle ms with tlie gen. or ace. absolute.] 
 
 ( The Relative.) 
 
 ^43.-200. What does the relative often introduce? [A 
 cause, ground, motive, or design of what is stated.] 201. What 
 use of the relative is less common in Greek than Latin? [That 
 of merely connecting a sentence with the one before it.] 202. In 
 which clause is the antecedent often expressed ? [In the relative 
 clause.] 203. Where does the relat. clause often stand, when 
 this is the case ? [Before the principal clause.] 204. With what 
 does the relative often agree in case ? [With the antecedent in 
 the principal clause.] 265. What is this called 1 \_AUraction, of 
 the Relative.'] 206. When the relative is attracted, where is the 
 antecedent often placed ? [In the relative clause, but in the case 
 in which it would stand in the principal clause.] 
 
 ■^ 44.— 207. In such a sentence as " the fear, wliich we call 
 bashfulnes's," should which agree with fear or with baehfulness't 
 [With bashfdness.'] 208. Explain eativ oi. [It is equivalent to 
 tvioi, some, and may be declined throughout.] 209. What is the 
 Greelt for sometimes? lianv otb.']— somewhere 1 leaziv oriov.] 
 210. What is the English of s(f ^ or i(p qjre? [On condition 
 ihat.^—oT avif wp 1 {^Because, /o?.]— of u tig ? [ Whosoever ; 
 ei 11, whatsoever^ 211. By what parts of the verb is i(f ^ or 
 ^HE followed ? [By the future indie, or the injin.'} 
 
 <§i 45.— 212. Give the English of toD oiov aov dpSgog. [_Of 
 such a man as you.'] 213. How may this construction be ex- 
 plained ? lavdQOS Toiovzov, olos ah d.] 214. What words does 
 Saog follow, when it has the meaning of very! [Such words as 
 ^avuaaroe, nMaiog, a<f&ovog, &c.] , , » 
 
 ^ 46.— 215. What is the construction of ov8ug oatte ovl 
 
QUESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX! 193 
 
 [The declinable words are put under the immediate government 
 of the verb.] 
 
 § 47. — 216. What tenses follow liikloi in the infin. 7 [The 
 future, present, or aonst] 217. Which infin. is the most common 
 after /«8iJ,w, and which the least? [The/«tere infin. is the rrMst, 
 ihe aorist the least common.] 
 
 ^ 48. — 218. What mood or tense Mows onotg, when it re- 
 lates to the future? [The sa6;. or tlje/!rf«re indie] 219. May it 
 retain them in connection with past time 1 [Yes.] 220. Is the 
 verb on which onag &c. depends, ever omitted ? [Yes : the con- 
 struction is equivalent to an energetic imperative : — ogu or ogate 
 maybe supplied.] 231. With what mood or tense is ov ft^ used? 
 [With the fut. indie, or aor. sm6/.] 222. In what sense ? [As an 
 emphatic prohibition or denialj 223. According to Dawes, 
 what aorisls were not used in the subj. with pnooe and ov ixtj ? 
 [The subjunctive of the aor. 1. act. and mvi.} 224. Is this rule 
 correct ? [iVo.] 225. What is Buttraann's opinion ? [That the 
 subj. of the aor. 2. was employed with a kind of predilection, and 
 that, when the verb had no such tense, the fut. indie, was used 
 in preference to the subj. of the aor. 1.] 
 
 § 49. — 226. How is y«»/ used after expressions of fear, &c.? 
 [With the subjunctive- or indie] 227. When is the indie, with 
 u^ used in expressions of fear? [When the speaker wishes to 
 intimate his conviction that the thing feared, &e. has or will really 
 come to pass.] 228. How does it happen that [i^ ov sometimes 
 stands with a verb in the subjunctive, but without a preceding 
 verb ? [The notion of fear is often omitted before /lij oil, the verb 
 being then generally in the subj.'] 229. After what kind of ex- 
 pressions is fti] ov used with the infin. ? [After many negative 
 expressions.] ♦ 239. Is it ever used with the participle or infin.? 
 and, if so, when? [/ntj ov is sometimes used with the participle 
 and with (oazs and infin., after negative expressions.] 
 
 ^ 50. — ^231. When is fi^ used with relative sentences, parti- 
 ciples, adjectives, &o. ? [Whenever the negative does not di 
 reelly and simply deny an assertion with respect to some particu 
 lor mentioned person or thing.] 232. Does the infin generally 
 takeftjj orov? \jiri.'\ 233. When does it take ov? [When 
 opiuons or asserfdns of another person are stated in scrmone ab- 
 
 * See 293. (1) (2) (3). 
 9 
 
194 QUESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX. 
 
 liguo.'} 234. When should fii; follow mars'} and when oil 
 [With (oazs, the wfinilwe takes firi, the indicative o«.] 
 
 "^ 51. — ^235. What case do some adverbs govern? [The 
 same case as the adjectives from which they are derived.] 
 
 236. How is cSff sometimes used? [As a preposition =;rpoff.] 
 
 237. When only can ag he used as a prepos. ? [It is only joined 
 to persons.^ 238. What mood do agj^i, fif/Qi, «o?, iars take ? 
 [The subj. or opt. when there is any uncertainty; the indie, when 
 not.] 239. Does reply av el&a relate to the past or Ihe future? 
 [To the future.] 240. How is 'before I came' expressed ? [npiv 
 rj sX&eTv t/is: nQir iX&siv ifis: or ngiv tjX&ov syoo.] 241. Is ^ 
 ever omitted before the infin. after tiqiv ? [Yes ; in Attic Greek 
 nearly always.] 
 
 i^) 52. — 242. In what kind of questions is ccga generally 
 used ? [In questions that imply something of uncertainty, doubt, 
 or surprise.^ 243. What interrog. particles expect the answer 
 ■Yes?' [The answer 'Yes' is expected by — ag oh; tj ydg; 
 ov ; ovMovr ; u).ln ii ^ ;] 244. What expeqt the answer 'No'? 
 [The answer 'iVb' is expected by, — aga /ly ; ^ nov ; num forte? 
 fitj or /xmv ;] 245. What particles give an ironical force to ov ? 
 [5iy, d^ 710V.'] 246. Does ov expect 'yes' or '?io' for answer? 
 [ov expects yes; fiy, no.] 247. In what kind of questions are 
 iha, Ensira ujed ? [Such as express astonishment and dis- 
 pleasure.] 248. What words are used as a simple interrog. par- 
 ticle? [alXo zi ij.] 249. Render tl na&mv ; — zi fia&dv ; 
 [rt na&(ov ; what possesses you to . . . &c. ? — rt ftu&cov ; what 
 induces you to . . . &c. 1 
 
 ^ 53. — 250. What are the proper forms of pronouns and 
 adverbs for indirect questions? [Those which are formed from 
 the direct interrogatives by the prefixed relative syllable 6 — .] 
 251. Are the simple interrogatives ever used in indirect ques- 
 tions? [Yes.] 252. Are the relatives cyci bo used? [Yes; 
 but very seldom.] 253. When the person addressed repeats the 
 question, what forms does he use ? [The'-.forms beginning' with 
 6 — .] 254. When the pron. or noun is the ace. after one verb, 
 and the mm. before the next, which case is generally omitted 1 
 [The nominative.] 
 
 ^ 54. — 255. By what particles are direct double questions 
 asked 1 [By notsgov, or noiega, — ^, less commonly by ^a-^.l 
 
QUESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX. 195 
 
 256. By what particles are indirect double questions asked'? 
 [sits — sviE, SI — ^, norsgov — ij.] 
 
 § 55. — 257. After what verbs is si used for on, that 7 [Af- 
 ter &uv(iaZoi, and some other verbs expressive of feelings. | 
 
 258. After what verbs has « the force of whether ? [After verba 
 of seeing, Jenowing, considering, asking, saying, trying, &c.'\ 
 
 259. When is ed* used in this way ? [When the question re- 
 Jates to an eoopecied case that remains to be proved.^ 
 
 "^ 56. — 260. How can an interrogative sentence be con- 
 densed in Greek ? {By attaching the interrogative to a partici- 
 ple, or using it in an oblique case.] 261. What clause may thus 
 be got rid of? [A relative clause attached to an interrogative 
 one.] 
 
 ■ i^i 57.- — 262. What is ij (t^fl [A solemn form of assevera- 
 tion.] 263. When is the propos. avv omitted ? [Before aittp, 
 avtri, &c. which \la&a=togelher with, witt.] 264. How is anq^6- 
 TEQOv used ? [^ajiqiorsQOV is used adverbially, or elliptically, by 
 the poets, for both ; as well — as, &c.] 265. How a/icpStSQU ? 
 [In reference to two words, without being made to conform to 
 them in case.] 266. What force has ttai, when it refers to aX- 
 JLoff? [The hrce. oC especially, in particular.'\ 267. Explain the 
 use o^ the part. fut. with fQ)[Ea-&ai, &c. [iQ^sa'&ai, iivai, ivith 
 part, fut., is, to be going to, or on the point q/i] 268. How is 
 iy_e) sometimes used with a pa^t partic. ? [As an emphatic cir- 
 cumlocution.] 269. How is it used with XriqsXv, &c. 1 {sfto with 
 tlie second pers. o^XijQsTv, nai^sir, (fi-vagsiv, &c. is used to make 
 a good-hiimoured observation.] 270. How is (fsgmv used in 
 some expressions? [gjy'gooj' appears redundant in some expres- 
 sions, but denotes a vehemence of purpose, not altogether free 
 from blame.2 
 
 <§> 58. — 271. To what is dixaiog sl^i equivalent 1 [To Si- 
 xttiop saiiv, ifiB, &c.] 272. How is oooi' used ? [ouov is used 
 elliptically with the injin.^ 273. What words are followed hy f^l 
 [Words that imply a comparison : e. g. (p&dvsiv, dtaqis'gstv, ivuv- 
 tiog, Sinkdaioe, iSiog, vnsQ&sv, ngir.^ 274. After what phrases 
 is a tense of noisiv omitted 7 [After ovdsv uXi.o i] — , aXi.o ri 
 5 — ; « tiXXo ri — ,• &c.] 275. By what are a person's quoted 
 words introduced'? [By ort.] 276. How is the aor. used with 
 c/ ov ? [For the present^ 
 
INDEX 1. 
 
 jyOss. Look ander ' am ' for adjectives, phrases, &,c. wilh to ie. 
 F. M.=future middle. 
 
 (1) implies, that the pupil is to ask himself how the word- is con 
 jugated or declined. 
 
 A. 
 
 A, = a certain, ttg, 12. 
 
 About (of time), iino [ace), 
 326. 
 
 (after to fear, to he 
 
 at ease, <fcc.), nsqi {dat.), 
 283*. 
 
 (after talk, fear, con- 
 tend), asqi {dat), some- 
 times «^qpt [dat.), 283*. 
 
 (after to be employ- 
 ed), nsQi, or ufttpi, with 
 ace, 283*. 
 
 Abrocomas, 229, note q. 
 'A^QOxofiag, G. a. 
 
 Abstain from, ant-pnai 
 [gen.), 138. 
 
 : we must — , 
 
 aqtsxTsov iati, with gen. 
 
 According to reason, xara 
 loyov, 274. 
 
 Accuse, xar);yo§£H't (proper- 
 
 ly, speak against) imos, 
 or Tivog ti, 156. — iyxulEiv 
 (properly, cite a person; 
 call him into court) nvi 
 and tivi ti, 183. Both are 
 judicial words, but used 
 with the same latitude as 
 our ' accuse.^ Of the two, 
 iyxaXsiv should probably 
 be preferred, if the charge 
 relates to private matters. 
 
 Accustom, si>tfo), 52. 
 (Am accustomed, h9i(5 
 fiai or titoQa, 52.) 
 Acquire, xrdoixai, 87. 
 Act, noim, 60. 
 
 — insolently towards, v^qC 
 ^eiv eig riva, 138. 
 
 — strangely, &av(iaaThf 
 noiuv, 259. 
 
 — • unjustly (= injure), aSt- 
 
 t The constnictions of Karnypi'" are very numerous : KaTtiyapCi roi 
 rtvSs and Ti i or o-l rtvos and « ; or coi (and m) mpl nvos ; and xa-dyipu 
 lara vov. 
 
198 
 
 INDEX 1. 
 
 neip nva and n (also eIs, 
 
 nqog, nsqi nva), 138. 
 Admire, •^ar^a^oo, F. M. 
 
 generally, 8. 
 Adopt a resolution, ^ovXsvsa- 
 
 Oai, 190. 
 Adorn, xoafiim, 206. 
 Advance, nqoyiaqia, 27 L 
 Affair, ngayfia, to, 8. 
 Affliction, na&og, to, 150. 
 Afford, ««p4<», 214. 
 After, fAsza (ace), 293*. 
 a long time, Sm nol- 
 
 lov xQovov, 270. 
 some time, Sialmav 
 
 XQovon, 235. 
 
 Std ^Qovov, 
 
 270. 
 
 — - our former tears, ix 
 Twv TiQoa&sv dayQvwv, 231. 
 the manner of a dog. 
 
 xwog dixtjv, 250. 
 Again, av&ie, 100. 
 Against (after to march), 
 
 tTii, ace. 24. tig, 259. 
 (=in violation of), 
 
 TzaQOL, 299. 
 (after commit an 
 
 injury), elg or ftagl, with 
 
 ace, 138. 
 
 ngog (ace), 319. 
 
 (after verbs of speak- 
 ing, &c.), xard genit., 
 274. 
 
 Age (a person's), rilma, tj, 
 144. 
 
 Agreeable, riSvg, 214. 
 
 Agreeable : if it is — , eI oik 
 
 ^ovXojiivdf iaji, 206. 
 Agricultural population, oi 
 
 a/uqpS p;v sj^oiras, 278. 
 Aid, (m«ovgm,dat., also ace 
 
 of the thing, 239. 
 Aim at, aroxd^oiiai, gen,, 
 
 156. 
 Alas, qiBv, — o'noi, 144. 
 Alexander, 'Ale^avSQoe, 24. 
 All, 6 Tiag, or nag 6 — . PI, 
 
 Tiavreg. See note on 44, 
 
 46. 
 
 — but {as-much-as-not), 
 oaov ov, 125. 
 
 — day, dva naaav rhv vue- 
 qav, 259. 
 
 Alliance. See Form. 
 
 Allow to taste, yeiw, 150. 
 
 to be done with im- 
 punity, nsQiOQq,v (-tdeiv, 
 -6if>sa&ai), with inf. of 
 thing to be prevented; 
 the partic. of a wrong to 
 be revenged, 331. See 
 note °. 
 
 Almost, oliyov Mv, or ohyov 
 only, 283,_ 
 
 Already, Tjdrj, 65. 
 
 Also, Kai, 92. 
 
 Although, xaiTZEQ, 175, 
 
 (a.) 
 
 Am able, dvmfiai (possum), 
 87. — olSg Ts eifu'[ {tpxeo), 
 283. See Can, 
 
 + Or otdcTS (ordtrr'). 
 
INDEX I. 
 
 199 
 
 A.m (an) actual murderer, 
 avt6)isiQ sifii, 299. 
 
 — adapted for, owe ^t/u, 
 283. 
 
 — angry with, ogptoiiai, 
 dat, 183. di oQyrjg s^siv, 
 270. 
 
 — ashamed, alai'ivoiiai, 
 
 — at a loss, anoqta, 100. 
 [See 98, 99.] 
 
 — at dinner, dsmvsco, 288. 
 
 • — at enmity with, fit' %- 
 Og«g yiyvBO&ai zivi, 270. 
 
 — at leisure, axold^m, 112. 
 
 — at liberty. iSee 249. 6. 
 
 — awake, ijQtjyoQa, 193. 
 
 — aware, inKv&dvm (?), 239, 
 
 (b.) ^ 
 
 Am banished, qtsvysiv, 270. 
 
 — broken, xazsaya, 193. 
 
 — by nature, nsqimu, eqivf, 
 214. 
 
 Am come, ^xou, with mean- 
 ing o/'perf. 206. 
 
 ■ — commander, ajqarriyim, 
 52. 
 
 — confident, ninoi&a, 193. 
 
 — congealed, ninriya, 193. 
 
 — conscious, avfotda siiav- 
 ICO, 239. 
 
 — contemporary with, na- 
 zx Tov avrov y^qovov yevsa- 
 9ai, 183. 
 
 — contented with, ayandm, 
 with ace. or dat., 52. 
 
 (d.) 
 
 Am dishonoured by, ttzt/ici. 
 ^Ojuoce Ttgog Tivog, 319. 
 
 — distant from, dm'x(a, 138 
 
 — doing well, sv nquzzoo, 8. 
 — ill, XKXwff nquzzoa, 
 
 8. 
 
 (e.) 
 
 Am evidently, &c. See 239. 
 
 (f-) 
 Am far from, nolXov dsm, 
 283*. 
 
 — fixed, nintffa, 193 
 
 — fond of, dyandfa, 52. 
 
 — fortunate, e.vzvyia, 92. 
 
 (gO 
 
 Am genera], azqdzriyiai, 52. 
 
 — glad, ijdo/xtti, dat., 20. 
 
 — going (to), nsXXto (aug- 
 ment?), 283*. 
 
 — gone, oixofiai^'}), perfect 
 meaning, 206. 
 
 — grateful for, jfa'gM' olda 
 (gen. of thing, dat. of 
 pers.), 222. [for olSa, see 
 73.] 
 
 (h.) 
 Am here, ndqeipii, 52. 
 
 (iO 
 
 Am I . . . ? (in doubtfui 
 questions) 137, note e. 
 
 — ill (of a disease), ndnvca 
 
£00 
 
 INDEX I. 
 
 {laboro) ; xafiovfiai, xtx- 
 fH]xa, exafiov, 183. 
 
 — in my right mind, froo- 
 qiQOism, 125. 
 
 — in a passion or rage, )^a- 
 Xenxiva, dat., 183. 
 
 — in safety, sv rqi aatfoksi 
 eifii, 299. 
 
 — in the habit of perform- 
 ing, nQcixTixog (sim), with 
 ffen. See 149. 
 
 — indignant, avamxreoD, 
 337. 
 
 — informed of, alaOdvo- 
 liai (?), 190 
 
 Am likely, fi^D.m (?), 283*. 
 
 — lost, aTSQOvuai, 168*. r. 
 
 (m.) 
 
 Am mad, /laivo^ai (?), 125. 
 
 my own master, ijauv- 
 
 rov elfti, 162*. i. 
 
 (n.) 
 
 Am named after, ovoi^a ifm 
 
 itii jivog, 288. 
 near, oXiyov Ss'co, or 6h'- 
 
 yov only, 283*. 
 ■ next to, houai, sren. 
 
 149. d. ' ^ ^ ' ^ 
 
 not a man to, 283. b. 
 
 afraid of, ^ajj^ffw 
 
 (ace), 138. 
 
 (o.) 
 Am of opinion, vofii^ai, 52. 
 
 Am of service to, oKfEiioi 
 (ace), 82. 
 
 a character (to), eiff 
 
 oJog, 283. b. 
 off, oixoiiui (J?), per/. 
 
 meaning, 206. 
 on my guard, (pvXdTTso-- 
 
 &UI, ace. 190. 
 on his side, u/u TTQog 
 
 {gen.), 319. 
 on an eqtial footing 
 
 with, ofiowg sifii, 227. b. 
 
 (P-) 
 Am pained at aXysm, 20. 
 
 persuaded, nmoi9a, 193. 
 
 pleased with, ijdofiai, 
 
 dat. 20. 
 
 present, naQst/xi, 52. 
 
 produced. See 214. 
 
 prosperous, smv^sm, 92. 
 
 punished, dixriv dMvai, 
 
 or Sovvai : gen. of thing ; 
 
 dat. of person by whom. 
 
 228. 
 
 Am safe, iv t^ aaqiciXBT diu. 
 
 slow to, &c., (sxoXri {by 
 
 leisure), with a verb, 112. 
 
 suffering (from a dis- 
 ease). See ' am ill of.' 
 
 surprised at, &avud^a 
 
 (F. M.), 8. 
 
 (t.) 
 Am thankful for, ydQiv olSu, 
 gen. of thing, 222. Foi 
 olSa see 73, note q. 
 
201 
 
 Am the slave of, dovXsvm, 
 dat. 359. 
 
 there, nuQsiiu, 92. 
 
 • — . to, (liXlfs) (1), 283* 
 
 Am undone, oXtoXoi, anolm- 
 
 Xa, 193. 
 unseen by, Xav&dvm (?), 
 
 ace. 154. 
 
 Am vexed, ai&oiiai (?) {dat. 
 but ini in construction ex- 
 plained in 19*. c), 20. 
 
 (w.) 
 
 Am wholly wrapt in, nqog 
 Toirc^ oXoe £11*1, 319. 
 
 wise {=j)rudent), aro- 
 
 qiQovsco, 125. 
 
 with you, ndqsiiM, 92. 
 
 — — within a Kttle, oXlyov 
 dim, 283». 
 
 without fear of,' -^Mg^tM, 
 
 ace. 138. 
 
 Ambassador, nQsa^vi, 259. 
 
 Ambitious, cpiXoti/iog, 214. 
 
 Among the first, translated 
 by KQ^diiEvog {having be- 
 gun). See 100. 
 
 And that too, xaeraSra, 206. 
 
 yet, sha, ensna, 315. 
 
 —. — nevertheless, slza, smi- 
 ta, 315. 
 
 Ancestor, nqoyovog, 156. 
 
 Animal, t,6iov, 65. 
 
 Annoy, Xvnsco, 41. 
 
 Answer, affoxg/fofiai (?),278. 
 9' 
 
 Apart, /oog/ff, 309. 
 Apollo, '^OTo'Aioov (?), 341, 
 Appear (with parf,), qmuvo 
 
 lua, 239. 
 Apt to do, or perform, hquh 
 
 tixoe (gen.), 150. 
 
 govem,dQxi«6g(gen.). 
 
 150, 
 
 Arbitration, Bmza, 132. 
 
 Are there any whom . .1 
 269. d. 
 
 Arise, iysiQO/iai {pass.), 193. 
 
 Arms, o;r>l«, 168*. 
 
 Army, atQatsvua, to, 24. 
 
 Arouse, BysiQto (perf. with 
 Attic redupl.), 193. 
 
 Arrange, Tatwoj (later Attic 
 Tarzoj), 96. — xoafie'ai, Sici- 
 xoofisco (to arrange, with 
 a view to a pleasing ap- 
 jBeara7ice of elegance,sym- 
 metry apt arrangement, 
 &c.),206. 
 
 Arrive, dcpixno/iai (?), 144. 
 first, (pd-ijvai (?) a<f- 
 
 ixo/xsrog, 242. d. 
 — , but only, <fcc., 
 
 358. &. 
 Art, rsxvj], 214. 
 As he was, 351. 
 
 — his custom was. Sea 
 Custom. 
 
 ~ many as, oaoi, 175. 
 
 possible, oaoi 
 
 nXsTaroi, 174. c. 
 
 — silently as possible, aiyl 
 wg dwaiov, 174. b. 
 
 — far as they are concerned. 
 TO im rovroig sJvai, 206. 
 
202 
 
 INDEX I. 
 
 As far at least as ihisis con- 
 cerned, TOVZOV VS iViXtt, 
 
 250. 
 Is far as depends on this, 
 10VT0V j's svtxa, 250. 
 
 — as much as any body. 
 See 100. 
 
 — the saying is, to Isyofis- 
 vov, 137. d. 
 
 — possible ( after superla- 
 tives), wg, oTt, 171. 
 
 — he possibly could, 174. c. 
 
 — fast as they could, cos rd- 
 Xovg ilxov, 278. 
 
 — soon as he was born, cv- 
 ■Ove yivo/isvog, 309. 
 
 — long as, iars, 306. 
 
 — to, aazs, with inf., 211. 
 
 — (before partic), are, ats 
 Si 242. a. 
 
 Ask, riqoixriv, aor. 2 : fgcoTa'oo 
 used for the other tenses, 
 73. 
 
 for aheco {two accusa- 
 tives), 87. 
 
 Assist in the defence of, §ori- 
 ■Oe(o, dat. 121. 
 
 Assistance. iS'eePlyo/'Run. 
 
 Associate with, oiuleco, dat. 
 183. 
 
 Assuredly (in protestations), 
 ij firiv, 343. 
 
 • (will not), ov [iri, 
 
 287*. 
 
 Astonished (to be), -Oavud^co 
 (F. M.) 
 
 At,319.^ 
 
 — all, tlQX>}v or rrjv agx'/^j 
 93, 132. 
 
 At. Not at all {ovdev n). 
 
 — a little distance, 8i hliyov. 
 270. 
 
 — a great distance, Sia noh 
 lov, 270. 
 
 — any time, noti!. 
 
 — ease about, OangsTv aeot, 
 283*. 
 
 — first, dQyojjstos, 235. 
 
 — home, hdov, 125. 
 
 — last, 70 TsXevtaiov, 34* ; 
 i£).Evrm', 235. 
 
 — least, ye, 73. 
 
 — once, r^Si], 65— How to 
 translate it by the partic. 
 cpOdaag, or by ovk av qiOd- 
 voig; see 242. e.f. 
 
 — the beginning, aQvousvog, 
 235. 
 
 — the suggestion of others, 
 d?! dvSqmv sreqaiv, 243. 
 
 Athens, 'A&Hivat, 15. 
 
 (O) Athenians, <» dvSqsg 
 
 'A&Tivuioi, 337. 
 Attach great importance to, 
 
 nqo noXXov noiua&ai, 243. 
 
 — nsqi noXlov noisTa&ai or 
 
 ijyeia-d-ai, 283*. 
 Attempt, miqdonai, 121. — 
 
 (=rfa/-e) ToXf^KM, 239. 
 Attend to, rov vow nqoasfsiv, 
 
 331. 
 
 a master, eig St- 
 
 SaaxdXov qsoiidv, 259. 
 Avoid = fly from, qiEvyuv, 35. 
 
 B. 
 
 Bad, xaKog, 20. 
 
 Banished (tobe), qievysw, 27U. 
 
INDEX I. 
 
 203 
 
 Banishment, <fvy^, 156. 
 
 Barbarian, ^uQ^aQoe, 132. 
 
 Bare, ipiXSe, 235. 
 
 Bathe, Xovo/tai., 188 (1). 
 
 Battle, iid^ti, 73. 
 
 Base, alci][Q6g, 35. 
 
 Bear, q)SQsiv (?), 60. — drexo- 
 (lai {= endure) refers to 
 our power of enduring 
 {labours, insults, (fee), 
 214. — Toliido} (= susti- 
 ncre), to bear to do what 
 requires courage, 239, 
 note y. 
 
 Beautiful, ttuXog, 20. 
 
 Beauty, xdlXog zo, 8. 
 
 Because {diet to, &c.), 221. 
 b. avSr coy, 267. 
 
 Become, yiyvoixai (?), 15. 
 
 Befpre.t nqtv or ;ret»' ^, 307. 
 
 ■ (= in preference to), 
 
 nrgo (g-era.), 243; dvTi,gen. 
 213. e. 
 
 Beget, j-Ewaw, 239. 
 
 Begin, aQj^ojxai, .100. 
 
 Beginning, %7, 132. 
 
 Behave ill to, xaxcog nouiv, 
 ace. 35. 
 
 Behold, {fsdo/iai, 87. 
 
 Belong to, gen. with «&««. 
 
 Belly, yaatriQ,ri (?), 235. 
 
 Benefit, aqsElia (ace), 82. 
 
 Beseech, Sn'ofnai, 150, (^ere. 
 149. 6.) Ssi^aoiiai, ids^&}]v. 
 
 Besides, im(dat.),288. naQU 
 (ace), 299. 
 
 Kr, l^^^Gfood, 35. 
 
 Bethink myself, g/qofxiXm, 
 
 288. 
 Between, ^MSTaliJ, 28. 
 Beyond, nuQd (ace.) 299. 
 Bid, xelevo}, 112. 
 Bird, oQvig. See 15, note g 
 
 : young — ,tisoaa6g,214.. 
 
 Birth, yevog, i6, 150. 
 
 Black, /telaff, 87. 
 
 Blame, iJii(UfO(iB.>, dat., iyxa 
 
 Xs'co, dat. 183. 
 Body, ffcBfta, 138. 
 Boldly, &a^Qmr, part. 331. 
 Both, ajiqKo, aiiqiorepog. See 
 
 28. 
 Both — and, xai — xai, or it 
 
 — xui, 112. 
 Both in other respects — and 
 
 also, ali(og rs xai, 278. 
 Boy, !iaTg,15. 
 Brave, avSQUog, 175. 
 a danger, yifSwevsui nif- 
 
 Svvov, 131. d. 
 Bread, aQtog, 299. 
 Break, dyvvjii, xatdyvvfii (?), 
 
 193. 
 
 (a law), uttQa^utvo), 228. 
 
 Breast, otsqvov, 193. 
 Bring, aym, 341. 
 
 -assistance to, imxovQs'm 
 
 dat.^ also ace. of the thing, 
 239. 
 
 — forth, tixTiu, (?), 15. 
 up, TQsqxo, 190. — nai' 
 
 8sv€3, 214. 
 
 TQsqxo relates to physi- 
 cal, Tzaidevco to moral 
 education : i. e. rgsqici 
 
 t How to translate ' before' by ^Oirai, see 242, d. 
 
204 
 
 INDEX I. 
 
 to the body, naiSevto 
 to the mind. 
 ^-^ bad news, vtarsqov ti 
 
 ayyiXleiv, 318. g-. 
 Brother, u8iXq,6g, 20. 
 Burn out, ixytddco, 341. xavam, 
 
 &;c. — ixavdrir. 
 [Jut, de — (a i^sp should be in 
 
 the former clause), 38, 
 
 note h. 
 
 — for, d fiq due, with ace. 
 
 125. 
 Buy, ayoQoi^to, 163. 
 
 ■ vno, with goi, of 
 By J agent, 326. 
 ■^ j TiQos, after to be prais- 
 
 [ ed or blamed by. 
 
 - (= close by), nqos, 319. 
 
 - (= cause), vno, gen, and 
 after passive verb, 326. 
 
 — Jupiter, (fee. *^ /lia, vt] 
 
 Tov Jia, 341. 
 
 - the hands of, vno, gen. 
 
 326. 
 
 — the father's side, nqog 
 naTQog, 319. 
 
 — fives, (fee, avct nivie, 259. 
 
 — what conduct? ii av 
 
 noiovvTsg ; 340. a. 
 
 — compulsion, vii avdy/.i^g, 
 
 326. 
 
 C. 
 
 Calculate, lop^ea^ai uQog 
 
 eavTOV, 319. 
 Calumniously: to speak — 
 
 of, lotSoQsoftai, dat. 1 83. 
 Can, Svvanai (possum), 87. 
 
 — otos ze dill iqueo), 283. 
 
 The former relates W 
 power, the latter to con- 
 dition or qualification, 
 Aug. oiSvtajiail 
 Can ; that can be "] 
 
 Capable of being [''^«''^°<' 
 
 taught, J 
 
 Care for, x^Soixai (gen.), 156 
 Carefully provide for, sx^a- 
 
 {yat, gen. 149. d. 
 Cares, qiQovTcdsg, 150. 
 Carry a man over, moaiovt, 
 
 188 (1). 
 Catch (in commission of a 
 
 crime), aliaxoiiai (?), 73, 
 
 note s. 
 Cause, airiQv, 100. 
 
 to be set before me, 
 
 naqaii&ilJiai, 188. 
 
 Cavalry, innug {pi. of i/i- 
 nsvg), 96. 
 
 Cease, wai/o^atof what map 
 be only a temporary, 
 X^ym of a. final cessation, 
 at least for the time. J.ijyw 
 terminates the action ; 
 navo/iai breaks its con- 
 tinuity, but may, or may 
 not, terminate it. They 
 govern g-era., 154. 188(1). 
 navofitti with partic. 239. 
 
 Certain (a), tig, 12. d. 
 
 Character: of a — to, eipai 
 olog (infin.), 283. 
 
 Charge (enemy), iXuvreir slg, 
 sometimes im, 96. 
 
 with, {'^xa^cin, dat 
 
 of peis., ace. of thing, 183 
 
205 
 
 Chixrge,it«Ti]yoQd(o,'fgen.l56. 
 
 : prosecute on a — , 
 
 3«o)xs(»', gen^ of crime, 35. 
 am tried orv a- 
 
 (psvyetv, gen. of crime, 35. 
 
 Chase, ^^ga, 154. 
 
 Chastise, xolafro, F. M., 121. 
 
 Chatter, ;ia;isw, 288. 
 
 Child, }iai8iov, 150. 
 
 Childless, uTzaig, 150. 
 
 Choose, aiQsoi^at (?), 190. a. 
 
 : what I choose to 
 
 do, a 8oKsT {[ioi), 96. See 
 Ditr. 33. 
 
 Citizen, nolcTTjg (r). 8. 
 
 City, nohg, fj. 8. — aatv, to. 
 24. !^(TTi; refers to thesi^e 
 or buildings : nohgtoihe 
 citizetis. Hence aatv 
 never means ^ stated as 
 no'J.Js so often does. The 
 ttffrv was often an old or 
 sacred part of a nohg. 
 
 Clever, ao(f6e, 20. 8siv6g, 214. 
 
 Cleverness, aotfia, 24. 
 
 Cling to, s'^sa&ai, gen. 149,c?. 
 
 Close by, im, dat. 288. noog, 
 319. 
 
 Collect, i&qail^w, 175. 
 
 Combat, a disorder, imxov- 
 gstv voacp, 239. 
 
 Come, iQiofiai (?), 112, note 
 b. 
 
 : am, — j/xoo, jierf. 
 
 meaning, 206. 
 
 — — ^ (=^ be present to as- 
 sist), nuQsivai, 92. 
 
 Come for this (to effect it), 
 
 eX&etp inc toiti^. 
 — ; — (to fetch it), 
 
 sX&sTv CTzl TOVtO. 
 
 off, uaaXXaTTm (ex or 
 
 aaS), 154. 
 Come on or up, nqoasiiii, 176. 
 
 next to, e)^sa&ai, gen. 
 
 said that he would- 
 
 eq)i] ^^sir, 91. b, or slntv ozi 
 
 il^oi, 205. e. 
 Command (an army), atQa- 
 
 triym, 52. 
 Commence a war, ugaa&ai 
 
 noXt/iov nqog, acc. 188. 
 Commit, ImtQiTKo, dat. 132. 
 a sin, ufittQTdvoo (?) 
 
 {elg or nsQi, with acc), 154. 
 an injury, admscv 
 
 aSixlav, 138. 
 Company, oiiiliu, 112. 
 
 keep — , biiAiw, 
 
 dat. 
 Complaint (a),(Jff^tj/«t« (= a 
 
 •weakness, an infirmity), 
 
 319. 
 Concerned, as 
 
 far as this is, 
 as far 
 
 rovTov ys 
 stisxa, 250 
 
 at least as 
 
 this is. 
 Condemn, xatapyptoaitm (?), 
 
 156, obs. 
 Condition: on — , cm ^ or 
 
 4i:i, 267. 
 Confer benefits on, tv tiomv^ 
 
 acc. 35. 
 
 t See note, on Accuse. 
 
aoa 
 
 INDEX I. 
 
 Confess, oftoXoyt'oo, 190. 
 
 Confide to, imrqinco, 132. 
 
 Conquer^ vTxato {vincere ; 
 gain a victory over ene- 
 mies ;) }iEQiyiyvea9ai (?), 
 overcome {gen.) P3='lu' 
 omitted after conquer 
 when it stands before 
 ' battle.' 
 
 Consider, axonsa (of care- 
 fully examining and re- 
 flecting on a point, 100. — 
 qQovTtXoa (of anxious con- 
 sideration), 288. — with 
 oneself, nag iavtov (axon- 
 iw or axinjEa&ai), 3I9. 
 
 Considerable, av%v6g, 163. 
 
 Consideration, a^imixa, 144. 
 
 Constitution, nohzsla, 206. 
 
 Consult, ^ovievHv, 190. 
 
 together, ^ovlsvsa- 
 
 &ai, 190. 
 
 Consume, amXisxat (?), 235. 
 
 Contemporary with, to be. 
 See 183. 182. a. ^ 
 
 Contend with, iQii^a, dat. 
 183. 
 
 Contention, iqig, iSog, 183. 
 
 Continuous, avxfog, 163. 
 
 Contrary to, nagd (ace.) 299. 
 
 Contrivance, rs^»')/,214. 
 
 Corn, ahog, 259. 
 
 Corpse, vexQog, 150. 
 
 Country, x'OQOi (a country), 
 24. — TiuTQig (native coun- 
 try or rative city), 228. 
 
 Crocodile, agoxoSsiXog, 28. 
 
 Cross (a river), negaiovcr&ai, 
 v/ith aor. pass. 188 (1 ). 
 
 Crowded, daavg, 150. 
 Crown, ateqiavoe, 144. 
 Cry, xXaim (?), 150. Baxovoo 
 
 283*. 
 Cultivate, affxeai, 121 . Aor 
 
 mid.? 190. d. 
 Custom : ac- "j 
 cording to — , i xara to 
 : as his f elco&og, 52. 
 
 was, J 
 
 Cut, Ti[ivo!) (?), 46. 
 
 out, sxKo'wro), 132. ' 
 
 — to pieces, xajaxonToi, 
 
 132. 
 Cyrus, KvQog, 24. 
 
 D. 
 
 Damage : to inflict the most, 
 nksTaza xaxovgyetv (accit- 
 sative.) 
 
 Damsel, xogri, 15. 
 
 H-dWce, xoQEva, 168*. 
 
 Danger, xi'vSurog, 132. 
 
 (to brave, incur, ex- 
 
 pose oneself to a), xtrdvvsv 
 
 en> xtvdvvor. 
 Dare, lolndco, 239. 
 Daughter, ■Svyairiq (?), 20. 
 Dead, vtxQog, 150. 
 Death, &dva.roi, 41. 
 Deceive, dnatdca, i^aaardm. 
 
 41. 
 Decide, xeeVw (?), 92. 
 Defend, d/ivvsiv with da^, 
 
 only, 222. 
 Deliberate, §ovlevta9cti nsgi 
 
 gen. 190. 
 Delight, rignm, 41. 
 Deny, aqvionat, 293, 
 
207 
 
 Depends on you, iv aol iazi, 
 
 259. 
 Deprive of, anoareQtm, 125. 
 
 azBQtia, 168*. 
 Desire, im&viiim, gen. ini- 
 
 dv/iia, 156. 
 Desist from, Xi?ya>,^en. 154. 
 Despicable, cpavXog, 144. 
 Despise, ohycogm, gen. 
 
 }caza(}!Qoi'sco, gen. 156. 
 Destroy, diaqi&siQco (?),'92. 
 
 anoXlvfii (?), 193. 
 Determined (when or 
 
 though we have, <fcc.), 
 
 So^av Tjiuv, 249. c. 
 Die, ■flj'jjcrxco, anoOfTjaxco (?), 
 
 125. 
 Differ, diaqisgrn (?), gen. 154. 
 Difficult,' xaXswo'?, 65; 214. 
 Dine, Sunvm, 288. 
 Dining-room, aycoyew*', to, 
 
 96. 
 Directly, d&vg, 309. 
 
 1 % (p&dvia, 240. 
 
 to, s^a-v (g-era.), 309. 
 
 Disappear: to make to — , 
 
 aqjun^oi, 306. 
 Disappeared, cpgovdog, 65. 
 Disbelieve, amazse),dat.\32. 
 Disease, voaog, fj, 154. 
 Disgraceful, aiaxQog, 35. 
 Dishonour, «T«;ttaCo'. 319. 
 Disobey, amatia, dat. 132. 
 Disposition, ^9og, to, 138. 
 
 rgotiog, 150. 
 Dispute with, igi^m, dat. 
 
 183. 
 Do, 8, ngaTTsiv {=agere 
 
 and gerere) denotes gen- 
 
 ' what must 1 
 nqdzzsiv denotes 
 
 erally the exertion of 
 power upon an object 
 to do ; to em-ploy oneself 
 about something already 
 existing ; hence, to ma?i- 
 age or administer any 
 thing ; to conduct a busi- 
 ness. Hence used with 
 genercd notions, as ovMv, 
 H^de'v, and with adverbs, 
 ev, &c. — noisTv {facere), 
 to make, to prepare, &c.: 
 also ' do' generally, when 
 the object is a neuter pro- 
 noun, as in " 
 do T- 
 
 activity generally ; tioiuv, 
 productive activity. 
 
 Do the greatest injury, t« 
 fisyiara ^IdntEiv {ace.) 
 
 — : to be doing well or ill, 
 ev or xaxmg ngdzTSir. 
 
 — ■ any thing whatever for 
 the sake of gain, dno nav 
 zhg KsgSaivsiv, 283. 
 
 — evil towards, KCMovgyim, 
 222. 
 
 — good to, iv noiuv, ace. 35. 
 
 — harm to, xcaiovgyim, 222. 
 
 — injustice to, adixsa, 138. 
 
 — kind offices to, sv noisTv', 
 ace. 35. 
 
 — nothing but, ovSsv aU.o 
 ri {noiBiv often omitted) 
 356, e. 
 
 — service to, mcfsXim, 82. 
 
 — with (a thing), igaofiai, 
 dat. {contraction?) 13S. 
 
 Dog, wiav (?), 41. 
 
■iOS IND 
 
 Doors : in — , gvdop, 125. 
 
 Down, Mutm, 28. 
 
 from, xard (gen.), 
 
 274. 
 Downwards, jcazw, 28. 
 Drachma, dgaxM^ 163. 
 Draw up (of an army), raV 
 
 ffto, 96. 
 
 -, = arrange, y.oa- 
 
 Hem, 206. 
 Drawn up four deep, inl 
 
 TSTiccQav TeTd)(&at, 288. 
 Drink, tzivm (?), 144. 
 During the disease, jtara riiv 
 
 voaov, 274. 
 Dwjell, olxim, 274. 
 
 E. 
 
 Each, nas, 46. 
 Eagle, derog, 36. 
 Ear, ovg, cozog, to, 20. 
 Early in the morning, wpwi",. 
 
 193. 
 Easy, gddwg. See 65. 
 Eat, sofl-Vw (?), 144. 
 Educate, j7a(8«i;'w, 214. 
 Egg, cjoV, 15. 
 Elect = choose, atQeTa&ai (?), 
 
 (wTt), 190. a. 
 Elephant, iXeq)ag,vTog,c, 35. 
 Empty, fidraiog, 206. 
 Enact laws: when {>etrai 
 
 toiiovgl when &ia&ai1 
 
 See 188. 
 Endeavour, nsigdofiai, 121, 
 
 206. 
 Endure, avexo[tai (?), 214. i 
 Enemy, (tlie), o» nolifuoi, ' 
 
 46. 
 
 Engage in a war, dgaa^a, 
 
 noXtjxov agog, ace. 188. 
 Enjoy, dnoXavm (genitive), 
 
 Enough : 
 
 to be — , 
 
 uQxeiv, 
 
 175. 
 
 : more than enough, 
 
 nsQijra rmv ttpKOvfTmv, 
 174./. 
 
 I 705 dgxovvTei, (i. e. 
 things that suffice). 
 Entrust, tntTninm, iziazevm, 
 132. 
 
 ■ to, IniTQento, (lays 
 
 more stress on the entire 
 giving lip of the thiog in 
 question, so that it is now 
 quite in the other person's 
 hands). — nixsztita (gives 
 more prominence to the 
 fact that I put sufficient 
 confidence in the other 
 person to entrust the thing 
 in question to him), 132. 
 
 E nvy, (f&6vog : (v.) qi&ovem, 
 dat. 183. 
 
 Equestrian exercises, ra in- 
 nmd, 163. 
 
 Equivalent to, drzi, adv. 
 
 Err, ttftagrdrco (7), 154. 
 
 Escape from, cpeiyco, ace. 87. 
 
 Especially, dXXmg is xou, 
 278, 
 
 : and^, xal, re- 
 
 f erring to dXlog, 346. 
 
 Even, xat, 82. 
 
 Ever, nozs, 87. ag^rit or tip 
 agX^*, 132. 
 
 Every, nag, 46. 
 
INDEX I. 
 
 209 
 
 Kvery body, nag zig, 52. {pv- 
 
 dsis oartg ov, 277.) 
 day, ccva Tiaaav, rius- 
 
 Quv, 259. 
 five years, 8ia siivrs 
 
 izmv, 269. 
 Evidently. See 239. 
 Evil-doer, KuxovQyog, 222. 
 Evils (=bad things), xaxei, 
 
 20. 
 Exact (payment), nQarrsa- 
 
 #««, 163. 
 Examine (a question, &c.), 
 
 axoniw, 100. 
 Except, nX'^v {gen.) 
 
 if, nXriv d, 309. 
 
 Excessive, 6 eiyav {adv. with 
 
 ar#.), 228. 
 Excessively, ayav,22B. 
 Exclude from, tlgyta, 154. 
 Exercise, aay-ita, 121. 
 Existing things, ra Svra, 65. 
 Expediency, to avpufSQov, 
 
 228. 
 Expedient, 228. Vide His. 
 Expedition (to go on an), 
 
 atQctTsvca, 65. 
 Expose myself to a danger, 
 
 MvSvvtvEiv KivSvvov, 132. 
 External (things), ra sfw, 
 
 125. 
 Extremely (like). See 87. 
 Eye, bcp&aliJtog, 132. 
 
 F. 
 Faith, moTig, ^, 132. 
 Faithful, maros, 87. 
 
 Fall, m'mm, (?), 293. 
 
 in with, hzvy^uvto, (?), 
 
 dat. 183. 
 Fall into a person's power, 
 
 yiyvtc&tu Ini jtn, 293. 
 Family, yifog, to, 150. 
 Far, far on, no^Qco : = muc/i, 
 . noU, 144. 
 
 from it, fioXkov 5sm',283*. 
 
 Fast,, ta^vg, 35. 
 Father, aar^e, (?), 20. 
 Fault: to find — with, inirt- 
 
 (lam, dat. 183. 
 Fear, cpo^sofiai, (fiit. mid. 
 
 and pass. : aor. pass.), 41. 
 
 — dsidm (of a lasting ap- 
 
 prehensionordread),293^. 
 
 {subst.) qi6§og. 
 
 Ssog, TO, 326. 
 
 Feasible, awatog, 175. 
 Feel grateful or thankful, 
 
 XaQiv £iSsvai,t gen. of 
 
 thing, 222. 
 
 pain, aXyica, 20. 
 
 sure, liinoi&a {nsi&ca) 
 
 120. 
 Fetch (of thing sold), fioicxa, 
 
 (?), 87. 
 Fight, noiim {!), 73. 
 
 again St, 97^o;«'M'a,319 
 
 on horseback, ay' in- 
 
 nmv, 243. 
 with; fttf^oftcu t dat, 
 
 183. 
 Find, EVQiaxtD, 87; to be 
 /ownrf guilty, wXmvai, with 
 
 gen. 73, 
 
 t Forconjug. oiei6ivat. Bee p. 36j note *. 
 t For conjug. see 73. 
 
210 
 
 INDEX I 
 
 Find a man at home, spSov 
 
 xaraXa§siv, 125. 
 fault with, imtifiaso, 
 
 dat. 183. 
 
 out, avQiay.Biv (?). 
 
 Fire, mqio, 41. 
 
 First (the — of all), iv tots 
 
 nqmrog. Sec 259. 
 Fit to govern, aQxmog, gen. 
 Five-and-five, uva nevte. 
 Fix, nTiYvvfu, 193. 
 : am fixed, nsmiya, 
 
 perf. 2. 
 Platter, xolaKsia, 87. 
 Flatterer, xolal, 87. 
 Flesh, Kqiag, to, (G. aog, ws,) 
 
 144. 
 Flog, juaffTJj'ooo, 235. 
 Flow, ^£09 (?), 132. 
 with a full or strong 
 
 stream. See 132. 
 Fly from, (pejjyos, 35. 
 for refuge, xaragjEiJya), 
 
 41. 
 1 to the assistance of, 
 
 ^orj&ica, dat. 121. 
 Follow, sno/iai, dat. 1S3. 
 Folly, ixmgia, 156. 
 Fond of honour, qnXSiifiog, 
 
 214. 
 gain, qiiXox8Qdqg, 
 
 319. 
 Pood (for man), aiTog, 259. 
 Foot, novg, noSog, o, 20. 
 For (=in behalf of), nqo, 
 
 243. 
 For, 7«e, 41 ; for one's inte- 
 rest, 319. 
 — such a man as mf at 
 
 least, ofq} ys i/ioi, 270 
 
 note t. 
 For the sake of, evexa gen, 
 
 214. lOQiv gen. 250. 
 For my sake, x^qiv i/i^r, 250. 
 
 praise, sV inaivc^, 288. 
 
 the present at least, i6 
 
 fs vvv sJvui, 206. 
 this cause or reason, 
 
 SH TttvtTjg 7ijg aitiag, ix rov- 
 
 10V, 224. 
 your years, ngog za hti, 
 
 175. 
 a long time, gen. xQovov 
 
 av^vov, 7ioX7,av iuegmv, 
 
 162*. e. 
 Force, xparoff, zo, 41. 
 Forefather, ngoypvog, 156. 
 Foresee, ngoymcoaxtiv. See 
 
 235. 
 Forget, iizdttvOdvofiai, (?) 
 
 gen. 156. 
 Form an alliance, avfiftaxov 
 
 noma&ai ziva, 188 (2). 
 Former, 6 mgiv, 156 (27). 
 Formerly, i7ra;iai, 28. 
 Forth from, ix, a'i, gen. 
 Fortify, TEt^'tw, 222. 
 Fortune, ivxri, 92. 
 Forwardness, r6 ngo&vnov, 
 
 adj. 60. 
 Fountain, «)?yj?, 132. 
 Fourth, ritagtog, 52. 
 Fowl. See 15, note g. 
 Free, ilsv&ggog, 150. 
 from, a;zance77a}, ge?i- 
 
 154. 
 Freedom, ilsv&sgia, 150, 
 Frequently, noXXdxts, 8. 
 
INDEX I. 
 
 211 
 
 Friend, epilog, 20. 
 
 From (after receive, learn, 
 
 bring, come), naqu, 299. 
 
 vriQ {gen.), 326. 
 • (after hear,) aqii 
 
 (g-ew.), 319. 
 
 our very birth, iv&vg 
 
 ^evofisvoi, 309 
 
 fear, ino deovg, 326. 
 
 - (p{ cause), sign oidat. 
 
 Front, 6 nqoa&sv, 283 
 
 Full of, [isarog, 150. 
 
 Full speed (at), ava xgatog, 
 
 41. 
 Future (the), ro i^eXXor, 235. 
 
 G. 
 
 Gain,' xegdaivco, xigdog, to, 
 283*.^ 
 
 Gate, nvXi], 193. 
 
 General, afQarijyog, 52. 
 
 Gentle, nqaog (?) 138. 
 
 Geometer, yEtofistgrig, ov, 24. 
 
 Get,xTdoixai (of what will 
 be retained as a posses- 
 sion), 87. — Tv^'xdveiv with 
 gen.{o{ what is obtained 
 accidentally, by g-ood 
 Zj^cA:, &c.) 183', note b. — 
 svgiaHsa&ai (to get posses- 
 sion of an object sought 
 for). 
 
 — TVYx<>''Va>, gen. 183, note 
 b. tigiaxo/^at, 188. 
 
 — hold of, xgarsco, 163. 
 
 — oif, anali-UTTO!} i« or ano; 
 154. 
 
 Get (teeth, (fee.) gjiJw, 214. 
 — taught, diSdaxoftai, 188. 
 
 Get the better of, negiylfvofiM 
 {gen,), 87. neQisiui {gen.) 
 156. ' 
 
 Gift, dmgov, 175. 
 
 Give, diSooi^i, 41. 
 
 one trouble; jtoVoj' o:r 
 
 ngdyfiata nagiyisiv, 214. 
 
 orders, snirdzzoa, 359. 
 
 • a share of, /isTaSlSojui, 
 
 175. 
 
 some of, ixcradi8<ajAt, 
 
 175. 
 - a taste of, yevsiv, ace. of 
 
 pers., g-ere. of thing. 
 ■ to taste, ysvca {gen. of 
 
 thing), 150. 
 Given : to be — , Soiiog, 144. 
 Gladl}'', fiSimg. 
 Go, sg^ofiai (?), 112. 
 
 — away, amiiii (= will go 
 away. See 65, note g). 
 — ttneg^o/iai, 112. 
 
 — in to, Hsig^oiiai nagd 
 lll.d.^ 
 
 — into, daigionai, 112. 
 
 — on an expedition, arga- 
 rsvm, 65. 
 
 — and do a thing, 350 Ui) 
 349. 
 
 God, Qsog. 
 
 Gold, ■^gvaog, 6, as a sum of 
 
 gold money, xgvaiov, 35. 
 Golden, ^gvasog, ovg, 144. 
 Good, dya&og—rdftsipoiv, agtj- 
 
 rog, 35. 
 Govern, dgim {gen.), 150. 
 Government, ap;^)/, 132. 
 Gratify, lagi^ojuai, 273. 
 Great, (liyag (?). 
 
£12 
 
 INDEX 1. 
 
 Greater, greatest, /isi^mv, 
 
 ftSyXfTOS, 46. 
 
 Greatly (with injure, bene- 
 fit, «fcc.),j«£j'a. 
 
 =far, nolv, 156. 
 
 Greece, 'EJiXas, dSos, fi, 144. 
 
 Greek, 'EXltjv, rjvog, 144. 
 
 Grudge, (f&ovia, gen. of ob- 
 ject, dat. of pers. 183. 
 
 Guard, (pvldttm, 190. e. 
 
 — ^ against, (pvldrrsaQai, 
 
 ace. 190, 
 
 Guard, 
 
 Guardian, 
 
 > (fiXa 
 
 5W- 
 
 H. 
 
 Habit : in the — of perform- 
 ing, ;TpaxTixo'ff,g"ere.l49. a. 
 
 Hair, &qi^, iqty^og, n, 175. 
 
 Half, rifuave. See 59. 
 
 Hand, ^uq, v, (?) 20. 
 
 Hang oneself, dndvYouai, 
 188, (1). 
 
 Happen, Tvyxdvoi,'\ 242. ft. 
 
 Happened : what had — , zo 
 ysyovog. 
 
 Happy, svdaifimv, ovog, 20. 
 
 Harass, novo* or ngdyftata 
 nuQsxsiv, 214. 
 
 Hard, x'a^emg, 65, 214. 
 
 Hare, Xaymg. See 15. 
 
 Harm : come to some — , 
 na&siv 11 (suffer some- 
 thing). 
 
 Haste, anovdrj, 183. 
 
 Have, B]^a>. See 15, note i. 
 
 a child taught, didda- 
 
 xofiai, 125, t. 
 
 Have an opportunity; when 
 
 or though you have, &c. 
 
 nagov, 250. 
 a narrow escape, naga 
 
 lungov ii.O-ei:v, 299. 
 nag oliyot 
 
 diaqievyEiv, 299. 
 
 any regard for, xij^i- 
 
 /lai, gen. 156. 
 
 confidence in, ninoiifa, 
 
 193. 
 
 — done supper, uno Sein- 
 vov ysvs'adat, 243. 
 • in one's hand, diu yu- 
 
 gog sx^iv, 269. 
 — lost, aiegsoD, 168*. 
 no fear of, &a^Qeoa, ace. 
 
 138. 
 
 — slain a man with one's 
 own hand, avto^sig shat, 
 299 
 
 the tooth ache (= suf 
 
 far pain in my teeth), 
 
 dXym Tovg bSovrag. See 
 
 19*. b. 
 Head, xEcpaXij, 20. 
 Hear, aytovm, F. M. 92.— on 
 
 its government, see 148. 
 Hearing: there is nothing 
 
 like — , ov8sv oioi> axovaai 
 
 278. 
 Heavy, ^agvg, 183. 
 Heavy-armed soldier, 6nXi' 
 
 rtjg, 154. 
 Hen, ogvtg. See 15, note g. 
 Henceforth, to dno rovds. 
 
 34./. 
 Hercules, 'HgaxX^g, 183. 
 
 t For conjug. o' ^vvxiva, see 183. 
 
INDEX I. 
 
 213 
 
 Here, sv&dSe, 28. 
 Hide, dogd, 35. 
 
 ytQV7lT<0, KHOXQVTITCO, 
 
 125. 
 Hill, Xoqiog, 288. 
 Hinder, xmXvia, aaaxcoXvat, 
 
 293. 
 Hire, fiia&ovfiai, 188. 
 Hit (a mark), rvyidvoa, 183, 
 
 note b. 
 Hold a magistracy or office, 
 
 aqiuv oLQ^riv, 132. 
 cheap, hXiYmqia {gen.) 
 
 156. 
 
 my tongue about, 
 
 mandm, F. M. 87. 
 
 (without ace), 
 
 aiydo), F. M. 270. 
 Horne : at — , IfSov, 125. 
 -to find a man at- 
 
 hdov itataXa^Eiv, 125. 
 Honey, iiiXi, nog, to, 132. 
 Honorable, xalog, 32. 
 Honour, rXn-q, 150. 
 Hope, slmtw, 87. 
 Hoplite, bnUiiis, 154. 
 Horn, xiqag, to, (?) 35. 
 Horse, mnog, 15. 
 
 soldier, Innevg, 96 
 
 House, ohog, 41. 
 How much, noaov, 87, 
 Hunting, ■Qriqa, 154. 
 Hurt, ^Idnret, 82. 
 
 I. 
 
 1 at least, syays, 156. 
 I for my part, 'if coys, 156. 
 Idle, %oV, 299. 
 
 If any body has ... it is you, 
 £t Tig xal alios (h^iS, &C.) 
 174. d. 
 
 — it is agreeable to yon, « 
 aoi §ovXo(iiv(Q iati, 206. 
 
 — it should appear that I . . . 
 iav (falmafiai, &c. with 
 partic. 239, note c. 
 
 — you are willing, «t coi 
 ^ovXoinsvtp idTi, 206. 
 
 Ill, Kttxag, 8. 
 
 — adj.= weak),da&ev!^g,'Bl9. 
 Imitate, fufieoixai. 
 Immediately, ei&vs, 309. — 
 
 how to translate it by 
 tpd^daag, <fcc., see 242. /. 
 on his arrival, 
 
 sv&vg i]X(av, 309. 
 Immortal, d&dvaTog, 125. 
 Impiety, dss^sia, 156. 
 Impious, dvoatog, 299. d<ss- 
 
 ^^V, 156. 
 Impossible, dSvvaTog, 65. 
 Impudence, dvaideia, 87. 
 Impunity: with — , x^^iQun 
 
 (rejoicing). 
 In addition to, ini{dat.) 288. 
 
 nqog Tovtotg, 319. 
 
 — (in answer to where ?) iv, 
 dat. 259. 
 
 — (a man's) power, iniwith 
 dat. of the person, 65. 
 
 — (after to conquer), omit- 
 ted, 131. e. 
 
 — all respects, ndrTa, 134 
 xaTU ndvTa, 27i. 
 
 — an uncommon degree, 
 ' SvacfeqovTmg, 235. 
 
 t For eonjjg of rvyxi''<^i 'ce 183. 
 
214 
 
 ir^DEX I. 
 
 Inbehalfof, ffpo, 243. 
 
 — comparison of, ngSg, 3/.9. 
 
 — (= in doors), ivdov, 125. 
 
 — preference to, avzi, 214. 
 
 — proportion to, xazd (ace), 
 274. 
 
 — reality, i^ Sm, 65. 
 
 — reference to, sig, 259. 
 ngog, ace. 319. 
 
 — (space of time), dvd, 259. 
 
 — tlie time of, ini with gen, 
 65. 
 
 — : — habit of doing, tzquh- 
 Tixog, 150. 
 
 ■ world, who ? nV nore, 
 
 150. 
 Incur a danger, xiiidvvsveiv 
 
 xlrdvvov, 132. 
 
 danger, xivdvrsvsiVjldl. 
 
 Indeed, /asv, 38, note f. 
 Infinitely many, fivgioi, 228. 
 Infirmity, aa&ivua, 319. 
 Inflict damage on, xaxovQ- 
 
 fi<o, 222. 
 Injure = hurt, ^lantoo, 82. 
 
 ddixsco, 138. 
 Injury : do an — 'o, ^Xdma. 
 Injury: to commit an — , 
 
 dSixsiv ddixiav, 138. 
 Injustice, ddmiu, 82. to do — 
 
 to, dSixsca, 138. 
 Insolence, v^qis, j/, 138. 
 Insolent person, v^giaz^i,: 
 Instead of, drn, 214. 
 Insult, v§Qi^a), ace. v^qig, ^, 
 
 138. 
 Interest for a man's — to be 
 
 translated by nqog, with 
 
 the gen. of ■person, 319. 
 
 Intermediate, ^«r«J», 26. 
 Into, tig, ace. 
 Intoxication, ni&ri, 326. 
 Is a good ") 
 thing for, 
 
 — advantage- 
 ous to, 
 
 — character- ,"^"'^r^,„ 
 istic of, (""»«)> 319 
 
 — consistent 
 with, 
 
 — like, 
 
 — enough, or sufiicient for, 
 aqxsX, 175. 
 
 — to be, {iklXu saea&ai, 
 283. h. 
 
 — of a character to, iatlr 
 olog, 283. b. 
 
 It being disgraceful, alaygh 
 OP, 250. 
 
 — being evident, dijXop ov, 
 250. 
 
 — being fit, ngoaijxov, 250. 
 
 — being impossible, ddwa- 
 rov ov, 250. 
 
 — being incumbent, ngoa^- 
 xov, 250. 
 
 — ■ being plain, d^Xov op', 250. 
 
 — being possible, dvpazop 
 ov, 250, 
 
 — • depends on you, iv aol 
 hzi, 259. 
 
 — is allowed {licet), e^sazi, 
 112. 
 
 — is expedient, avfKfigii, 
 dat. 228, 
 
 - is necessary, dydyxtj 
 [omitting the verb), 65. 
 
 - is not a thing that ever^ 
 
INDEX I. 
 
 215 
 
 body can do, oi navzog 
 
 ioTi, 158. 
 It is not every body that 
 
 can, 163, 283. - 
 ■ — is possible, olovti iazi,283. 
 
 — is profitable, av/iijieQei, 
 dat, 228. 
 
 — is right, oQ&cog sxei, 222. 
 
 — is right that, Sixaiov iari, 
 358. a. 
 
 — IS the nature of, m'qjvxa, 
 £(pvv, 214. 
 
 — is the part of, ean (gen.), 
 162*. A. 
 
 Jaw, yvd&og, 17, 20. 
 
 Journey (v.), noQBvonai, 24. 
 ffTei;.o/taj(?), 188(1). 
 
 Judge, xQtT^g (general term), 
 S.'—dmaaT^g (only of a 
 judge in the strict sense), 
 239, X : (verb) xqlva, 92. 
 
 Jupiter, ZBvg, Jiog, &c. voc. 
 Zei, 193. 
 
 Just, Sixaiog, 87. 
 
 Just as he was, Ijisq or ma- 
 niq sl-fsv, 351. 
 
 K. 
 
 Keep company with, om- 
 
 is'co, dat. 183. 
 ■ (for one's self), aiqea- 
 
 &ai, 188. 
 Kill, anoxTsivoi (?), 82. 
 King, §aaikivg,2L 
 Knee, yo.vv, yovar, to, 20. 
 Knock out, ixxomai (aor 2 
 
 piss.), 132. 
 
 Know, olda (of positive 
 knowledge), 73. — yifvma- 
 Ko) (seek to become ac- 
 quainted with), aor. if. 
 Tcop, know (from ac- 
 quaintance with it) : 
 (with par tic, 229.) 
 
 (jiyfoaaxai), 235. 
 
 how, imaraftai (7), 
 
 293. 
 
 : I don't — , Qvx sx(a,or 
 
 ovx ol8a, 67. 
 
 L. 
 
 Labour, novog, (v. novim.) 
 
 1.54. 
 Laid myself down, xatsxli- 
 
 ■Oi]v, 190. 
 Lamb, afxrog, 41. 
 Large, neyag. 
 (At) last, 10 TsXsvTcxSov, 34* 
 
 /• 
 Laugh, yeldto, uaouai, ] 
 
 222." IF. 
 at, xaiayeldto, ' M, 
 
 278. J 
 
 Laughter, ysXwg, tozog, 278. 
 Law, vo/iog, 132. 
 Lawful, {^«ft(ff, {=fas), 65 
 
 oaiog, Sixaiog, 293. 
 Lay down, xaiazi&jjiu, 163, 
 
 6ggs, zixrm (?), 15. 
 
 to the charge of, xari] 
 
 yoQsm, 156. 
 ■ waste, Ts'i^i/oo (?), 46. 
 
 Lazy, dgyog, 299. 
 Lead, ay CO, 341. 
 Lead (of a road), (fiqin, 73 
 Leaf, cpvUor, 214. 
 
218 
 
 INDEX I. 
 
 Leap, aXXofiai, 273. 
 Learn, (with partic.) uav- 
 
 &dm{l), 239. 
 Leather bottle, aaxog, 15. 
 Leave off, ^ym, gen., 154. 
 
 navofiai, 188 (1 ). 
 Leisure, o^oT,?/, 112. 
 Let for hire, nia&om, 188. 
 Liberty, iUv&eQia, 150. 
 Lie down, Katayllvonai, (xa- 
 
 TExU&tjv), 190. 
 
 Life, §iog, 28. by wjin., to 
 
 ^Vv, 150. 
 Lift up, a'geiv, 188 (2). 
 Like a dog, Kvwg Slxnv, 
 
 2m. 
 
 vfioiog, (dat.), 183. 
 
 ayandm, 52. 
 
 to do it = do it gladly 
 
 {r>Sitog). 
 , should like to . . . ^5«'- 
 
 cog av, 87. 
 , should extremely like 
 
 to . . . fidiaz av, 87. 
 Likely, ilxog (neut. part.), 
 
 331. 
 Lily, xQipov (?), 144. 
 Little (a little), dXiytp, 168*. 
 Live, faro, 131. d. note b. 
 (= spend one's life), 
 
 diaTekm, 60. 
 
 about the same time, 
 
 xaia jov avtov y^Qovov ys- 
 
 via&ai, 183. 
 Long (of time), avpiog, 163. 
 
 fiuKQog, 214. 
 ago, ndXai, 28. 
 
 Loss : to be at a — , aKa^em 
 
 Love, q}iXee> (of love arising 
 froni regard, and the per- 
 ception of good and ami- 
 able qualities), 20.— aj-a- 
 tidco (stronger: implying 
 affection arising from the 
 heart, &c.), 52. — spa'rot 
 (of the passion of love), 
 274. 
 
 Lover of self, qiilavzos, 222. 
 
 Lower, 6 xdrco {art. with 
 adv.) 
 
 M. 
 Madness, [lavia, 24. 
 Magistracy, dgx^, 132. 
 Maiden, hoq^, 15. 
 Maintain, rot'qiai (?), 190. 
 Make to cease, navm, gen. 
 of that from which, 164. 
 to disappear, dqiavt^ta 
 
 206. 
 
 a great point of, tisqi 
 
 noXkov nouXa&ai or ^ytis 
 Oat, 283. 
 
 progress, nqo^oaQita, 
 
 274. 
 
 immense {or aston- 
 ishing) progress, Oav/iaa- 
 10V oaov tiQoj^eogeTv, 273. c. 
 ■ self-interest the object 
 
 of one's life, ngog to avfi' 
 
 CpfQOV ^-QV, 228. 
 
 ■ for one's interest, dpa; 
 
 nqog {gen.), 319. 
 
 t Aorist generally of sensual love, but 
 {Pape.) 
 
 ipaffdat Tvpai/piSos common. 
 
INDEX I. 
 
 21'? 
 
 Male, a4Q^v,. 150. 
 Man, 46. {Obs.) 
 : am not a man, 283, 
 
 note a. 
 Manage, nQanzm, 8. 
 Many, noXig, 46. the many, 
 
 o( 7io7.Xoi, 46. 
 
 times as many or 
 
 much, TioXXanXaaioi {at, «), 
 175. 
 
 numerous, noX- 
 
 lanXdaioi, 175. 
 
 March, iXavrca (?), tioqevo- 
 ita.1, 24. 
 
 of a single soldier, 
 
 sl^i (?), 96. 
 
 Ma.xe,i7i7iog,Ti, 15. 
 
 Mark, axonog, 183, b. 
 
 Market-place, ayoqa, 154. 
 
 Master, Ssa7i6iris,222. 
 
 8iSu(sxa,Xos (= teach- 
 er), 168. 
 
 (v.) xQCLTsca, (gen.), 
 
 156. 
 
 May (one—), s^sau, 222. 
 
 [though or whe7i I 
 
 may), nagor, 250. 
 
 Meet, ivTVYxdvm, dat. 183. 
 Might (one—), s'S^y, 222. 
 {when ox though I, 
 
 &c. might,) nagov, 250. 
 Mild, weaoff(?), 138. ^ 
 Milk, ydXa, ydXaya, ro, 132. 
 Mina, nvd, 82. 
 Mind (as the seat of the 
 
 passions), ■d-v/iog, 121. 
 Mine, i/iog, 20. 
 Minerva, A&riva, 341. 
 Misdeed, xaKovQyijiia, t6,222. 
 10 
 
 Miserable, a&Xiog, 273. 
 Misfortune, dvangayia, 125. 
 Miss, anagrdvco, {gen.), 154, 
 Moderate (in desires, <fcc.) 
 
 ffooqpgojj', 125, u. 
 Moderation, ^ aoxpQoavvri, 
 Modesty, ^ 125, u. , 
 Molest, Tiovov or ngdyfiara 
 
 nagex^iv, 214. 
 Money, y^grniaia, 125. 
 Month, iifiv, b, 138. 
 More than (= beyond), na- 
 
 gd {ace), 299. 
 
 - than, naXXov — »/, 
 
 41. 
 
 than any other single 
 
 person, 174. e. 
 
 enough, nsguta 
 
 zSiv dgxovvTwv, 174, f. 
 
 ■ could have been 
 
 expected, &c., 168. d. 
 More (after a numeral,) « v, 
 
 193. 
 Morning : early in the — , 
 
 ngm, 193. 
 Morrow (the), tj avgiov, 26. 
 Mortal,, ■&»'j/rd?, 125. 
 Most, nXsiaToi, 175. 
 
 of all, [idXiaia ndvtiav, 
 
 309. 
 
 his time, 7a, aoXXd, 
 
 137. 
 Most men, or people, ol noX- 
 
 Xoi, 46. 
 Mostly, T« noXXd, 137, 282. 
 Mother, jm^'tj/pC?), 20. 
 Move, vTviat, 28. 
 Mourn for, ■tlX7.sa&ai{aco.) 
 
 188(1). 
 
218 
 
 INDEX I. 
 
 Much, mlvs, 46. 
 
 (with compar.), noX- 
 
 l(p, 168*. 
 Multitude (the), oi noVkoi, 
 
 46. 
 Murder (to be tried for), 
 
 Kfiiyu* qiovov, 35. 
 Murderer (the actual — ), 
 
 avTo^eiQ, 299. 
 Must (= ought), 8sT, 60. 
 , how translated by 
 
 verbals in reog, 114. 
 My, i/ios, 20. 
 
 N. 
 Name (by name), ovona, to, 
 
 138. 137. a. 
 Named : to be — after, orofia 
 
 ej^siv im jivog, 288. 
 Nation, e&vog, to, 65. 
 Natural. See 331. 
 Nature: it is the — of, &c., 
 
 213. a. 
 Near, niXag, 28. nXijaiov, 
 
 309. iyyj/s, gen. 150. 
 Nearly, oXivov 8eTv or okiyov 
 
 aZonc, 283*. 
 related to, iyyvTara 
 
 dvtti yivovg, 149, e. 
 Necessaiy : it is — , uvayxij, 
 
 65. 
 , it would be — to, 
 
 (verbal in tdog), 114. 
 Necessity, avdyxij, 65. 
 Need, if there is any, idv rt 
 
 3«B, or El 11 dsoi, 92. 
 Neighbour, 6 nXijalov, 28. 
 STeither — nor, ovrs — ovtb, 
 
 fiffje — fi^TS, 112. 
 
 Neither — nor yet, ovra — oii- 
 
 de, /i^rs — i^tjSb, 112. 
 Neptune, Tloaetdrnv, mvog (?)■ 
 
 341. 
 Nevertheless, o/^to?, 288. 
 Next, 6 t^ofiii/og, gen. 149. 
 
 d. 
 — — day, ti avQiov, 26. on 
 
 the — , rg varsgala, 183. 
 Nightfall, about, vko vixra, 
 
 326. 
 Nightingale, driSmv (?), 341. 
 No, by Jupiter, <fcc., fia, /lia, 
 
 341. 
 longer, olxsn, uijiteTi, 
 
 112. 
 Nobody, ovdsig, ixtjdeig, 112. 
 Nose, Qig, givos, ri, 35. 
 Nostril, 35. 
 Not, 107-111. 
 Not a single person, ovSi 
 
 Etg, fitjds slg, 112. 
 
 at all, ovdev (ti), firfiti' 
 
 («), 150. 
 
 — even, ovSi, 82. nrfii, 112. 
 
 — only — ^but also, ov^ oti 
 -:—aki.a, xai, 82. 
 
 — yet, ovam, 214. 
 Nourish, rgeqim, 190. 
 Now, vvf, 28. (= already) 
 
 ^8ii, 65. 
 
 O. ^ 
 
 O Athenians, a atdgsg 'ud&tj 
 
 vatoi. 
 Obey, n£i&sci9at, dat. 120. 
 Obtain, rvjx^vm, gen.,, 183, 
 
 note b. 
 Occasion : if or when there 
 
INDEX I. 
 
 219 
 
 is any — , idv ri fif's, or it 
 
 ri dsoi, 92. 
 Of {themselves, myself, 
 
 (fee), dip' iavTwv, 243. 
 Of old, (as adj.) ) 6 nulai, 
 
 times, \ 26. 
 
 Of those days, 6 iotb, 26. 
 Offer, naqixm, 214. 
 
 ■ for sale, nalito, 86*. c. 
 
 Offices: do kind — to. See 
 
 Do. 
 Often, noXldxig, 8. 
 Ointment, hvqov, 150. 
 Old, oi Tittkai, 26. 
 On account of, Siu, {ace), 
 
 269. IW«, (g-era.), 214. 
 
 — an understanding that, 
 tm zQ), 288. 
 
 — - condition that, s<f ^, 267. 
 
 qjTE, 268. 
 
 — condition of being . . . , 
 inl 1$, thai, &c. 
 
 • — horseback, icp Itijtov or 
 ijinq), 288. 
 
 — (space or time), ard, 259. 
 
 — the contrary, 137. d. 
 
 — the father's side, ngog 
 jiazQog, 319. 
 
 — the next day, zg van- 
 qaia, 183. 
 
 — the plea that, ag ovtmg, 
 86*. e. 
 
 — your account, 8ia cs, 
 269. 
 
 OncB; «*«!, 341. 
 One, sig {lu'u, tv), 87. 
 One = a person, rig. 
 
 may, «|s(m, 222. 
 
 might, ilnt, 222, 
 
 One more, hi sIg, 193. 
 who has never tasted, 
 
 <fcc., aysvarog, 150. 
 — '~ who has slain another 
 
 with his own hand, avto 
 
 j^siQ, 29. 
 One's neighbour, 6 nltjaiov, 
 
 28. 
 
 own things, ta iavrov . 
 
 Only, juo^oV. 
 
 Open, dvotym, dvEcp)^a, Peri. 1. 
 
 : stand — , avsma, 
 
 Veii.2. ^ 
 Openly, dno ziiv ngocpavovg, 
 
 243. 
 Or, (in double questions), J7, 
 
 after motsgov, 328. 
 Or both, 1] a/icpoTEQu, 345. 
 Order, xsXsvia, (the weakest 
 
 word = bid, tell,) 112. — 
 
 imzuTro}. 
 
 idaam, 96. inizdzTm, 
 
 359. T«|tff, 96. 
 (in good), svzdxzmg 
 
 96. 
 Other (the — party), oi ezeooL 
 
 46. 
 Others (the), oi alXoi, 46. 
 Ought, dET, XQV (?), 60, 92 
 
 117. 
 
 what we — , za 8e> 
 
 ovza, a XQ^, 206. 
 Ours, riuizsQog, 24. 
 Out of, k, ilgen. 224. «'|(», 
 
 309. {,710, 326. 
 
 the way, initoSmr., 
 
 293. 
 Outside, sgca. 125 
 
220 
 
 INDEX I. 
 
 Outside: the people outside, 
 
 oi s^to. 
 Outward (thlnes), T(i ffim, 
 
 125. 
 Overcome, nsQiylyroftai, 
 
 (gen.), 156. 
 Overlook, imaxoaioo, 206. 
 Own, to be translated by 
 
 gen. iaviov, avrov. (savrav, 
 
 &c.) 
 
 Pain (v.), Xvnem, 41. 
 Pained , to be — , alysm, 20. 
 Parent, yovevg, 121. 
 Part (the greater), 59. e, and 
 
 58. 
 (it is the), sort, with 
 
 gen. 163. 
 Passion (anger), ■OVfiSg, 121. 
 Passion s ( the), nci&sa, ?;, 1 50. 
 Pay, (n.), fua&og, 87. 
 attention to, zhv vovv 
 
 Tiogaexsiv, or itQaai^siv, dat. 
 
 331. 
 close attention to, ngog 
 
 Toig TiQayftaSi ylyvsa&ai, 
 
 319. 
 Peace, uQifii, 214. 
 Peacock, lamg, 341. 
 Peloponnesus, IlsXoaopvi}- 
 
 aog, ii, 60. 
 People, 24; = persons {ol 
 
 — ), see 29, z. 
 Perceive, aia&dvoiiai, (?), 
 
 190,239, 
 Perform a service, vitQijsjeco, 
 
 52. 
 Perfume, (ivqop, 150. 
 
 Perish, an-oXlvftat, 193, s. 
 Permit, idea (augm.?), 121, 
 Persian, IHgatig, "^i 24. 
 Person, ismna, 138. 
 Persuade, nsi&ia (ace), 12G 
 Philip, (liilinnoi, 24. 
 Philosopker, (pikoaocpog, 15. 
 Physician, lajQog, 154. 
 Piety, avaa^sia, 156. 
 Pious, evas^^g, 1 56. 
 Pitcher, ;{«rea, 193. 
 Pity (v.), 150 ; Jphrase) 269. 
 
 olxTEigm, 8i oixzov sx^iv. 
 Place guards, xazaari^aaa- 
 
 &ai qivXaxag, 188 (2). 
 Place on, imzi&ijfi, dat. 144. 
 Plea. See 86*. Examp. c. 
 Pleasant, ^Bvg, 214. 
 Please, aQeaxta, dat. 331.- 
 
 what I — , a jioi do- 
 
 x«r, 96. 
 
 Pleasure, to take, ^doixai. 
 
 Plot against, iiziBovXevm, dat. 
 183. 
 
 Pluck, tiXXeiv, 188 (1). 
 
 Plunder, diaQnd^fo,fut. mid. 
 (sometimes dam, B.), (gen- 
 eral term plunder, rob,) 
 144 — Xijt^oiiai (make 
 bootp),235. 
 
 Poet, aoitjT^g, 24. 
 
 Possess, xBKTtiiiai, 87. Put. 1 
 See 199. 
 
 Possession, nrrnta, to, 87. 
 
 Possible, dvparog, 65. 
 
 it is, 0(0i> re iau, 
 
 283. a. 
 
 84. 283. a. 
 
 (it is not), owe !nw, 
 
INUEX I. 
 
 221 
 
 Pot^vrga, 193. 
 
 Power: in the — of, im,wiih 
 dat of person, 65. 
 
 Powerful, dwaroff, 168*. 
 
 Practise, aaxim, (general 
 term) 121. — (iskitdm, (re- 
 fers to the carefulness 
 with which the thing is 
 practised,) 163. 
 
 Praise, inawim, F. M., 60. 
 
 Praiseworthy, inaivsiog, 60. 
 
 Pray don't do this, ov (ij 
 with fut. 287*. e. 
 
 Preference : in — of, am 
 (gen.), 214 
 
 Present, naqm, partic. 
 
 Present circumstances, con- 
 dition, (fcc, r« naQOvra, 
 52. See 293*. 
 
 ; as adj. 6 vvv, 26. 
 
 Prevent, efinodatv slvai firi, or 
 fiij ov, [with infin.) xmlvm, 
 ano»ioi.vca. See 293*. 
 
 Procure, svqiaxo(iai, 188 (2). 
 
 Produce (laughter), nodco. 
 
 Production, sgyoy, 121. 
 
 Pronounce happv, svSai{iovi,- 
 ?M, 150. 
 
 Property : — generally omit- 
 ted, the art. being put in 
 neut. pi. See Diff. 10. 
 
 Prosecute, SiaxBiv, 35. 
 
 Prosecuted (to be), q>svyuv, 
 35. 
 
 Prosper, svtvism, 92. 
 
 Protect myself, aiivvonai, 
 222 
 
 Provide, naDuaxevd^to, 188 
 (2). 
 
 for one's safety, ej^- 
 
 £(s9ai atoTijqtag, 150. 
 
 Prudent, acaqiQcov (one whose 
 thoughtfulness and sound 
 sense has become a habit;, 
 125, u. — g)go'w/*o?(oHewho 
 pays attention to his con- 
 duct and character), 144.t 
 
 Punish, xoXd^m, F. M., 121. 
 
 Punished (to be), diKijv dtdS- 
 vai, or Sovvui, gen. of 
 thing, dat. of person by 
 whom, 228. 
 
 Pupil, [la&^T^g, 168*. 
 
 Purchase, ayoqd^(o, 163. 
 
 Pursue, bimxco {fut. mid. 
 best), 35. 
 
 Put forth (naturally), q)vm, 
 214 
 
 oflf, ixdva, 125. 
 
 on, ivdvco, 125. 
 
 to death, dnoxtuvfo (?), 
 
 82. 
 
 : to^a man over a riv- 
 er, nsQouovv [iivoC], 188. 
 
 Q. 
 
 Quick, taxis, 35. 
 GLuickly, T«p', 35. 
 (partic), 242./. 
 
 R. 
 
 Race, yiroi, io, 100. 
 Rail at, XoiSoQiofiai, dative 
 183. 
 
 f ^pivtftov Set ycvstrBai rdv ttiXKovTa au^pova tataQat^ (Cyrop. ifi. 1^ 10)i 
 
'■iil'i 
 
 INDEX I. 
 
 Raise a war, iystQeiv mh/iop, 
 
 J. Jo* 
 Rank, rd^ig,^, 96. 
 Rascal, auHovgyos, 222. 
 Rather than, i^aUov ri, 191. 
 
 Ravage, Ttjuyw (?), 46. 
 Ready, erot/uos, 65. 
 Reahty (in), i^ ovti, 65. 
 Really, zq) ovti, 65. 
 Rebuke, imnpioim, dat. 183. 
 Receive, zDy;faV(», 183, b. la- 
 ^siv, 190. 1). 5ei(oft«(, 190. 3). 
 Reconcile, Siulvsiv, 190. 
 Reconciled : to be — to each 
 other, 8iaX,vEa&ai nqog 
 (ace), 190. 
 Rejoice, ^do/iat, (refers to the 
 feeling of delight ; to its 
 sewswa/ gratification), 20. 
 — X«iQca, (general term), I 
 239. 
 Relations, ngoai^iiovTcs, 283. 
 Remain, with, naoaiiiva}, 
 
 222. 
 Remarkably, SiawEoovrme, 
 
 235. 
 Remember, iu'uv)jiitti,f gen 
 
 156, 239. 
 Repel, ttfivvofiai (ace), 222. 
 Repent, fisTcipieXst, fioi, 239. 
 Reputation, d^imiiu, to, 144. 
 Require, see Want. 
 Requite, d/ivvofiai {ace), 222. 
 Rest (of the), 6 allog, 46. 
 Restore an exile, xazdyia, 
 331. 
 
 Restrain by punishment 
 
 KoXdtm, F. M., 120. 
 Return from banishment, 
 
 xattQyt^oiiai, xaTst/tt, 269*. 
 Return like for like, tois 
 
 oftolois dfivvsa&ai, 222. 
 — ^ thanks for, j^dgip 
 
 elderui (gen. of thing), 222. 
 
 See 73, note q. 
 Revenge myself, dnwoiiui, 
 
 ace, 222. 
 Reverence, atdsouai, ace, 
 
 138. 
 Rhinoceros, QiroxeQmg, rozoj, 
 
 35. 
 Rich, nlovatog. 
 Ride, elavrstv (?), 41. 
 
 on horseback, icp 'inn<o 
 
 of^sia&ai, i<p utnco itopsvea 
 
 &ai, 288. 
 Right, oaiog, dixaiog, 293. 
 , it is, oQ&wg evH, 
 
 222. 
 River, nozafiog, 132. 
 Road, odog, ti, 73. 
 
 home, ri olxttSs odog, 
 
 331 
 Rock, mzQa, 235. 
 Roman, 'PmnaTog, 293. 
 Rule over, dg^m, (gen.) 
 Run, Tge^oo (dgaii), 65. 
 
 to the assistance of, 
 
 ^oii&sm (dat.), 121. 
 
 away from, dnoSid- 
 
 ■ qdaxm, ace 138. 
 Running, the act of, doouog, 
 
 183. 
 
 t For/a«. Beel99- 
 
INDEX I. 
 
 223 
 
 S. 
 
 Safe, aaqiaXi^g, 299. 
 
 Safet]^^ daqidXsia, 193. 
 
 (from danger), da- 
 
 qidlsta, 299. 
 
 Said, slnov, 60. 
 
 Sail away, anonlia (?), 158. 
 
 Sale. See OiTer. 
 
 Same, d aitog, 41. 
 
 Say, (fcc. ieyM (= speak, of 
 a connected speech ; also 
 tell). — slnBiv (60, c), qpj/fw' 
 (=: say). — Xakuv {= chat- 
 ter, talk: especially of 
 children who are begin- 
 ning to speak). — cfdaxco 
 (:= give out ; intimating 
 that the thing is not so), 
 222. 
 
 Science, sniazi^fii], 293. 
 
 Scold, XoiSoQioiiai, dat. 183. 
 
 Scourge, iiaatiyom, 235. 
 
 Scythian, Hni&Tjg, ov, 24. 
 
 Sea, ^akaaaa, 154. 
 
 Secretly, 242. c (2) ; part, 
 la^av, 241. 
 
 Security, daqidlsia, 299. 
 
 See (= behold), &Edoftai, 87. 
 
 — (with part.), ogdm (?), 
 7oj ^o9. 
 
 Seek, ^tjTsm, 100. 
 
 Seems (good, videtur), 8o)(u, 
 96. 
 
 Self, avTog, 39 (1). 
 
 love, qjiXavzia, 228. 
 
 loving, (filavzos, 228. 
 
 restraint, aacpgoavrn, 
 
 126. 
 
 Salfish, qpAawoff, 228. 
 
 Selfishness, g;a«t)n«, 228. 
 
 Sell, ncoXsm, 87. 
 
 Send, atiOsiv, 188, (1). 
 
 (a boy) to a master 
 
 elg SidaaxdXov nsfinsiv, 259. 
 for, itsianiiinoi^ai, 259. 
 
 Senseless, dvoTjtog, 214. 
 Sensible, (pQoviiiog, 140. 
 Sensual pleasures, «t jfarSi 
 
 TO ffcojMfl! ijdorai, 274. 
 Serve, vmjqBrita, dat. 52. 
 Service: do a — to, cagis^soo, 
 
 ace. 
 Set about, imxEige'<a dat. 121 
 — - out, noQEvofiai, 24. 
 Severe, ^aewV, 183. 
 Shameless, dvaid^g, 87. 
 Shamelessness, dvaidsta, 87. 
 Shed tears, Saxgv'to, 282. 
 Sheep, oi'g, 41. 
 Ship, vavg (?), 125. 
 Should, 5£r(?), 60. 
 Shown, having, imSsSuyni- 
 
 vog, 188, 3. 
 Shun = fly from, cpsvyto, 35. 
 Silence, auoTfq, 96. 
 Silently, aiyri, 175. 
 Sin, dftagrdrm, sig or negi 
 (with accus.),against,15i. 
 Sing, a'aoo, F. M. 168*. ^ 
 better, xdXhov adeir. 
 
 168*. 
 Single (not a single person)j 
 
 oi)3« «&: iMj8s slg, 112. 
 Slave, fioJAoff, 20. 
 Sleep (to), Koifidonai, sub, 
 
 vnvog, 132. 
 Slow, ^eaSiJff, 175. 
 . am" slow to do it = 
 
224 
 
 INDEX I. 
 
 will do it by leisure, ctoX^, 
 112. Diff. 35. 
 
 Slowly, aj^oXy (literally by 
 hisure: see 112.) — ^qa- 
 Sitoe, 175. 
 Smell of, S^a (1), 150 
 So — as to, MffTs with infin., 
 212. 
 
 — great, rrii.iMvzog, 22S. 
 
 — many, roaog, roaoade, 
 toaovtog, 65. 
 
 — powerful, 7^hxovTog, 228. 
 
 — that, mars with injin. or 
 indie, 212. 
 
 — , to be, ovzmg s^siv. 
 
 — to say, mg snog dnsTv, 144. 
 Socrates, ^ooxgari^S. See 15, 
 
 note f. 
 Soldier, argancoziig, ov, 228. 
 Solon, 2!6Xmv, mrog, 183. 
 Some, saziv o'l, ivioi, 264. 
 others, ol ntv — oi 
 
 Be, 41. 
 Sometimes, eativ ots, 264. 
 Somewhere, eaziv enov, 264. 
 Son, izaig (general term, 
 
 15). — v'wg, (with respect 
 
 to his parents). — often 
 
 omitted, 23. b. 
 Sophroniscus, HcocpQovlaxog, 
 
 24. 
 Sonl, yjvxv- 
 Spare, q:dSonai [genitive), 
 
 156. 
 Speak, Xtyw, 35. 
 . calumniously of, 7.oi- 
 
 SoQtofitti, dat. 183. 
 
 ■ ill of, xaxwff Xiysiv, 
 
 aec. 35. 
 
 Speak well of, si Xiym, ace, 
 35. 
 
 the truth, aXij&evm, 82 
 
 Spear, dogv, to, (?) 193. 
 Spend, arotXiaxio (?), 235. 
 Spring, euQ, TO, gen. IJqos 
 
 Stadium, azddiog, or azaSiov 
 
 136. 
 Staff, |«'^8off, rt, 138. 
 Stag, eXaifog, 35. 
 Stand open, anciiya, Perf. 2. 
 
 193. ' 
 by and see, &c.j 
 
 nsQiogdoo, 331, note o. 
 State, noXig (scog), fi, 8. 
 Stay (in a town), diaTQ0m, 
 
 96. 
 Steal, xXenrm, F. M., (xexXo- 
 
 qia,) 73. 
 Stick, Qa§8og, >;, 183. 
 Still, hi, 168*. 
 Stomach, yaat^q, cQog (?), tj, 
 
 235. 
 Stone, Xi&og, nhgog, 235. 
 Stop, [trans.) nova, [in- 
 
 trans.) navofiai, 188 (1) ; 
 
 with partic. 239. 
 Stove, xdfiTfog, 282. 
 Straight to, evOv [gen.) 309 
 Strange, OavnaoTog, 259. 
 Strangle, anayiuv, 18S (1). 
 Stream: flows with a full 
 
 or strong — , noXvg qsT. 
 Strength, xgaroff, 41. a&Evog, 
 
 t6, 319. 
 Strife, eqig, idog, ri, 183. 
 Strike, nX^aam (used by the 
 
 Attics in the perf. act 
 
INDEX I. 
 
 22.5 
 
 and in the pass, nazdaaeiv 
 being used for the other 
 tenses), — tintm. 
 Vorael says timei the 
 general term for strik- 
 ing on any thing: 
 7iai(o to strike a per- 
 son: to give blows 
 for correction: .con- 
 nected with Tiaig (!). — 
 nXi^tTco is TvnToi) and 
 naim strengthened, 
 Strip, kdvco, 125. 
 Strong, la-gvQog, 35. 
 Succour, iniKovQem, dat. also 
 
 ace. of the thing, 239. 
 Such a man as you, 6 ohg 
 
 av avriQ, 271. 
 Suffer {= allow), idm, 121. 
 — ndax«> (of suffering 
 painful things), 168*. 
 
 a thing to be done, 
 
 nsQioQuco, 331i 
 
 from a disease, xdnvm,^ 
 
 183. 
 
 pain, alyla, 20. 
 
 punishment, 8ixriv di86- 
 
 vai, gen. of thing, dat. of 
 person by whom, 228, 
 Suffering, nd&oe, 150. 
 Sufficient: to be — , doxstv, 
 
 175. 
 Sufficient: more than — , 
 nsgnTo. rmv doKOvvTCov, 
 174, f. 
 Suggestion, 243. 
 Superhuman (of—size), iibi- 
 
 Z<ov rj KUT ap&Qoonov, 16S 
 
 d. 
 Superintend, imaxomm, 206 
 Supply to, naQs'xm, 214. 
 Surpass, nsQktfu{gen.), 156. 
 Surprised (am), &avudl^ei, 
 
 P. M., 8. 
 Surprising, ■Oavfiaarog, 259 
 Surprisingly, ■Qavnaaicog wg 
 
 273. d. ^ 
 Suspect, vnonzivto, acc- of 
 
 pers., 293*. 
 Swallow, yeXidmv, orog (?), 
 
 341. 
 Swear by, o[iwiti, acc. (?). 
 
 351. 
 Sweet, 7iSvg,-2li. 
 
 T. 
 
 Table, rgdns^a, 188. 
 Take, Uii^dvto (?), 92. «»- 
 Quv, 190. 
 
 away from, aqjaigm, 
 
 125. 
 
 place. AS'ee Happen. 
 
 ■ care, (fgovii^co, 288. 
 
 hold of, la§ia&ai, 163. 
 
 in hand, imisiqim, 
 
 dat. 121. 
 
 myself off, dnalXaT' 
 
 To/jiai, 154. ^or. 190. 4. 
 
 off, ixdvBi, 125. 
 
 ■ pleasure in, i^8oftat, 
 
 dat. 20. 
 
 up, ttiQEiv, 188 (2). 
 
 Talent, rdXavTov, 82. 
 Talk, XaXsoo, 35. 
 
 t tt[i07jjiatf KEKjJlt]Ka. 
 
 10* 
 
226 
 
 INDEX I. 
 
 Task, Iqyov, 121, 
 Taste: give to — , allow- 
 to — , ysvoa (ace. of person, 
 
 gen. of thing). 
 Tasted, one who has never, 
 
 aysvarog, with gen. 150. 
 , to have never,= <o 
 
 be aygvGTog (with gen.) 
 Taught, that can be — , 
 
 Sidaxtog, 293*. 
 Teach, diddaxm (?), 125. 
 Teacher, BiSuaxaXog, 168*. 
 Tear, Sdagvov, 168*. 
 
 shed, — , daxQvm, 282. 
 
 Temper, &vfi6g, 121. 
 Temperance, aoownoavvT], 
 
 125, u. 
 Temperate, awq)Q(oi>, 125, ii. 
 Temple, vadg {vsmg, Att.), 
 
 41. 
 Ten thousand, [^ivgwi, 228. 
 Terrible, dstvog, 214 
 Thales, 0«% (?), 183. 
 Than any other single per- 
 son, ug avijg, 174. e. eig ys 
 
 avijQ wv, 172. 
 ever, avtog with gen. 
 
 of reciprocal pronoun, 
 
 167. 
 Thankful to be or feel, 
 xdgiv El8evai,'\ gen. of thing, 
 
 222. 
 Thanks, to return, x^Q'* 
 
 elSsvai,''! genitive of thing, 
 
 222.^ 
 That, txsivog, 46. 
 -- — , in order that, tva, 73. 
 
 That (after verbs of tel 
 
 ling), oTf, 73. 
 The — the, (with compar.) 
 
 0(TQ) T0(!0V7<p, 168*. 
 
 The one— the other, 6 «« 
 
 —6 5e', 38. 
 The morrow (the next day), 
 
 ^ avQiov, 26. 
 Thebans, 0,j§aM, 125. 
 Theft, xlonv, 73. 
 Then (ime), tots, 92. 
 
 (of inference), ovv, 
 
 100. 
 
 in questions, fFra, 
 
 318. h. inura, 318. i. 
 (See 315.) 
 There, Ixti, 28. 
 
 ('I'n)) flttQSIfJI, '■■'2. 
 
 being an opportuni- 
 ty, stagov, 250. 
 
 , to be, ndoEiiu. See 
 
 91. b. 
 
 Therefore, in Tavti]g r^g ai. 
 Tiag, ix 10VZ0V, 222. 
 
 Thick, Saavg, 150. 
 
 Thickly planted with trees, 
 Saavg SivSgwv, 150. 
 
 Thine, agg, 20. 
 
 Thing, ngdfjia, 8. 
 
 Things that are; existing 
 things, r« ovza, 65. 
 
 Think, vofti^ca, 52. ' oio/tai 
 (2 sing. o?h), 87. 
 
 happy, svduiuofi^at. 
 
 150. 
 
 Third, rg/ro?, 52. 
 This, ovzog, ode, 46. 
 
 t For elilmt, Bee 73, note q. 
 
INDEX r. 
 
 22'7 
 
 Tliis being determined, So- 
 ^av tavta, 249. c. See 
 note o. 
 
 — being the case, ex tov- 
 tov, 224. 
 
 Three, tQsig, tqm, 15. 
 
 Through (of space, time, 
 and means), dia {lov), 
 269. — (cause), dia (roV), 
 326. vno, gen. 
 
 (the whole coun- 
 try), ava naaciv rijv yijv, 
 259. 
 
 Throw, ^Mrrco, 235. 
 
 Thy, (Toff,20. 
 
 Till late in the day, psjfgt 
 noQgio ttje jjfi/pffff, 144. 
 
 Time, xQOfoe, 28. 
 
 , it is, mQtt, 65. 
 
 , in my, &c., eV cia.ov, 
 
 65. 
 
 To, 288, 319. 
 
 To Sardis, Chios, &c., im 
 2dQ8s(nv, im r^g Xiov, 288. 
 
 To speak generally, cog snog 
 
 EinHV, 144. 
 
 Together with, aiv (omit- 
 ted before avim, aiiz'^, &c.), 
 345. 
 
 Toil, iiovog, 154. 
 
 To-morrow, avQiov, 28. 
 
 Too (and that — ), xul ravta, 
 206. 
 
 - — great for, (fcc, compar- 
 ative with ^ Kara, before a 
 subst., fj maze before in- 
 fin., 168. 
 
 — soon (after cannot), 
 242. c. 
 
 Tooth, oSovg, G. oivrog, 6^ 
 
 20. 
 Touch, antopiai, 150. 
 Towards, after Ho act in 
 
 solently,^ slg, 319. 
 
 nQog, 319. stV, 
 
 259. 
 
 home, gii otxov. 
 
 288. 
 
 Town, aatv, to, 96 
 Transact, nQdrtm, 8. 
 Transgress, mnqa^aivm, 
 
 228. 
 Treat ill, >!«}((»$ ;;o(£ry, ace. 
 
 35. 
 
 welljfJwoisM', ace. 35. 
 
 Treaty, anovSal, pi. 228. 
 Tree, SsVSeoj' (?), 144. 
 Trick, rspj/, 214. 
 Trouble, novog, 154. 
 True, aXj?fl-fe 274. 
 happiness, jy cos aXri^ 
 
 ■d-mg svdainoriu, 274. 
 Trust (1) (= am confident) 
 
 ninoi&a, 119, note i ; 193. 
 (have ccmfidence in), 
 
 marsvco, with dat. only, 
 132. 
 Truth (the), to ukri&ig, 27L 
 dXi^&eia, 274. 
 
 Try (for murder), Sioonsiv 
 
 (fovov, 35 ; {am tried,) cpsv- 
 
 ysiv, gen. 
 , nsiQ&dfiai (governs 
 
 ^ew.), 121. 
 Tunic, y^iTtav, 125. 
 Turn, tqinm, 73. 
 Turned (am — into), jiyvoficu 
 
 (?),15. 
 
228 
 
 INDEX I. 
 
 Twice as many, SinXdacoi, 
 
 175. 
 Two by two, xara 8vo, 274. 
 
 U. 
 
 Uncommon degree (in an), 
 
 diacpsQOVTmg, 235. 
 Unconsciously, 242. c. 
 
 Uncovered, xpTlog, 235. 
 Under, vjt6, 326. 
 Undergo, vno^iva, 214. 
 Understanding, on an, irti 
 
 1^ ehai, &c. 227, n. 
 Undertake an expedition, 
 
 noQEvofiai, 24. 
 Unexpected, anQoaSoxtjTog, 
 
 224. 
 Unexpectedly, «| dngoadox- 
 
 ■qtov, 224. 
 Unfortunate, xaxo5«t)<(»«', 
 
 144. 
 Unjust, adixog, 138. 
 Unknown to myself, 
 
 242. c.^ 
 Unless, el 1/,% 112. 
 Until, a^?') l^^'XQh ^oDi', «W£, 
 
 306. 
 Up (adv.), avco, 28. wot 
 
 {prep.), ace. 259. 
 Upper, 6 avoo, 28. 
 Upper-chamber, iinsQ^ov, 
 
 96. 
 Upwards, avm, 28. 
 Use, xqaouM, dat. (contr. ?) 
 
 138. 
 Used to, imperf., 95, t. 
 Useless, /mot aio?, 206. 
 Utility; TO avftqiegor, 228. 
 
 7. 
 
 Vain, (idraiog, 206. 
 
 Value, Tifidofiai, 163. 
 
 Value very highly, «go woA. 
 J.oti nouTa&ai, 243. wepj 
 7roJ.J.ot) rroisraO'ai or ijjtrd- 
 ^a«, 282. 
 
 Vanished, qigovdog, 65. 
 
 (A) vast number, awpwf, 228. 
 
 Very, ndvv, 214. mg, 78. 
 - highly, iXsiarov, 
 
 162*. 6. 
 
 many, ^I'pi'oj, 228. 
 
 well, uQiara. 
 
 Vexed, am — at, ax&ofiai (?), 
 
 dat.20. 
 Victory, nxt], 132. 
 Villages, in — , xata, Kmjtae, 
 
 274. 
 Villain, xaxovgyog, 222. 
 Villainy, xaxovgyia, 222. 
 Violet, wv, 144. 
 Virtue, agerif, 8. 
 Voluntarily, i&eXovrijg, ov, 
 
 299. 
 Volunteer (as a), s&bXoviii^s, 
 
 299. 
 
 W. 
 
 Wall, V. tei%i^m, {subnt.) xsi- 
 
 Xog, TO, 222, 
 Want, dso/iai, 150. 
 Wanted, if I am, &c., idv 
 
 71 8iiri, or « Tj 5601, 91. (J. 6. 
 War, noltfiog. 
 Ward off, dfiiruv il TJfs, 
 
 222. 
 
 from myself, anv 
 
 vojicti, ace 222. 
 
INDEX i. 
 
 224< 
 
 Was near (= almost), dXi'^ov 
 deiv, 283. c. 
 
 Wash,Xoveiv, 188(1). 
 
 Watch over, iyQtjyoQsvai ntqt, 
 gen. 193. 
 
 Water, vdmg, ro, 15. 
 
 Way, odog, r;, 154. 
 
 Weak, da&av^e, 319. 
 
 Weakness, aa&svsia, 319. 
 
 Wealthy, nlovatog, 20. 
 
 Weep for, xataxXakiv (?), 1S8 
 (2), 278. 
 
 Weigh anchor, a'^Eiv {an- 
 chor, subaud.), 188. 
 
 Well, ei, 8. 
 
 to be, }(aXmg ex^iv. 
 
 What? Tj; 
 
 ■ kind of? noiog; 
 
 is, 7« ovra, 65. 
 
 comes from (the 
 
 gods) r« Twv &£mv, 54. 
 •comes next (to), za 
 
 ixotte'va, gen. 149. d. 
 
 ■ induces you to . . ? ti 
 
 (la&cBv ; 31 S. 
 
 • possesses you to . . ? 
 
 rlna-9(av; 318. 
 
 -, to — place, not, onci, 
 
 144, 72, p. 
 
 ■ we ought, « Y.Q'^, 91. 
 
 c. — ra Ssovta, 206. 
 Whatsoever, offijs, 92. f i' r/?, 
 
 269. ^ ^ ^ 
 When, oTS,i!isid^,i7ieidix,v,92. 
 
 ? noTS ; 92. 
 
 ■ you, ^ may, P ffa'por, 
 
 he, &c. ( might, \ 250. 
 you ought, &c., Siov, 
 
 250. 
 
 When it is your duty, Ss'o*,, 
 nqoarixov, 250. 
 
 or whereas it was 
 
 said, slQtinhov, 250. 
 
 thereis any occasion, ««» 
 
 n 8iij (or, after an histori- 
 cal tense, £t'rt5«'ot\ 91. a.b 
 
 Whence, no&sv, 100. 
 
 Whenever, dnojs', 96. 
 
 Where, nov, 144. onov, 72, p. 
 
 Whether, e", 335. idv, 336. 
 
 Which way = v hither, noT; 
 — in dependent questions 
 regularly, onoi, 72, p. 
 
 Whilst, &xQh «<»ff, 306. 
 
 he was walking, ^«- 
 
 Tu^v nsQiTzazwv, 288. •- 
 
 Whither, nol, 73, 144. in 
 dependent sentences, onoi, 
 72, p. 
 
 Who? zig; in dependent 
 sentences, regularly oazig, 
 72, note p. 
 
 in the world ? zig nozs ; 
 
 150. 
 
 Whole (the), 6 nag, or nag 6, 
 45. 
 
 ■, oA.0?, 138. 
 
 Whosoever, oazig, 92. fr?*?, 
 269. 
 
 Why? ziordiazi; 183. 
 
 Wicked, novi^gSg, {immoral, 
 vile), 188. — avoaiog (one 
 who breaks the divine 
 and natural laws. See 
 o(T(o?, in 293*,) 299. 
 
 Wickedness, novTjgia, 188. 
 
 Widow, zw«. 235. 
 
 Will certainly, 358. d. 
 
830 
 
 INDEX 1. 
 
 Willing: if you are—, « 
 aoi povXo/iev^ iari, 206. 
 
 Willingly at least, exmv ilvai, 
 144. 
 
 Wine, olvos, 15. 
 
 Wing (214), nrsQv^-^ala, 
 the wing with reference 
 to the wing-joint. — miqov 
 =^penna, the wing with 
 reference to the wing- 
 feathers [Doderlein.) 
 
 Wisdom, aocfia, 21. 
 
 Wise, aorpo?, 20. 
 
 Wish, 100 [distinction be- 
 tween Bovlouai and i&ilm, 
 100]. ^ 
 
 Withjffw {(lat.), ixeza. (g^n.), 
 24. 
 
 (by partic), sxoor, 
 
 aytov, qjigmv, XQiofievog, 235. 
 
 With a view to, ngcg (ace), 
 319. 
 
 ■ what object or view, 
 
 Ti ^ovi.6jiepog, 341. 
 
 impunity, x^^Q^v, 154. 
 
 three others, thaqros 
 
 avTog, 68. 
 
 you (us, &c.), to be, 
 
 naQeifii. See 91. b. 
 
 Within, lv6ov, 125. 
 
 Without, e^m,gen. 125. arsv, 
 gen. 150. x«f»§«s. 309. diga, 
 
 being dis- ] 
 
 covered 
 
 Wolf, XvKog, 41. 
 
 Woman, yvv^ R. yvmix, V 
 
 jirai, 15. 
 Wonder at, ■&atud^(a, P. 
 
 M. 8. 
 Work, sgyov, 121. 
 Worthless, ifuvXag, 144. 
 Worthy of, S^iog, 65, 150. 
 Would probably have been, 
 
 itcivdvvEvasp av (with in- 
 
 fin.), 359. 
 
 rather — than; ^5to» 
 
 av — iy, 87. 
 
 - that ! iidB, £'i'&' oaqpsAo* 
 
 served. 
 
 ob- 
 
 242. c. 
 '241. 
 
 -seen, 
 
 ■ knowing it. 
 
 («ff,s), eiyaQ^qjeXoVjOigiSqiB- 
 iop or w(peiov alone, 206. 
 
 Wound, tiTQtaaxm, 269. 
 
 Wretched, xaxodai/imv, (ill- 
 fated), 144. a&Xiog, 274. 
 
 Wrong, avoaiog, 299. See 
 293. 
 
 Year, ?zos, ro, 144. 
 
 You are joking, nai^ug l/oor, 
 
 350. g. 
 do nothing but, ovbh 
 
 &no ?— , 357. 
 
 there ! ovjog {uvtij) ! 
 
 325, d. 
 Young, veog, 168*. 
 
 bird, noaaog, 214. 
 
 Yours, v(a'tsQog,2i. 
 Yourself, 48, 49, 
 
 Z. 
 
 Zeal, to ngo&v/iov, {adj,)^ 
 
 60. 
 Zealous, ngo&vfiog, 221. e- 
 
INDEX II 
 
 List of Phrases and Words explauied.t 
 
 (6) (xyw* (fo^og, 228. 
 xyanav voTs naqovai or ta 
 
 nagorta, 73. 
 Hymv (= with), 235. 
 
 ' noisTv } p. 107. 
 
 alraTa&ai {mid.), not with 
 two accusatives, 124) note 
 
 P- , 
 A'ks^avSqog 6 (Pdinnov, 23. 
 alXoTi^ — / aiXoxi ; 318. 
 aXkag texai, 278, 
 ilmvai xXoTtqg, 73. 
 a^qpoTsgoj' ( -a), 345. 
 av&' far, 267. 
 aym, 8. 
 ano aov aQ^dfisrog, 100. 
 
 — 8sinvov yev£<j&ai, 243. 
 
 — roS nQOiparovg, 243. 
 anoSiSqaaKuv rim, 138. 
 «p;(j;V or r//* aqyfjV, 132. 
 OQ^o/isvog, 235. 
 
 cevzor? avSqiaiv, 350. 
 
 uvtog, 39. awToff a^rotJ, 166. 
 
 «g)' javrrav, 243. 
 
 5. 
 
 j3h)i^ sw ^Ksiy, 206. 
 
 ^■ 
 
 dsdoyi*srov, 249, note n. 
 Siivotarog guvtov ^a&a, 168j 
 
 note m. 
 a/oy, 249. a. 
 Stjlog iijM, 239. 
 SiuliTtcov xQopov, 235. 
 5e opy^s f/Ew, &c., 270. 
 Binaiog si/ii, 358. 
 Bixiiv dtdovai {gen.), 228. 
 fijojx£(»' q)ovov, 35. 
 Soxou)', 249, note n. 
 do^av {Bo^av tavta, &C.\ 
 
 249. c. 
 5ogj e'Asw', 193, note u. 
 SvvaifateQOi avtot aiioav, 
 
 168. c. 
 Svorv dsovTd {not de6fTo»\ 
 
 283. 
 
 ««vTot» eFyftj, 162*. i. 
 
 t Fhrases not found here may be looked for in their Alphabetical 
 luce in the last section. 
 
232 
 
 INDEX II. 
 
 iyxaXsiv ti uvi, 183. 
 ft aoi §ovXoiiev(p iariv, 206. 
 tl fieliei yevsa&ai, 283. 
 ti ^1] did, 125. 
 
 — t,g, 268. 
 
 x«{ allog, 174. d. 
 
 t"if wcpsXov {sg, «), 206. 
 f/'ej'w, eiQym, 154, note b. 
 tiQij/xevov, 250. 
 tig dvtiQ, 174. e. 
 kV S(SaaxaA.ow (ninnuv, cpoi- 
 riiv), 259. 
 
 — ti]v flhlirtnov, 23. 
 
 tjffjj' 01 ls'}'o*T£ff ?/263, note 
 
 oi Xeyovai ) a. 
 
 ixivdvvevasv civ Siayd'aQiirai, 
 
 359. 
 
 SXOOJ' slvtti, 144. 
 SfinoSav elvai, 293*. 
 £1' ToTg nQmiog, 259. 
 iVexa rmv eregmv, 250. 
 I'i'Soj' xara^a^sM', 125. 
 i^ afiQoadoxi^rov, 224. 
 jIoV, 249. b. 
 in iftol, 65. 
 tV tjuov, 65. 
 fj7i T(p shai, 227. b. 
 fjiixovgeTv i/oacp, 239. 
 iaiiv 01 (= mot), 263. 
 
 ovaTifag . . . . ; 269. d, 
 
 ev&v tTjg TioXstog, 309. 
 ev&iie tjxaiv, 309. 
 tqp cp or (jpTS, 266. 
 syfia&aiTivog, 149. (?. 
 f;f(av (= with), 235. 
 
 R ai^giov, 27. 
 
 V x«z«, with ace, 168. d. 
 
 ^ coffrs, with Hi^ra. 168, e, 
 ij noXkrj trig yKqag (not 
 
 noXv), 58. 
 KSt'coff «»> &Eac!ai[iijv, 86*. 
 fljTsg ^^X^**' 351. 
 
 0. 
 
 &avnuaag ex'"> 350- 
 ■Ottvixaalmg mg, 273. rf. 
 ■&uvfia,<STov oaov, 273. c. 
 
 XKt Off, 40. C. 
 
 — rai/Ta, 206. 
 naTiq^Ofiai, 270. 
 xKTftj, 28, note x. 
 xvvog SiHijv, 250. 
 
 A. 
 XavOdra, with par^ic. 242. c 
 Xeysiv, («5, xMxoaff, &C.), 35. 
 XtiQsTg s/oov, 350. ^. 
 
 M. 
 [xa ^ta, 341. 
 
 fxav&dva (with part.) 239. 
 ^f^'a^a uqis^EM', p.dnztiv, &C 
 
 82, 06s. 
 fiilXco yodqsEiv, <fec., 283. 
 (israiiiXsi (with part), 239. 
 ftsTaJt) nE^esraTcae, 288. 
 jUf^pt 710^^(0 xlqg fj/iSQUS, 141 
 
 lAVQlOl, flVQl'oi, 228. 
 
 f^ ^/j'«, 341. 
 
 A'. 
 
INDEX ir 
 
 233 
 
 O. 
 
 u «e. 40. 
 
 6 riiiiavg rov ^qovov, 59. e. 
 
 olog av arijQ, 273. 
 
 o» ancpl "Avviov, 283*, note x. 
 
 yriv sj^ovTSg, 278. 
 
 — TiolXoi, 45. 
 
 — TiQoariKovisg, 249. 
 olog Tt sl/xt, 283. 
 
 oicav {= on rotovrmv), 258. b. 
 
 6}.iyov dsco, 8stv, &c., 283. 
 
 ofxvviu {rovg ■Osovg), 351. 
 
 onmg av^Q i<tu, 287*. 
 
 oaov oh, V2i5. 
 
 oaovg ii8vrttTonXEiaTovg,l7i.c. 
 
 oatp — roaovtqi, 168*. 
 
 ott niyiazog, 174. b. 
 
 ov (ui Xalriaug ; &c., 287*. 
 
 — naviog iivai, 162*. i. 
 
 ov, not simply reflexive, but 
 used in dependent sen- 
 tences to denote the sub- 
 ject of the principal sen- 
 tence, 50, p. 29. 
 
 — snot used by Attic prose- 
 writers, except Plato, 50, 
 p. 29. 
 
 om sattv, 86*. d. 
 
 — sX<o {=^nonhabeo), 72. &. 
 ovSsig oazig ov, 277. 
 
 ovdev otov axovaai, 278. 
 
 7f, 150. 
 
 ovrog ! 325. d. 
 ovzcag iisiv, 72. c. 
 0^/ on — aXka xai, 82. 
 
 n. 
 
 tlOlQK fUXQOV ik&sXv, &c. 299. 
 naQ oXiyov disqisvyor, &'C.299. 
 
 naaa ij noXig, 45. d. 
 nohg, 45. d. 
 
 nifimog avzog, «fcc., 51. d. 
 
 nsQi noXkov noisia&ai, 283*. 
 
 nsQtogav, 331. 
 
 nEQiTza twr aQxovfTMV, 174.y 
 
 nicpvxs, 208. 
 
 Tiomv {sv, xaxMs), 35. 
 
 noXkanXdami rmwv, \7A.f. 
 
 noXvg Qii, 132. 
 
 3i6qq(o rrjg ^Xmag, 143. 
 
 ngh jioXlov Tioma&ai, 243. 
 
 ngoat'^siv, 331. 
 
 nqoariKOV, 250. 
 
 2. 
 avvoiSa inavr^ (aoqiog &v oi 
 
 (TogiQ) ovzi), 238*. 6. 
 ff;joAa (ffojjfcoj), 112. 
 
 r. 
 
 7«;fw«pa ^ aoqxazEQa, 174. a 
 ff^Evriui', 235. 
 zi fia&wv ; 317. 
 
 — Tta&cov; 317. 
 rjff note; 150. 
 
 TO «;ro Tovds, 34*./". 
 
 — ys jiJJj; ehai, 206. 
 
 — SOT zovzoig shut, 206. 
 
 — HQo&vfior, 60. 
 
 — rsisvraroy, 34*. /". 
 zo5 (with infin.), 216. 
 rovvavziov, 137. 
 zovvona, 137. 
 rovToi; ye lyexa, 250. 
 r(^ oyT(, 65. 
 
 (fiqtaf {with), 235, 
 
234 
 
 INDEX II. 
 
 qiigmv, 350. h. 
 (pBvyEiv q)6vov, 35> 
 
 , = avYeTv, 270. g. 
 
 (p&dva) (&c.) 242. d. e.f. 358. 
 h. c. d. 
 
 X. 
 
 Xoi'Qiv ift^v, 250. 
 Xftoiuevos I = with), 235. 
 
 n. 
 
 log inog slaetv, 444. 
 
 — avvsi.6v.ti einsTv, 444. 
 
 — T«;jK7Ta, 174. b. 
 
 — zd^ovg ^%ov, 278. 
 aamg il^iv, 351. 
 mcfeXov, 20G. 
 
INDEX HI. 
 
 List of Words that have some irregularity of Dkclen 
 siox or Conjugation. 
 
 A. 
 
 dyvvfU, 193. 
 
 |a<», F. M., 168*. 
 
 atj8(6v, 341. 
 
 aiQsm, 190. 
 
 aia&dvo[iai, 190. 
 
 aMvm, F. M., 92. 
 
 aXioxo/jiat, 73'. 
 
 aXkonai, 274. 
 
 auaqzdvat, 154. 
 
 avsiofiai, 214, note i. 
 
 avsqiya, dv£c^Y[tai,19ii; note q. 
 
 dvoiYco, 193. 
 
 daoxqivoiiai, 278. 
 
 aiToXoeva), 259. 
 
 'Anol-l-mv, 341. 
 
 fCQEaxoo, 337. 
 
 a^xcw, F. s'ffM, 173. 
 
 &X&ofiai, 20. 
 
 ^«(Vm, 228. 
 
 5. 
 
 yaia, 132. 
 yshMt), Kaoimi,278 
 pfvofitti, 15. 
 
 yjpooffxo), 156. 
 yovv, 20. 
 yuyij, 15. 
 
 dei, 60. 
 fl«'aw, 293*. 
 devdqov, 144. 
 diduaxoa, 125. 
 diSQaaxo},' 138. 
 diipdoi), 131, note b, 
 Wgr, 193. 
 5ox6oo, 96. 
 dvvttftat, 87. 
 5i5(», 125. 
 
 £a^, 341. 
 
 e7/it (i6o), 65. 
 
 £7ffo»', 60. 
 
 sXavrai, 24. 
 
 maivito, gen., F. M.,00. 
 
 imazaftai, 293*; 
 
 snoftai, 183. 
 
 i^ttoo, 274. 
 
 eQXOfiai, 112. 
 
 sWio), 144 
 
23rt 
 
 INDEX in. 
 
 evgia>t(o, 87 
 eX<x>, 15. 
 
 2. 
 fa'w, 131, note b. 
 
 H. 
 
 ijnm, 206. 
 t]iuavg, 58. 
 'HgnxXije, 183. 
 tigdfirjv, 73. 
 
 a 
 
 ©ttA^?, 183. 
 ^yjJwM, 125. 
 ■O-vydxriQ, 20. 
 
 7. 
 
 Ixviofiai, 242, note k. 
 
 X. 
 K^aioo, 150. 
 yXimco, F. M., 73. 
 MlaJiia, F. M., 121 
 nQivov, 144. 
 xiJcoy, 41. 
 
 X«iiBdi>(o, 92. 
 Jlaj'^aya), 154. 
 li/oo, 190. 
 
 [xaivoiiai, 125. 
 fiKjipnai, 73. 
 utirriq, 20. 
 
 M. 
 
 j/aJs, 125. 
 
 AT 
 
 
 oSov'tf, 20. 
 of 00, 150. 
 oiSa, 73, note q. 
 utxads, 331. 
 oio/iat, 87. 
 oti", 41, note 1. 
 o'lonai, 206, note a. 
 oiXviM, 193. 
 ofivviu, 343, note s. 
 oQam, to. 
 oQvig, 15. 
 w?,20. 
 ocpeiXm, 206. 
 
 77. 
 nait,tt), 343, note u. 
 ;7aa;]ro), 168*. 
 neivdm, 131, note b. 
 r^yvviii, 193. 
 wtVw, 144. 
 nim<o, 293*. 
 n3.ea), 188. 
 noQtvofiai, 24. 
 Uoaetdav, 341. 
 OToiJff, 20. 
 nqaog, 138. 
 
 (Tjyaco, F. M., 269*. 
 (Trroff, 259, note v. 
 (Txowai, 336, note L 
 artgovftai, 168*. 
 ZaxQazng, 15. 
 
 Tej«*m, 46, note «j^. 
 
 7(XT(0, 15. 
 
 TtTpwcrxo), 269*. 
 
rQe][m, 65. 
 ivyx^fon, 183. 
 
 vdoiQ, 15. 
 
 tpeQoai 60. 
 
 T 
 
 <P. 
 
 INBEX III. 
 
 (f&av(a, 241. 
 
 X. 
 
 ;{£i(fifi)V, 341. 
 ^gdojiai, 131, note b. 
 X^if, 91, note i. 
 
 237 
 
 TnE END. 
 
2), APPLBTON S CO:S PUBLICATIONS. 
 
 Short and Comprehensive Greek Grammar. 
 
 By J. T. CHAMPLIN, Professor of Greek and Latin in Waterville 
 College. 12mo, 208 pages. 
 
 In compiling this Grammar, Professor Champlin has drawn upon the best critics and 
 grammarians, and with the results of his research has interwoven much, original matter 
 suggested dming several years' experience in teaching, and editing Greek authors. Eis 
 design is to e^iibit the essential fects and principles of the language in the clearest, brief- 
 est, and most practicable form possible. "With this view, all theories and complications 
 belonging to gener^ grammar have been avoided, and only their results used. The am- 
 plification and illustration of principles bave been carried only so ^ as is necessary to 
 their comprehension. In this way all the real wants of the Greek student are met, while 
 his attention is not distracted by unnecessary and embarrassing details. Materials for 
 oral exercises are supplied, and a sketch of Greek versification Is given in an appendix. 
 
 From tite Eev. Me. Aitoeeboit, Ji&w Orleans. 
 "I believe the author has Holly accomplished what he proposes in his prefiice. To 
 those wishing to study Greek, I am satisfied he has presented a book which will much 
 tend to simplify the study to beginners ; and at the same time, without being too volu- 
 minous, presents as lucid and full im e^osition of the principles of the language as can 
 be contained within so small a compass.^' 
 
 Knhner's Greek Grammar : 
 
 Translated by Professors EDWARDS and TAYliOR. Large 12mo, 
 620 pages. 
 
 Kuhner''s is universally acknowledged to be the most accurate, comprehensive, clear, 
 and practical grammar of the Greek language now extant. It is the work of one who de- 
 voted his life to Greek philology, and spent years of patient labor in perfecting this work. 
 Too fiill and learned for the beginner, it is just what is needed for the college curriculum, 
 ' containing all that a book of reference should contain. The student will never appeal to 
 its pages in vain. In fuhiess of illustration, copiousness of reference, and philosophical 
 analysis of the various forms of language. It is unsurpassed, we might say unequalled. 
 
 The present translation is made by two distinguished American scholars, who have 
 revised the whole, verified the references, and appended an original treatise of their own 
 on Greek versification. As now presented to the public, it is believed to be as perfect 
 a granmiar of the Greek language as enlightened research and profound scholarehip can 
 produce. 
 
D. APPLETON & CO:S PUBLICATIONS. 
 
 Greek Ollendorff; 
 
 Being a Progressive Exhibition of the Principles of the Greek Gram- 
 mar. By ASAHEL C. KENDRICK, Professor of the Greek Lan- 
 guage and Literature in the University of Rochester. 12aio, 
 Z'lX pages. 
 
 The present work is what its title indicates, strictly an Ollendorff^ and aims to apply 
 the methods which liave proved so successflil in the acguisition of the modem languages 
 to the study of Ancient Greek, with such differences as the different genius of the 
 Greek, and the different purposes for which it is-studicd, suggest It differs Itom the 
 modern Ollendorffs in containing Exercises for reciprocal translation, in confining them 
 within a smaller compass, and in a more methodical exposition of the principles of lan- 
 guage. 
 
 The leading object of the author was to fiimish a book which should serve as an in- 
 troduetion to the study of Greek, and precede the use of any grammar. It wiD therefore 
 be fouad, although not claiming to embrace all the pi4nciples of the Grammar, yet.com- 
 plete in itself and will lead the pupil, by insensible gradations, from the simpler construc- 
 tions to those which are more complicated and difficult The exceptions, and the more 
 idiomatic forms, it studiously avoids, aiming only to exMbit the regular and ordinary 
 usages of the language as the proper starting-point for the student's flirther researches. 
 
 In presenting these, the author has aimed to combine the strictest accuracy with the 
 utmost simplicity of statement His work is therefore adapted to a younger class of 
 pupils than have usually engaged in the study of Greek, and will, it ia hoped, win to the 
 acquisition of that noble tongue many in our academies and primaiy schools who have 
 been repelled by the less simple character of our ordinary text-books. 
 
 Exercises in Greek Composition. 
 
 Adapted to the First Book of Xenophon's Anabasis. By JAMES E. 
 
 BOISE, Professor of Greek in the University of Michigan. 
 
 12mo, 185 pages. 
 These Exercises consist of easy sentences, similar to those in the Anabasis, having 
 the same words and constructions, and are designed by frequent repetition to make the 
 learner familiar with the language of Xenophon. Accordingly, the chapters and sections 
 in both are made to correspond, No exercises can be more improving than those in this 
 volume ; obliging the student as they do, by analysis and synthesis, to master the con- 
 structions employed by one of the purest of Greek writers, and imbuing him with the 
 epirit of one of the greatest historians of all antiquity. 
 
3TANDASD CLASSICAL WOBKS. 
 
 ^lU.A's Greek Beading Book, containing the ScK3tanco<ofthe 
 Practical Introduction to Greek Conatming and a Treatiee on 
 the Greek Particles ; also, copions Selections from Greek Au- 
 thors, with Critical and Explanatory English Notes, and a Lexi- 
 con. 12mo. 618 pages. 
 
 Boise's Dzercises in Greek Prose Composition. Adapted to 
 the First Book of Xenophon's Anabasis. By JiMBS K. Boisx, 
 Prof, of Greek in tTniversity of Michigan. ISmo. 186 pages. 
 
 Ghamplin's Short and ComprehensiTe Greek Grammar. By 
 J. T. CHAHFLnr, Professor of Greek and Latin in WaterTille 
 College. 13mo. 208 pages. 
 
 First Lessons in Greek ; * or, the Beginner's Companion-Book 
 to Hadley'a Grammar. By Jaues Moreis Whiton, Hector of 
 Hopkins's Grammar School, New Haven, Ct 12mo. 
 
 Hadley's Greek Grammar,* for Schools and Colleges. By Jaxb^ 
 Hadlet, Professor in Tale College. 12mo. 366 pages. 
 
 Elements of the Greek Grammar. 12mo. 
 
 Herodotus, Selections i^om; comprising mainly such portions 
 as give a Connected History of the East, to the Fall of Babylon 
 and the Death of Cyrus the Great. By Hsbkan H. Johhson, 
 D.D., 12mo. 185 pages. 
 
 Homer's Iliad, according to the Text of Wolp, with Notes, by 
 JoBH J. OwnN, D. S., LL. D., Professor of the Latin and Greek 
 Languages and Literature in the Free Academy of the City of 
 New Tork. 1 v(fl., 12mo. 740 pages. 
 
 Odyssey, according to the Text of Wolp, with Notes by 
 
 John 3. Owen. Sixteenth Edition. 12mo. 
 
 Enhner's Greek Grammar. Translated by Professors Eswabds 
 and Taylok. Large 12mo. 620 pages. 
 
 Eendrick's Greek Ollendorff.* Being a ProgressiTe Exhibition 
 of the Principles of the Greek Grammar. By Abahel C. Kbn- 
 DRioK, Prof, of Greek Language in the Unireraity of Eochester. 
 12mo. 371 pages. 
 
 Owen's Xenophon's Anabasis, A new and enlarged edition, 
 with numerous references to Enhner'e, Crosby's, and Hadley's 
 Grammars. 12mo. 
 
 Homer's Iliad. 12mo. 750 pages. 
 
 Greek Beader. l2mo. 
 
 Acts of the Apostles, in Greek, with a Lexicon. 12mo. 
 
 Homer's Odyssey. Tenth Edition. 12mo. 
 
 Thncydides. with Map; 12mo. 700 pages. 
 
 Xenophon's CyropESdia. Eighth Edition. 12mo. 
 
 Plato's Apology and Crito.* With Notes by yf. B. Ttmb, 
 Graves Professor of Greek is Amherst College. 13mo. 180 pp. 
 
. STAjmABD CLASSICAL W0BK8. 
 
 Thncydides's History of the Peloponnesian War, according 
 to the Text of L. Dindorp, with Notes by Johm J. Owbh. With 
 Map. 12mo. 
 
 Zenophon's Vemorabilia of Socrates. With Notes and Intro- 
 duction by B. D. C. Bobbins, Professor of Language in Middle- 
 bury College. l£mo. 421 pages. 
 
 Analjasis. ■ With Explanatory Notes for the use of 
 
 Schools and Colleges. By Jaues B. Boisb, Professor of Greek 
 in the University of Michigan. 12mo. 393 pages. 
 
 Anabasis, Chiefly according to the Text of L. Din- 
 
 dorp, with Notes by John J. Owen. Bevised Edition. With 
 
 Map. 12mo. 
 Cycopsedia, according to the Text of L. Deksobt, 
 
 with Notes by John J. Owen. ISmo. 
 Sophecles's (Edipus lyrannas. With Notes for the use of 
 
 Schools and Colleges. By Howabd Crosbt, Professor of 
 
 Greek in the UnlTcrsity of New York. 12ino. 138 page^. 
 
 HEBREW AND SYRIAC. 
 
 Oesenins's Hebrew Crammar, Seventeenth Edition, with Cor- 
 rections and Additions, by Dr. B. Eodiobe. Translated by T. 
 J. Conant, Professor of Hebrew in Eocheater Theological Semi- 
 nary, New York. 8to. 361 pages. 
 
 Ulilemaiui's Syriac Grammar. Translated from the German. 
 By Enoch Hctchinsoh. With a Conrse of Exercises in Syriac 
 Grammar, and a Orestomathy and brief Lexicon prepared by 
 the Translator. 8to. 367 pages. 
 
 D. APPLETOIT & 00., 90', 92 & 94 Grand Street, If. T, 
 
 PUBLISH VFWAXS OF 
 
 300 SCHOOL TEXT-BOOKS, 
 
 Inelndlng the Departments of Buglish, Latin, Greek, French, Span- 
 ish, Italian, Hebrew, and Syriac ; of which a complete 
 
 DESCRIPTIVE CATALOGUE 
 
 Wm be lent, free qf postage, to these aigfiifing for it. 
 
 A single copy for escamination, of any of the works marked 
 fhns *, will be transmitted by mail, postage prepaid, to any TeacK- 
 *r remitting one-half of its price. Any of the others will be sent 
 by mail, postage prepaid, upon receipt of full retail price.